THE KING EMPEROR
AND H!S DOMINIONS
SOUV1INIR OF THE CORONATION DURBAR OF
H.I.M. GEORGE V.
. DF.CEMBER, 1911
Wi1h lho Compliments of RROUGHS WF-U,COMI£ & Co.
.
TPC
•%:
'
'-p^-
/r^C -r^.
LIBRARY
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA RIVERSIDE
It i:. our ;;ad duty to rc<.v>rd the deaths ot
T n r- N i 7. A M r F H Y i tt H A H A n
(l.icut. On. His Hu'lr.rss Hi/am ul-Mulk. Sit Mahhuh Ah Khan Baliadur. G.C.B.. ii.C..S.I.I and of
TH !•: M •• H AI- A.: A 01- K •• M Hi-. H A ;•• (Colonel His Highness Maliaraja Sir Nripendra Narayan Bhuh Bahadur. G.C.I.E.. C.B.. A.D.C.i. which have taker, place since this boo!', was printed.
BUR RC ur, H s W F.J.I. . ;.: F. % Co.
T ii i S r A K 11 1 INDIA
The Star of India is the famous Order of Knighthood for India in-muttd
by the Queen-Kmpress in 1S6I. The above illustration depicts the Jewel
of the Order as worn by Knights Commanders.
THE KING EMPEROR "\\T
AND HIS DOMINIONS
S6"UVENIR OI: THE CORONATION DURBAR O f;
H.l.M. GEORGH V.
DELHI, D EC KM B HP, 1.) I 1
V\ i i li i he Compliments »f
BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co..
SHANGHAI BUENOS A i R e }
K
'
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Acknowledgment is made to the following owiurs of copyright for kind permission to reproduce the photographs and plates enumerated :—
Messrs. BOUKXK & SHKI-HKKI). India (panes IS. 4S. 60. 92. i;_>. 156. }(,<). 170, 171'; CAPTAIN J. I.. SI.KKMAX (pane 10JI : CTKATOK Oh THI: INDIAN MUSEUM. South Kensington • panes f;S, 76. ,V), S_'. ,s4. .•^6 ; Messrs. W. & I). DOWNI.V 'pants 9. 10. 11. 371; Messrs. Ku.invr \ I-KV (pants 100. \22, IJ3. 1J4. 1J5. US. 1-"J. 130. 13J. 134. 13ri. 15S. 1 40. 14J. 144, 14«'; Messrs. F. FKITH cV Co. panes 13. 14, 16, 17, 19.4). ,\s. yd); Messrs. ISAAC PITMAN \ SONS pane 40> : Lc»xi>f)X XKWS AUKXCV (panes 12, 4], 56, 293 ; NATIONAL POKTKAIT GAI.I.KKY (panes 1JO. l_'i>: Messrs. RUSSKI.I. 'pane 3Si; Messrs. VNPKKWOOD \ I'MIKK\V(MII> (panel5>: Messrs. VANDVK (panes 154. 158. 160. 16_'. 161. K/>. 16S'.
SECTIONAL INDEX (I'm -nil! iuJfv. sec faxes S87-392)
Pages Portraits and Pictures 9
Coronation Regalia
India: Past and Present 43
Some Governors and Viceroys 113
Some Famous Secretaries of State
Provinces cf India and their Rulers Some Native States and Princes
TheMarchofScier.ee 173
The Evolution of Weapons for the Battle cf Life 237
Weapons zf Precision produced cy Science and Industry ..
Malaria and Quinir,; ... 271
Some Historic Flights by Airship and Aero; lane
Modern Methods in Photography ... 29 =
The ' Ws'.lrot-.e ' Materia Msiica Fan". 310
Historical Medical E:juipr-.e-ts •
Welfare W;rk... 34^
" Pray you halt awhile.
His Majesty steps e'en now across thejthreshold. Never did footfall more musically keep time With our hopes: he comes to lighten all hearts."
lli> Me. si l-.N.-rlli-nt M.ijtsu
< '. I . . K . . I I II I III III
KM .•• (,n.i! Bnt.iin.m<l lid. HI. I .iiul uf tin- Hrin-.li I >. .1111111. m> !«•
the Seas. ICtupfi'iir nt liuli.i. Horn JUIH i. ISi.S : MU-crrilr.l lo ill, Tin..!!! . M.iv I,. I'.lu
Her Majesty Q u E K s MAR v Born May 26. 1867
[\V x P. Do-.', uey
His Km..I Iliuhnt >- i< n A I is r K I . I'rinrr <if \\';il( I '.urn .linn ..'.;. Is'M
SOME FAMOUS ANCESTORS A N D P R H D E c E s s o R s
0 F T H H
KING E ,M iMi R o R
ALFRED— "THE GKKAT" Kintf of the West Saxons. 871-901
KAV IUJAM the CONQUEROR
\V I I I. I A M Mil I; I I; s 1
Horn 10-7. Rricncd !()•.(. -10h
HKNRY THE FIRST Born 1068. Reitfnecl 1)00-1135
KllWAKI) THK THIKII
Born 1312. Reigned 1327-1377
<)r I. K N }•'. i. I / A M i. r ii Horn 1533. Ki-i«nt:«l 155H-IWJ3
.1 A M I S Till FlKSI <>l Ksi.l AN1> \N1> Sl\
Horn I5«i. Proclaims! Kim; of Si-oil.in.l in I.V.r
M "i Si <> i i A N n
.111,1 K, i^nr.1 ,>•
(i C-HARKKH tin- FIRST
C H A K I. KS T H K V I KST
Born 1600. Reigned 1625-1M9
C H A R I. 1
J.KBW.T
C' M \ K i i s i ii i: Sv:
\VlI.I.IAM I H K TlllKl)
Born 1650 Reigned 1 688-1 70 j
( i I 0 K 1. I 1 II I I 1 K •• I
Horn H>60. Kri^ncd 1714 i;
—
. -
/ k». \'f
G K «) K Ci K T H K S K I < > N I>
Born 1683. Roitfnt-d 17.27-1760
(."• KDK I.
Morn 17.5S.
G K O RG E T H K F O U R T H
Horn 1762. Reitfned 1820-1830
36
Qut'tn of (irt'.it Britain and Ireland, and I'irM Kinpress of India. Horn 1M<). Ki'itfnrd IS.ir I'HU
37
V. I) W A K l> 'I II K S K V I N 1 II
Kiny of Great Hritain and Ireland. Kmperor nf Indi.i Horn 1841. Kci^nod l'X)l-19IO
CORONATION K H (i A LI A
S o M K FAMOUS BRITISH CROWS' 40
I N D I A :
PAST AND PRESENT
INDIA: PAST AND PRESENT
I N T R 0 D t C T I I ) N
THI-: history of the early ages is marked by many vague converging lines which point to a nucleus of human civilisation somewhere in the west central region of Asia.
Before written records, betore even the beginning of monumental and rock-cut chronicles, pictorial, pictograpliic or hieroglyphic, the Aryan family peopled the fruitful plains and took shelter among the rocky fastnesses of that birth- place of their race
The history ol their wanderings and of the development of their several branches, contains all that is best and greatest and most worthy in the long chapter of human achievement.
The exploits of each of the distinct and very diverse peoples who spread from this common stock over Kurope and Asia, are of immense interest, but behind these lies tin- story of the family itself.
The mass of detail and the crowd of figures which spring Tlle Ar>"
. . . . family
upon the stage when written history begins tend to obscure the most poignant situations in the slowly unfolding drama of these Aryan brethren. It is only by leaping manv centuries in a single stride and disdaining in our (light the narrow landmarks of dynastic and national epochs, that \\e can mark the steps of evolutionary progress, and observe the true outlines of the strange and moving spectacle o! man in the making, as it reveals itsell in the story ol this great branch of the human race, and trom such a rapid review some new points of fascinating study emerge
I low dramatic, for instance, when viewed in this light, is the meeting which takes place to-day in Hindustan Ixjtween the English and their Indian brethren. For brethren they are. scions both of the same Aryan family. Their ancestors once worshipped the same gods, tilled the same eartli anil roamed side by side the same central plains. They have wandered far apart for manv thousands of years, to wandcnn come together at last upon the sacred soil of India, in tin- historic streets of I'elhi, bv the banks of the mighty (ianges or beside the blue waters of Narbada.
The Anglo-Saxon has come to this eventful meeting through a pathway of long and strenuous educational struggle. His Celtic and Germanic ancestors were among the first to break away from their Aryan home. He has wrestled with fierce enemies and conquered immense natural difficulties, cold and hunger have taught him their bitter but effectual lessons, and the sea has schooled him in its splendid secrets. He has been the heir of all ages and has assimilated as part of his intellectual heritage
" The nlory that was Greece, The grandeur that was Rome."
The struggle for existence against enormous odds has directed his attention towards material problems, and he has learned to tame the forces of nature and mould them to his will.
The sheer necessities of time and place have forced upon him the pursuit of knowledge in its most practical forms. He has had to build against the tempest and the storm, to foresee and provide for winter and famine, to gather energy from mechanical science and capture electricity from the very clouds in order to accomplish the Titanic tasks to which destiny has called him.
And all this time, while the long and stormy panorama of European history was unwinding its slow length, and developing this latest product of Aryan civilisation in the north, another limb of the same growth, a branch of the self-same family tree was progressing and developing in an entirely different direction, upon the fruitful plains which lay secluded from the rest of the world, beyond the barrier of the Himalayas.
The Hindus were, it is thought, the last to leave the central home of the Aryan family. That the whole race, or rather the vast and varied congeries of races, now grouped under the generic name of Hindu, is not all of Aryan descent, is obvious. Few, perhaps, can be regarded as entirely devoid of some admixture of alien blood, but the Aryan has stamped the impress of his character upon the whole of India, and has given to the art, religion and philosophy of this wonderful country its most distinctive and characteristic features.
AMI I-KI-SKNT
To the genius of an Aryan people must be attributed the marvellously intricate structure of Hinduism, that all- embracing system which is at once a religion and a social organisation, and which has for ages dominated the minds, and controlled the secular occupations of so many millions of the human race.
While Europeans have sought to conquer the world of external nature, the Hindu has, for thousands of years, been pre-occupied with the affairs of the soul. Religion and philosophy, the pathway towards a higher spiritual state, the search through the visible towards the unseen, these have been the subjects of his constant thought, and such themes form the immense mass of Vedic and post-Vedic literatute.
At last the course of events has set these two widely divergent aspects of Aryan civilisation, the Anglo-Saxon and the Hindu, side by side in modern India. In their resemblances, as well as by their contrasts, they provide what is, perhaps, the most remarkable ethnological object lesson on the influence of environment rind of hereditv which the world has ever seen.
To tract- out in brief outline some of the causes and impulses which ha\c moulded modern India, and have made it a land ol such vivid contrasts, deep impenetrable problems, and withal a land and a people of such enthralling and surpassing interest, is the object of the following pages
Eastern a
Western
rjviiisatio
IAST AND I'KKSKNT
C H A P T K R I B R A H M A N I S M
From certain passages in the Vendidad, a part of the sacred Zend Avesta of the antient Persians, it appears that the final dispersion of the Aryan family was traditionally attributed to some great natural cataclysm or upheaval (probably volcanic) which brought about a disastrous change of climate at the site of their antient home.
" There Ingromaniyus the Deadly," says the record, "created a mighty serpent, and snow, the work of Deva ; ten months of winter are there, two of summer."
Snch a description accords with the present climate of parts of Tibet, I'amir and the district about the sources of the Oxus and the Jaxertes. and points to this region as the cradle of the Aryan race.
There are no known monuments of this great ancestral family but it may well be that Tibet, that home of mystery as yet so incompletely explored, contains some which await the patient investigation of future ages. Hut man has been more permanent even than his monuments, and language both antedates and outlasts written inscrip- tions.
Philological research under the impulse of such men as Jacob Grimm. Colebrooke, Max Miiller, and others, has succeeded in lifting the veil and throwing some faint light upon the habits of these people and the degree of civilisation attained in that far-off age.
It has been shown that the Aryan, Greek. Italian, Letto- Sclavonian, Germanic and Celtic languages are all derived from the same source.
To such a common origin, the root sounds which lie at the base of these languages in all or most of the words that denote the common daily wants of life, bear witness. These word roots show that, previous to the great disruption, the Aryan tribes had learnt the use of ploughs, boats and wagons, that they had tamed the horse and were accustomed to such domestic animals as oxen, swine, dogs and goats.
They knew something, too, of weaving and the use of numbers, and had weapons of iron.
They had also divided the year into periods of time- according to the phases of the moon.
It was a part of this noble race, already far advanced upon the road of knowledge and culture, which began, probably more than 3000 years ago, to force its way through the narrow denies of the Himalayas, and to descend upon the northern plains of Hindustan.
They marched forward across the Sutlej river and on, in ever-increasing numbers, towards their new home in tin- south-east, and as they marched they sang.
The Veclic hymns, which have come down in unbroken succession from mouth to mouth, through many generations, form probably the most complete, and certainly the most voluminous body of oral tradition in existence. They were first inscribed, not upon stone or parchment, but upon the unseen tablets of the human brain, and to this day there are youths in Brahmanic families who can repeat the whole of the 10,580 verses of the Rig- Veda by heart.
At what date they were first written down in Sanskrit, is unknown ; many manuscripts have doubtless perished in the destructive climate of India. The oldest at present in existence was written about A.I). 1008.
The Vedas, the composition of which is traditionally ascribed to the seven sacred Rishis from whom Brahmans claim descent, are not written in the form of annals or records of scenes, and events ; they were mainly invocations to the bright gods whom the Aryans worshipped ; but none the less, they contain many references by which it is possible to trace, step by step, the settlement of the conquering Aryan race in their descent southwards through the Punjab.
They also contain much interesting information concerning the social and family customs of the people as well as their religious beliefs. Like most nomadic tribes they were patriarchal in their earliest systems of government.
The father of the family was at once the warrior and the priest. The chieftain was regarded as the father and the priest of his tribe.
They adored the deity as the Father of Heaven, Dyaush- The ear pitar, and the encompassing sky, Yaruna.
Indra was the god of Clouds, and Aqua'ous Vapour, and Agni the "0(1 of Fire.
As the importance of recurrent rains became more and more obvious Indra grew to be the chief deity of these early Yedic hymns.
By decrees, gifted families who composed or learned the Vedas, were chosen to recite them at special sacrifices or festivals, and members of this priestly caste grew to be the sole depositories of all the lore of the national religion.
The successful prayer was called a Brahman, and those Theda who chanted the appropriate hymns and offered sacrifice Brahma were Brahmans.
At first selected for natural talent, they soon became a hereditary caste, and they succeeded in moulding practically the whole population into the social organisation which they desired. This consisted of the division of the people into four great orders or castes, afterwards split up into almost innumerable subdivisions.
The Brahmans, the priestly and literary caste. The Kshattriyas or Kajpnts, the warriors and com- panions ol the King.
Yaisyas the husbandmen , cultivators < >f the soil ; and the Sud ras, or scr Is, to whom the lowest tasks were deputed, and who were not permitted to take part in the national sacrifices.
It was not \\ithout a simple that the Brahman- obtained their position ol superiority o\er the proud warrior caste, and they \\ere even forced at one period, to assign a higher place to the Rajputs, but gradually their superior mental attainments and the necessity for their set \ ices at all national, tribal ami t.imily functions won the dav. Through many verses ol the Yeda there runs the story of a dispute between Ya-ishtha. an Arvan sage, type of the priesthood, and \ isvanutra, a representative of the royal warrior rank.
1 he Brahmans taught that thev came from the mouth of the Creator. It was theirs to counsel and direct men in
I'AST AND PKESKNT
The ideal life of a Brahman
The historical value of the Veda
the path they should follow, and to propitiate the national gods.
The Kshattriya, or Rajput, was sprung from the Creator's arras, and it was his mission to fight the enemies of the State.
The Vaisya came from the thighs of the deity, and his task was to till the earth, to buy and sell and to practise various trades and professions.
The Sudra came, the Brahmans taught, from the feet of God, and it was his duty humbly to serve the other castes ; he was not permitted to approach thesolemn sacrifices, or to touch the food of the Brahman.
Their power once established this great priestly caste showed extraordinary wisdom in its exercise. While claim- ing for themselves supreme rank, the Brahmans disclaimed worldly pomp and luxury and demonstrated the deep sincerity of their religious aspirations by prolonged study and the practice of severe austerities.
The ideal life of a true Brahman was divided into four parts: his youth was spent in study of the sacred traditions, as a young man he married in his own caste and under- took the duties of a householder ; having reared a family he departed, in middle age, to the forest and spent several years in lonely meditation and asceticism as a recluse. The last stage of his life was that of a holy mendicant, dead to all material joys, wandering from place to place, staying but one day in a village lest earthly ties or claims should beckon him back to the world, and eating nothing save what was voluntarily bestowed upon him as he passed.
All his life a Brahman practised the greatest temperance. It was a life of self-restraint, of self-culture, of prolonged study, and of earnest seeking after spiritual truth.
The study of the Vedas has brought to light many very important and interesting facts concerning the early condition of Hindu society. The oldest, the Rig- Veda, to which reference has already been made, contained no allusions to caste. In it, woman occupies a high and dig- nified position as the friend and companion of man. The
PAST AND
suttee was as yet unknown. In these sacred and primitive records of religious aspiration the prayers and hymns of a great people, noble yet child-like in their simplicity and magnanimity, rise to their bright gods, their shining ones Brahma, Agni, Indra, Varuna and the rest.
The earliest songs disclose the race still to the north of the Khaibar Pass in Kabul the later ones bring them as far as (iangcs. The settlers spread over the vast plain of the five rivers, and from a nomadic, became a settled, population of husbandmen.
Veda meant simply " inspired knowledge," and in process of time all the Yedic hymns, by their various Kishis or families of composers, were arranged into four books for the use of the ministering priests. The Rig-Veda contained the hymns in their simplest form ; the Sama-Veda was made up of extracts from the Rig-Vedic hymns to be used at the great Soma sacrifice ; the third, or Yahur Veda, contained Rig-Vedic verses and also prose sentences intended for use at the sacrifice of the new and full moon and at the great horse sacrifice; the fourth, or Atharva Veda, was compiled from the least ant lent of the Rig-Veda hymns, and from later songs of the Brahmans.
As the cert-monies bi-cami- more elaborate, additional instructions in their symbolism and ritual became nt-ct-s- sarv, and the Brahmanas \\t-re composed as commentaries to each of the Vedas Besides explaining the Vedic ritual, they contain many religious precepts and maxims, and are included among the snitt. or things heard from (iod.
They were succeeded by the Sutras, or sacred traditions, although these were not regarded as of equal sanctity to the Vedas and Brahmanas.
A further series of theological works, t!i<- I'panishads and the Aranyakas ; the law codes, including the famous Code of Mann, and much later the 1'uranas, or traditions from of old, make up a great body of Sanskrit bteratute. the origin of which, scholars attribute to various periods from boo B.C. to A.n. 1000.
= f-
Thus, in the central plain of the dances, the middle land of India, the Aryans established their gods, their learning, and a new social order. Into the spacious trian- gular region, bounded by the Himalayas, the Vindliyas, and the (ihats, they pushed steadily southwards.
The land was not won without lighting, but once con- quered, the aboriginal races appear to have accepted their fate with resignation, and ceased to struggle against the superior civilisation of the north.
The system of caste crystallised and grew harder. The old Yedic gods, who had seemed such near and friendly beings, faded, and the Brahmanical triad of Brahma, Vishnu and Siva took their place.
Of these, Vishnu was the most popular, and the Bralimans taught that no less than ten times he had visited the earth ; his seventh and eighth incarnations as Rama and Krishna were the most revered.
Siva, the I 'estroyer and Producer, was the embodiment of that conception of death as the gate of a new and altered life, which permeates Hindu thought.
Besides the Vedas and their commentaries, there has come down, from verv early times, a great body of traditional poetic literature, including the two great epic poems, the Mahabhatata and the Kamavana.
These throw further light upon the early history of the Hindus, and depict the struggles of gods and heroes in the twilight of the prehistoric period, when the Arvans were settling on the territory between the Jumna and the Ganges, which is still regarded as the "holy ground of India.
The " Mahabharata," which contains i m.ooo shlokas or couplets, relates the storv ol the five miraculously born sons of King I'andu. of how they won the 1'rincess I>ranpadi at the tournament arranged in her honour ( >l the jealousy and hatred of the cruel Kaiir.ivas. Of how Yudishthira, the eldest of the five brother-*, staked his kingdom on the dice, and losing, went into exile with his brethren and I>ranpadi. <>f how the Pam'avas fought and slew all the Kauravas, and reigned in I>elln gloriously, until
56
PAST AND
the taunts of their uncle, Dlirita-raslitra, who accused tliem of the murder of his hundred sons, filled them with remorse.
It relates their abandonment of the kingdom and their pilgrimage to Heaven, far up the heights of Mount Meru in the Himalayas, where Indra dwells in everlasting peace.
Many philosophical and didactic discourses are added to the main story, intended for the most part as instructions to the military caste in its duties, especially in that of reverence towards the Brahmans.
The " Ramayana" has a more mythological and allegorical T in- tone. It recounts the story of Sita, literally the field furrow and symbolical of Aryan husbandry, and of the divine hero Rama, an incarnation of Vishnu, who defends Sita against the raids of savage tribes. A demon prince carries oft Sita to Ceylon, and the wanderings of Rama, in his efforts to recover her, incidentally display the southward movement of the Aryan tribes.
Among later Sanskrit epics, the " Raghu-Vansa " and the " Kumara-Sambhava " are the most notable, and, from tin- astrological data contained in them, belong evidently to a period about A.D. 350. They are attributed to Kalidasa, who was also the father of the Sanskrit drama and the author of that sweetest of Indian poems, " Sakuntala " or the " Lost Ring," a subject which aroused the enthusiasm of the great (Joethe and whirh he. in turn, enshrined in beautiful and deathless verse. The Brahmans had, too, a circle of the sciences, and a system of philosophy.
Five hundred years before the Christian era, their deep ponderings on the mysteries of the universe hail carried them far beyond the early animistic conceptions of the divinity common to most primitive races, and had rendered inadequate also, to their minds, even the Iriendlv forms of the bright gods of their fathers.
Six schools of Brahmanical philosophy came into being. The first was the Sankhya system of the sage Kapila, .,CIIO<,K ot according to which the visible world lias been evolved by philosophy successive stages out of primordial matter existing from all eternity.
INDIA: PAST AND PRESENT
The second was the Yoga school of Patanjali which spoke of a primordial soul anterior to primeval matter, and held that from the union of the two the spirit of life arose.
The third and fourth schools, represented by the Vedantas, recognise an omnipotent creator; and the fifth, or Nyaya school of Gautama, describes the methods of arriving at a knowledge of truth and lays stress on the importance of the senses as avenues of knowledge.
The sixth school is the Vaiseshika, founded by the sage Kanada, and is classed with the fifth ; it teaches the existence of a transient world composed of eternal atoms, and relates how the divine mind first gave existence to water and then to innumerable worlds floating on the waters. Within the mundane egg lay Vishnu, and from his body there sprang the sacred lotus from which Brahma was born.
These systems of philosophy contain the germ of those evolutionary theories of development which modern scientists have deduced from a wider and more exact study of natural phenomena.
Religion, philosophy and a social organisation, which, despite its defects, attained a marvellous vitality and solidity and has lasted, in an elaborated form to the present day, were the gifts, as has been seen, which the Brahmans bestowed upon India. The study of language remained , and this was entered upon by a brilliant succession of native scholars and grammarians culminating in the splendid achievement of Panini. As early as 350 B.C. Panini wrote a Sanskrit grammar which stands supreme among works of the kind for its luminous precision of statement and for its complete analysis of the roots of language.
Sanskrit, which has been a dead language for nearly two thousand years, bears a relation to many Indian dialects similar to that of Latin in regard to the Romance languages of Europe.
Very early, even before Panini's time, the spoken form of the language called Prakrita-bhasha had begun to diverge from the written Sanskrit, and as the Aryans mingled with the surrounding population, the old synthetic forms were corrupted into various dialects. As an aid to the memory,
58
INDIA : I'AM AM) I'KI SKNT
Sanskrit writings, even on such grave subjects as law and philosophy, were composed in verses (shlokas), so that the art of prose writing in that tongue almost disappeared. Even dictionaries were written in verse.
Brahmanism, with its immense body of literature, composed in this antique and sacred language, no longer spoken by the people but treasured by priests and men of learning, may be regarded as the fundamental basis of Hindu national character as it exists to-day.
Many circumstances have, however, tended to modify and oppose Brahmanical influence, and of these one of the most important was the growth of Buddhism.
..(I
C H A P T H K II B U 1) 1) H I S M
The story of Buddha — the enlightened one is in some respects typical of that perfect life ot the Brahman with
, . , . The story
Us four successive stages of learner, householder, forest of Buddha recluse and ascetic mendicant, which had already become an ideal. But in the place of the Brahman's social organisation Buddha put forward a new doctrine of universal brotherhood and charity, and, while practising supreme renunciation and self-sacrifice in his own person, busied himself, for the four-and-forty years of his wandering ministry, with the salvation of others.
Many legends and myths have grown up round the events of his life, yet nothing of the miraculous, which has ever been set down among his earthly achievements, equals the miracle of his teaching and of its influence in the world, where, to-day, 500 millions of the human race avow faith in HIS early his doctrine. The plain and simple story of his life and iiic work presents a picture of well-nigh matchless dignity and the moral and intellectual splendour which shines out from the whole history of Sakya-Muni is in itself a miracle, a thing of wonder. Through twenty-five centuries of plunder, avarice and crime, the life of Buddha comes down as a priceless human tradition.
That precepts so tar above the reach of "human nature's daily food " should have been modified to suit first <>nc and then another ambition or frailty of mankind was onlv natural These were but the necessary consequences of the serene spirituality and aloofness from all that is vulgar, animal ami base, \\hich characterised the life and the message ol Buddha
In the Sanskrit. Buddha means simplv Wisdom, and was doubtless applied as a title ot honour to more than cue religious teacher before the advent of Sakya-Smha, to whom, however, it is now generally confined. Sakya-Smha himself declared that he was the twentv-titth Buddha and that another. Bhagava Methayo, is still to come.
Gautama Buddha, whose personal name was Siddhartha. and who was afterwards called the Sakya-Muni. or hermit,
INDIA : I'AST AM) 1'KKSKNT
has been variously regarded as a saint, an incarnation of Vishnu and a divinely born teacher. Ha was the only son of Suddhoclana, King of Kapilavastu. His father, the chief of the Sakya clan, ruled over an Aryan settlement at the base of the Himalayas, about a hundred miles north of Benares, and himself, a warrior of the Solar race, desired his son to adopt a military career. But from his youth Gautama was given to meditation and study, and loved better his solitary introspective communings than the sports and pastimes of his fellows.
To rouse him from his day-dreams, the King, his father, arranged a Swayam-vara, or "maiden's choice" tourna- ment at his court. Gautama showed unexpected strength and courage, and, becoming the victor, claimed as his bride the fair Yasodhara.
For ten years he lived a life without a history. Peaceful domestic happiness, and such luxury as the age afforded were his, but material felicity failed at last to satisfy the deeper and more spiritual needs of a profoundly religious nature. Buddha, a Straving beyond his pleasure grounds, Gautama met an
Rajput prince
old man bowed and broken beneath the weight o! vears. He saw, too, a paralytic watching with glazed eye the coming of misfortune which he was powerless to hinder or avoid ; again he looked and saw a man suffering from the plague, and further on, a corpse. This tragic procession of the woes of humanity made an indelible impression upon the young prince.
His wife had but recently given birth to a son. On hearing of it, Gautama said: "This is another strong tie I have to break." In the palace the nautch girls came as of old to dance before him, but he heeded them not and fell asleep. When he awoke an overwhelming distaste for the world -his world of luxurious indulgence and flimsy magnificence -seized him. He determined to seek for wisdom and self-control in the negation of all earthly pomp and pleasure.
Calling Channa, his charioteer, he bade him get ready for his departure.
It was midnight, and he paused lor a moment upon the threshold of Yasodhara's chamber, to give a parting caress to his infant son, but fearing to wake his wile, who would, he knew, dissuade him, he drew back, mounted his chariot and rode forth into the night, vowing never to return till he could come back as a teacher.
This great turning point in the life of Buddha, which is The "Great supposed to have taken place on the night of the lull moon F in July, 5<)| K.C., is called, in Buddhist Scriptures, the " ( Jreat Renunciation. ' '
For some years, ( iautama practised the greatest austerities, and learned, under various teachers, all the mysteries of the Hindu religion and philosophy, as then taught In the Brahmans.
With five disciples he lived a lile ot extreme asceticism in the Jungle of I'revala, and, after six years, his lame as a hermit tilled all Central India.
One day he fell fainting from exhaustion caused by prolonged last, and on his recovery the folly ol such extremes was revealed to him. Not thus was the inward peace which lie sought to be attained.
On the banks of the Nairanjara. Sujata, a village girl, compassionately brought him food as he sat under the sacred tig tree.
A new conception of the perfect life tree from all doubt or heresy dawned upon him, a life based upon puritv ol the heart rather than upon penances and self-sacrifices; and the conquest ol evil desires, envy and hatred, instead of the mere mortification ol the Mesh
This was the great awakening
I le arose as Buddha the F.nlightened One, to preat h his -i tu- gospel of Faith, Justice and mm el sal Charity to all mankind "wakening
In the ragged and yellow robe of a wandering fakir lu- re-visited his lather's home and stood once more in the palace court which he had left as a gallant voting Kajput prince. The old King heard him reverently.
Buddha's son was converted to the faith, and his beloved wife, Yasodhara, whom he had left so abruptly to follow the higher life, fell at his feet and embraced him. She
INDIA t PAST AM> FKKSKNT
also entered the new religion and became the head of the first Buddhist nunnery of female recluses.
The commanding presence, beautiful features and thrilling voice of the great master have become matters of tradition. That he was able to exercise an influence over his followers such as none but the supremely noble, heroic and dis- interested have ever wielded, is clear.
The common people heard him gladly, the band of five
A new disciples who had deserted him in the jungle, was rapidly
religion replaced by sixty others, and these he sent forth to the
neighbouring countries with the words "Go ye now and
preach the most excellent law." All ranks of people, from
prince to peasant, from the saintly Brahman to the repentant
courtesan, flocked to the new standard. Buddhism, from
being merely a new religious order became a new religion,
and so popular and potent a one that for centuries it rivalled
Brahmanism itself in the number of its adherents in India.
Throughout all Behar and Oudh, and by the banks of the sacred Ganges, in what are now the North-West Provinces, Buddha taught his mild and beautiful doctrine, and at the age of eighty, after a lifetime of ceaseless labour and saintly self-sacrifice, he died with words of blessing and encourage- ment upon his lips at Kusinagara, the modern Kasia, in the district of Gorakhpur.
Buddhism created for antient India a religious organisa- tion in which all castes and tribes might find entrance. It taught that when any creature dies he is born again in some higher or lower state of being, according to the merit or demerit of his acts in all his previous existences.
The law of This law of Karma explained all the sorrows and inequali-
ties of man's life as the consequences of his own acts in a former state and thus established a motive and sanction for the high morality it inculcated.
By its own efforts the soul could win Arahat, the state of freedom from the fetters of selfish desire, in this life, and the everlasting peace of Nirvana hereafter. Some Buddhists regard the goal of Nirvana as the complete annihilation of the soul, set free at last from its age-long wandering through successive incarnations, but others speak of it as merely the
extinction of the sins, sorrows and selfishness of individual existence.
The First Council of the Buddhists, consisting of five hundred disciples, took place immediately after the death of Buddha, which is traditionally fixed at 543 B.C. : they met in a threat cave near Rajagriha, and chanted the sayings of the Master, in three great divisions.
A century later, at Yaisali, a Second Council sought to settle disputes and put down abuses which had grown up.
The Third Buddhist Council was convened at 1'atna by Asoka, King of Magadha or Beliar, in 244 r,.c.
The growth of the new faith owed much to the powerful influence of this monarch, who. after the synod of I'atna, published his famous Kdicts carved upon stone pillars and rocks Asoka, whose stormy youth and military prowess had won for him the title of " The Furious." was converted to Buddhism 257 u.c., and, having subdued a large part of Northern India, carried the same fiery zeal for conquest into the task ol proselytising all India to his new faith He distributed throughout the principal cities the relics of Buddha, which Ajasatra had collected and deposited at Kajagriha, and erected an immense niimb'T of Yihara or Buddhist monasteries throughout the land.
The fourth and last Council was held under King Kanishka. who i tiled about A.I' 10 40 over a wide region on either side of the Himalayas, stretching liom Yarknnd and Khokand n.s far south as Agra and Sindli. Kanishkaaiul his council were also charged with the intense missionary spirit which Iris alwavs been so prominent a feature ot Buddhism, and. just as Asoka had spread the teaching ol Buddha to Southern India and Ceylon. so they, in turn, s?nt forth the new doctrine to China and Tibet.
Buddhism, as a separate re igion, has, to a \erv great extent, vanished from India, obliterated partlv In persecution and partlv by that marvellous f.icuhy lor absorption which has been the prevailing characteristic of Hinduism. It- sacred shrines such as Budli C.ya and the Sanchi Tope, are now in the possession ot others, and its temples are served by Brahman priests
Ill the eighth century of tlie Christian era, there was a great revival of Brahmanical influence, and the cult of Siva and Vishnu ousted the more abstract doctrines of Buddhism from popular favour.
In Burma it is, however, still the official and almost universal religion, and it lias left so indelible a mark upon the religious thought and practical morality of the Hindus generally, that it may be regarded as one of the great determining factors in the formation of their national character. The Jains are the nearest representatives of Buddhism in modern India, although their doctrines differ, in some respects, from the orthodox tenets, and they themselves claim that their origin is earlier, or at least coeval with that of Buddha.
They venerate as saints twenty-four Jains, or just men made perfect, in each of the successive eras of time.
I'arsvanath and Mahavira, the last two Jains, are the special objects of their adoration. The Jains are a wealthy community and have built exquisitely-carved shrines in white marble, decked with colossal statues of their saints. They choose for their temples the most beautiful haunts ot nature, wooded mountains and leafy groves. Mount Abu. with its matchless array of sculptured buildings, the Parasnath Hill in Bengal, and the temple city of 1'alitana in Kathiawar. are among their most famous shrines and places of pilgrimage.
SCKSKS i ROM INDIAN HISTOKY AS pii'irri:
X A T i v K ARTISTS. No. I The Conquest on the roasls of the River Jonn
AND ri<i.M:s i
CHAPTER III THI; MINGLING c > i K A c t s
The races who inhabited India before the great Aryan immigration were many and various, and so tenacious have they been in some instances of their tribal customs, languages and hereditary characteristics, that their living representatives supply to some extent the absence of written history.
The Vedic poets gave to them all the common name of Dasyus. the enemy, a name which came to have the exaggerated significance of demons or monsters. They represented these enemies as being eaters of flesh, without gods and without rites, yet it is clear that even at that early period the non-Aryan tribes were not entirely savage, lor some are referred to as wealthy Dasyus. and powerful chiefs, possessing castles and forts.
The Aryans intermarried with their princes, and, in later times, some of the most powerful kingdoms in India were ruled by dynasties of non-Aryan descent.
The origin of these antient peoples of India is difficult to trace, the only records of their early history which tliev themselves have left are rude stone circles and the slabs and mounds beneath which they buried theirdead. The contents of these tombs show that they commemorate people who were acquainted with iron weapons, that they used ornaments of gold and copper, and made shapely vessels of hard thin earthenware. These Kistvaen builders were the successors of earlier tribes, whose flint and agate weapons are still found up and down the valleys of the Central Provinces.
The vast plain of Hindustan, probably the most fruitful in the world, enriched with the waters of its great rivers, drew by the lure of its wealth successive waves of invaders from the north, and layer upon layer ol the earlier inhabitants were forced back into the hills and forests and southward towards the apex of the great triangular continent.
Like a great wedge, the incoming hosts descended, pushing hither and thither in endless raids and tribal wars, sei/in^ the best lands and ousting the weaker tribes who had preceded
INWA : PAST AM) I'UKSENT
them. The earliest vision of India isone in which its territory is being hotly contested by hostile tribes.
From this incessant struggle strange ethnic results have followed in modern India.
In the Central Provinces the aboriginal tribes form a large part of the population, amounting in the State of Bastar to three-fifths of the inhabitants. The Gonds constitute one of the most important modern races of non-Aryan descent in this region Many of their tribes have made important advances but some, such as the Marias, are still the primitive children of the forest, living by the chase and reported to be using, within living memory, flint points for their arrows, as did their ancestors thousands of years ago.
The Juang, or leaf-wearing race, of the Orissa hills is another detached remnant of primeval man which some strange accident of environment has preserved in almost pristine simplicity.
Other instances of aboriginal tribes who seem to have been early pushed aside, or to have drifted beyond the area ot civilising influences in India, are to be found along the spurs of the Himalayas, as, for instance, in some of the Assam hillmen, Abars, Mishmis and Akas, who were wont to gain a precarious livelihood by plundering the neighbouring hamlets. Some of these wild mountaineers who dwell in an unexplored no-man's-land, along the Tibetan and Chinese frontiers, disclaim all allegiance and still live their own secluded life, huntsmen and jungle-fighters, who employ bows and arrows, javelins and knives and, resenting any intrusion from the outside world, do not hesitate to use them upon any luckless traveller who visits their northern home
Other races of aboriginal descent have made great strides and are now well-ordered communities, retaining their own characteristic customs, they have yet developed into skilful husbandmen and good citixens. Of the non-Aryan races who have more recently responded to progressive influences, the Santals and the Kandhs who inhabit the north-eastern edge of the central plateau are typical examples.
The Santals, who give their name to a large district, the Santal I'arganas. in Lower Bengal, cling to the hilly regions
and remain quite distinct from the people ot the plains. They acknowledge no caste, but are strongly attached to their tribe, and the greatest punishment which could be inflicted upon a criminal was to cut him oft from " fire and water" in the village and send him forth alone into the jungle. The Santals have their secret rites and their own ancestral religion, which includes the worship ot many tribal and family gods Six ceremonial observances mark off 'the epochs of a tribesman's life. The first is a kind ot baptism by which the child is received into the clan, and the last the solemn dismissal of the dead hero, by burning liis body and floating pieces ol his skull down the sacred Damodar river, to join tin- lathers of his race.
The Kandhs of Orissa. and the Madras districts ot (ianjam and \'i/.agapatam, belong to a group of non-Aryan races who occupy the position assigned to them by (ireek geographers 1500 years ago.
They are interesting because their history and their divisions are probably exactly typical in their broad out- lines ol what lias been happening all over India, through- out the ages of its unwritten history.
The Kandhs, up to the time ol the Aryan invasion-,. occupied, no doubt, the fertile Orissa delta. The. shock of invasion split them into three sections; the weakest \\as completely broken up, and its clansmen, losing their old racial and tribal characteristics, sank to the position ol landless hewers of wood and druweisol water among the Aryan communities Another section stood its ground more firmly, and its members became peasant fanners, holding their land on a feudal tenure from 1 1 indti chiefs. They. too. lost in this way something ol their original characteristics, but attained, in return, a higher degree of comfort and security. A third section, however, fell bacj\ upon the mountains and. bv reason ol their very remoteness from the mam currents ol civilisation and movement about them, preserved all the more completely their original characteristics and tribal customs.
It is out of such elements as these that the ethnological .student ol to ciav is able to reconstruct the storv of Indian
INDIA : PAST AM) PRESKNT
races, a story of immense interest, but so vast in its extent that it is only possible in this brief sketch to indicate the main deductions which have been reached.
Language has been the key to the puzzle of India's many races and the progress of comparative philology has solved many difficult problems upon which written history, and even tradition, are silent.
Three great groups form the fundamental basis of classification of the early peoples of India — the Tibeto- Burman, the Kolarian and the Dravidian.
The Tibeto-Burman tribes are descended from ancestors
who, in prehistoric times, dwelt side by side with the
forefathers of the Mongolians and Chinese in Central Asia,
and who crossed over into India through the north-eastern
Groups of passes. They are widely scattered but their main branches
languages are 'n I^urnia and along the skirts of the Himalayas. The
languages belonging to this group are extremely numerous,
and include Tibetan, Burmese, the Naga, Kuki and Karen
dialects, and many others.
The Kolarians came into India through the same narrow gateway. They are now to be found chiefly along the north-eastern edge of the triangular tableland which forms the southern half of India. The Santals and Kandhs, of whom mention has been made, belong to this group.
The Dravidians were probably the true aborigines, and from the broad battlefield of southern India they were never entirely displaced.
The Dravidians This great race, whose languages belong to the Turanian
family and possess affinities with Ugrian in Siberia and Finnish in Europe, found refuge in the sun-scorched plains and sea-girt slopes of southern India.
Before the coming of the Aryan civilisation to southern India, considerable advances had been made among the Dravidians along the road of knowledge.
They had kings who dwelt in strong houses, minstrels who recited songs at their festivals; they were acquainted \sith numerals and written characters, and had names ior most of the planets known to antiquity. They were well versed in agriculture and in war, and had boats and even
72
small coasting ships. All this am! more, the Tamil language ot to-day, revealsconcerning the origins of this antient people.
The Dravidians were the tree and serpent worshippers Tree and ser of India, and when at last the Aryans came among them, it was not as enemies or conquerors, but rather as instructors and missionaries.
The first Brahman settlers were hemrits and sages of whom Agastya, or Tamir-muni, has been deified by the Tamil race as Canopus the brightest star in the southern heavens. To him and his disciples is attributed the settle- ment of the grammatical principles of Dravidian speech. which ultimately developed no less than four great literary dialects -Tamil. Telugu, Kanarese and Malayalam
Buddhist missionaries carried Aryan religion and philo- sophy to the Dravidian kings and peoples before the commencement of the Christian era. But it was when Buddhism itself was sinking, merged beneath the tide of the great Brahmanic religious revival of the eighth century A.D . that the intellectual resources of northern India were Brahman apo poured out in lull measure upon the south. The writings ^^h' ol Hrahman apostles ol the Sivaite and Vishnuite faith. from the eighth to the twelfth century, were composed in Sanskrit, but they gave none the less an immense impulse to the use ol the vernacular languages of India, and it is Iron) this period that the abundant literary activity ot the south takes its use.
The Dravidian Buddhists, or Jains, ol southern India defended themselves vigorously trom the proselytising of the northern missionaries and a cycle of Tamil anti- Brahmanical literature sprang into bein^ The compact mass;)! Dravidian population in the south ol India, although ultimately subdued by the Aryan civilisation, was never completely broken and absorbed by it Their pure descen- dants still exist in scattered tribes, and they have given their language to more than fiftv millions ot the people ot India
Meantime, while within India itself the clash of swords in intertribal warfare alternated with the war of words among philosophers, religionists and literati, external influences
INDIA : PAST AND
one after another, and always from the north, had been brought to bear upon the destinies of the country.
In the third century B.C., Alexander the Great stalks Alexander's across the stage of Northern Hindustan, but although his
victories
progress is triumphant and he makes alliances, founds cities and plants the Greek standard as far south in the Punjab as Jhelam and Mong, he does not reach even to the Ganges, and his victorious campaign is but an episode in the annals of India. His conquests were largely absorbed in the northern empire, which Chandra Gupta built up after Alexander's departure and death.
Later from the newly-founded Greek kingdom of Bactria
invading hosts swept down into the Punjab and carried
Grzco-Bactrian their conquering arms as far as Oudli, and southward to
invasion Sindh and Cutch. They founded no kingdoms, but left the
impress of their art, and early Buddhistic sculptures bear
witness, in their pure outline and delicate features, to the
influence of Hellenic conceptions of ideal beauty in face
and form.
Another and ruder race from a wide region of Central Asia, the Scythians, began to pour hostile tribes through the narrow denies of the Himalayas. For six hundred years, from 100 B.C. to the fifth century A.D., the Scythic inroads continued, and in such numbers did these northern invaders come that they formed for a time a large part of the population of the Punjab, and founded kingdoms. Kanishka was the most tamous ot the Scythic kings, and he it was who convened the last of the four Buddhist Councils. The Buddha himself was said by some to have been a Scythian, and the modern Mahrattas are regarded as being descended from the same vigorous race.
The invading hordes from tin- north-west, to whom the generic title of Scythians has been given, were a broad- headed nomadic people, short of stature, good horsemen and skilled in the use of the bow.
That they came in vast numbers, made important conquests and founded powerful kingdoms carved out of the Gra-co-Bactrian provinces on the north-west of the Himalayas, about 126 B.C., appears certain, yet the theory
propounded by some historians that they were the ancestors of the modern Jats and Rajputs, is untenable.
The Jats and Kajputs are a longheaded race, and no hereditary traits are so lixed and so conclusive as the measurements of the head.
It seems more probable that the Scythian marauders. dislodged from the scenes of their conquests by such vigorous champions ol the Indo-Arvan race as Vikramaditya, Salivahana and the Yalabhi kind's, wandered southwards and were enveloped and absorbed in the vast ocean of I lindu population.
A /.one ol broad-headed people has been traced far down through the I>eccan to the Coords; nor does it seem im- probable that the clansmen ol this wild warrior race who tou^ht their way to the very heart of India and mingled with the 1 )ravidiaus became the ancestors of the famous Mahrattas, destined in after years to plav so j^reat a part upon the staLjc ol Indian history.
The story ol the successive invasions ot India in early times is written not inerelv in SOP.L; and storv. in lossilled weapons or in earthen relics, it is indelibly inscribed in the ethnological lineaments of the people themselves. I'roin the eai best ajjes there lia-^ been a constant stream of move- ment from west to east, and Iroin nortli io south. Sometimes it has taken the lorm ol a violent and terrible irrupt ion of fierce warriors carrying (in- and sword in a Ions; red streak across the hapless country ; at others the peaceful visitation ol hermit, sa.ye or scholar has borne eastward and south ware) the li.uht ol a higher knowledge and broader culture, or the steady march ol immigration has pressed downwards in search ol tresh pastm ati;e and ullage.
Scythian raiders, the Tartar liosts of the lierce Tamer lane, /ealous servants ol Muhammad Irom far Arabia, all. in turn, swept down upon the < lan^etic valley, and the physical tvpes to be met in modern India are the result ot the fusion of races which ensued.
The path ol immigration and conquest has passed over India from the north-west, and commencing at that frontier the first tvpes encountered are the Tin ki Ii anian. represented
SCK N i: s i- ROM INDIAN HISTOKY AS i> K I1 1 < i I i> r.
N \ I I \ K A i< r isrs. No. 2
A K. \.-il l-'isliin* Pisplav
by the hardy Baloch, l>rahui and Afghans of Baluchistan,
tall with long features and fair complexions, they are descended from Turki-l'ersian forbears and preserve all the warlike characteristics of their brave ancestors. The province of the five rivers, as well as Kajputana and Kashmir, is the home especially of the Indo-Aryan. The Rajputs. .
Khattris and Jats are the characteristic members of this types of group which approaches most nearly to the type ascribed to Hmdu rai the first traditional Aryan immigrants. The Scytho- Dravidiansare, as a rule, smaller in stature and have longer heads than the Turki-Iranians. The type is to be found among the Mahrattas-Hrahmans, the Kunhis and theCoorgs of Western India.
An immense number of the inhabitants of the central regions of India belong to the Aryo-Dravidian group and, in Bengal and Orissa the Mongolo-Dravidian type predominates. Along the ridges of the Himalayas, in Nepal, Assam and Burma, the Mongoloid type is represented by the Kanets of Kahul, the Lepchasof Darjeelingand Sikkim, by the Limbus, Mnrmis, and (innings of Nepal, the Hodo of Assam and the Burmese.
Throughout the whole of southern India, from the valley of the Ganges to Ceylon, the Dravidian type prevails, its most characteristic representatives being the I'aniyans ol Malabar and the Santals of Chota Nagpur.
How came these types to be perpetuated ? \Vhy have they not been merged into one national type ''
( )ther races have suffered the invasion of di\ erse tribes and And ,hej, have incorporated their victors or been welded into a homo- ptvservat geneons type bearing some ot the characteristics of both conquerors and conquered, \\liv then should India preserve and display, after all the ages ot her history, such widely divergent types of humanity, as well defined and apparently as firmly ti\ed to day as they have been at anv period since the long past wars and tribal movements which they so strangely record ''
The answer is to be lound in that marvellous institution already referred to which governs and organises Hindu societv in everv act of life from the cradle to the crave caste.
INDIA : I'AST AM)
Immigration, war, the fire of missionary zeal, the fierce thrusts and interchanges of religious polemics and the kindlier influences of social intercourse, were all potent forces tending to weld together into one race the ethnic elements already present upon the soil of India.
The influence Such a natural process of fusion was actually
of caste proceeding apace during the early centuries of Indian
history, but it was arrested, and its results crystallised and perpetuated in the strangest manner by the institution of caste. So powerful has been the operation of this social organisation, based originally on racial differences, but elaborated in accordance with occupations and habits of life, diet, etc., that it has affected the physical characteristics of the various orders, and produced in all parts of India, except the Punjab, a remarkable corres- pondence between the variations of physical type, and the differences of grouping, and of social position.
The primary law of caste, as it has obtained in India for hundreds of years, forbids intermarriage with any but members of the same circle.
A caste is a collection of families, or groups of families. bearing a common name, often associated with the hereditary occupation.and claiming descent from some common ancestor
This is again subdivided into numerous smaller circles,
Its numerous ,.,.., ,. »« •
.•sub-divisions ar)d within each the same rule applies. Marriage must be
within the circle. In modern India there is, however, evidence of a certain restlessness and dissatisfaction with this arrangement. Subcastes are being formed, and even new castes are originated.
The process of subdivision and accretion has proceeded to such an extent that whereas, as has been seen, there were, according to the original Brahmanical organisation of the Hindu world, four castes, there are now no less than 2,378.
The theological sanction given by the Brahmans for the institution of caste has already been described. Its ethnical explanation is to be found in the well-known hypergamous customs which govern the union of two races placed in juxtaposition as the result of conquest or immigration, but divergent in colour, antecedents or type.
The theory is that the first Indo-. \ryan settlers were nomadic shepherds who, moving bodily into India with their cattle, households, and all their worldly effects, brought with them their wives and families, and as a consequence they remained unmixed with the surround- ing tribes.
Hut as the land became more crowded fresh parties of adventure consisting of young warriors and pioneers, would sally forth further afield, and found new and more distant outposts of their race.
Separated from the parent clan, they took wives from the Hy pirn-am surrounding tribes, but did not give their daughters in " return, and when their tribe had grown in numbers, they closed its ranks, and formed a separate caste in the midst of an alien population
A process of this kind has been observed in operation in many parts of the world. In India it has been strengthened and enforced by religious sanction and time-honoured custom. Caste has powerfully moulded the lite and character of the whole people, and has formed a social organisation which is to-day older, firmer, and, in some respects, more powerful than the state iiself.
Kvery Hindu is burn into a place in life His birth deter- mines his calling, his station, the circumstances of his marriage and his associates lie is not a detached unit struggling lor individual ends in the vast \\elterol humanitv, nor is he governed only by his own conscience or desires. He belongs to a caste, and must obey its rules. Whatever ' '"• »»i"> limitations and disabilities this condition imposes, it must be remembered that it also confers privileges and blessings not easily <>v er- rated.
The charities, the cooperation and mutual helplulner-s within the caste take the place ot poor law administration in India, and bestow many ol the advantages of the trade unionism and benefit societies of other countries
Caste has two sides its very exchiMv eness towards the rest of the world, emphasises and endorses the community of interests, and the close brotherhood for help and for defence which exist within its own circle.
Ni. s FROM INDIAN HISTORY AS I>I:IM< 11 n it \
NATIYI: ARTISTS. No. .> A Deerhunt in the presence of the Caliph Akliar
SI)
CHAPTER IV
1 S I. A M
The rise of the Muhammadan power, which culminated in the majestic but short-lived dynasty of the Mughals, was not a sudden movement. For eight hundred years the followers of Muhammad fought for dominion in India. Within a hundred years after the death of the great prophet who had preached so successfully a new and energising faith in Arabia in the seventh century, his followers had invaded the countries of Asia, as far as Hindu Kush. The great mountain frontier of India, no less than the vigour of the northern Hindu kings, delayed, and withstood their advance for a while, but in 711 A.I). Kasim set foot in Sindh. The Rajputs fought with desperate valour. One garrison chose extermination The Ka|la. rather than surrender, the women and children immolating defence of themselves upon a funeral pile, while the men, opening the '.ov,,,^'"' gates of the fortress, rushed upon the enemy and died fighting to the last. Backwards and forwards across the frontier swept the tide of conquest and retaliation. Tin1 Hindu kingdoms were grouped under various great suzerains, such as the Rajput, the Pal or Buddhist dynasties, and farther south those of Chera, Chola and Pandya, yet each feudatory chief retained his power of independent action, and their kingdoms had to be conquered separately in detail, before the Musalman could effect any considerable advance. In the tenth century, Subuktigin. the ruler of an Afghan kingdom, defeated Jaipal, Hindu King of Lahore, and placed a garrison in Peshawar His more famous son, Mahmud of (iha/.ni, extended his kingdom, plunged deeply into the Punjab, and in no less than seventeen successive invasions carried fire and sword to Kashmir and as far as thecitiesof Kanay, Gwalior and Somnath.
At the last-named city he stormed the outposts and forced the Hindus to put out to sea in boats, lea\ing 5000 of their comrades among the slain
For a hundred and fifty years, the Punjab remained under Mahmud s successors as a province ol Gha/ni, but in 115- the house of Ghor, which had long been at bitter feud with
I'UI-NKNT
Ghazni, overthrew the latter, and the Shahab-ud-din, better Ghazni known as Muhammad of (ihor, marched southward on a war and GIK of adventure, with the conquest of India to the faith of Muhammad, as its mission. He suffered a signal defeat at Thaneswar, but gathering fresh forces from his northern heights, again marched into Hindustan in 1103, and this time the dissensions among the Rajput chiefs gave him the victory, and in 1194 he defeated .and slew the Prithwi Raja of Delhi and Ajmere, and overthrew even the mighty sn/erain of Kanauj.
Northern India, from the mouth of the Indus to the site of modern Calcutta, was within the grasp of the Musalman conqueror, but his dynasty had no historic hold on the throne of Delhi. At his death, his Indian Viceroy, Kutab- ud-din. proclaimed himself sovereignof India, and called for the allegiance of all the Muhammadan leaders and soldiers of fortune who had streamed across the country Irom Sindh to Lower Bengal.
This remarkable man founded the dynasty of the Slave -j-ll(. Kings, so called from the fact that both he, and several of siavr K his successors, rose by valour and intrigue from the position of Turki slaves to that of rulers.
The Kutab Mosque and the Kutab Minar commemorate his reign at Delhi. The epoch ot the Slave Kings was a troublous and tragic period of Hindu history. The throne, to which they had waded through so much blood, had to be defended at every moment by the sword, against rebellions from Musalman Viceroys and Hindu revolts, and against fresh waves of foreign invasion, chiefly by the Mughals of Central Asia.
No description can adequately portray the suffer ings or the inhumanities of the period which followed under the last of the Slave Kings The sole method of government, if method it could be called, appears to have been that ot striking terror into distant subjects or enemies, bv some periodic act of ferocious cruelty, more terrible and disastrous than any which had preceded it
Under Balban, revolt and massacre, rebellion and a fearful vengeance followed one another in a mournful cvcle of
misfortune and horror. Hal ban as a youth had entered into Bal a compact, with forty of his Turki fellow slaves in the palace, bar for mutual assistance. When these conspirators became viceroys he broke up the confederacy by wholesale execu- tions, beating some to death and hanging others. Me wiped out a rebellion among the Kajputs of Mewat by putting 100,000 persons to the sword.
The Khilji dynasty which followed was scarcely less severe in its methods. Prisoners taken in the Mughal wars were either trampled by elephants or slaughtered in cold blood. In Delhi, 15.000 settlers were massacred and their families sold as slaves.
Ala-ud-din who had conquered, by a ruse, a part of the I>eccan, murdered his uncle, the founder of the house of Khilji, and, seizing the throne, literally carved out the extended frontiers of his empire, leaving famine and desolation in his track.
The dynasty of Tughlak followed and. despite the conquer- ing irruption of Tamerlane, lasted for nearly a hundred years.
The reign of Muhammad Tughlak, the second of this line, a man of cultivated intellect and remorseless temper, was Tin marked by a long series of revolts, followed by pitiless rt "J reprisals. His own nephew, who headed one rebellion, was flayed alive. The Punjab governor was also defeated and slain, but the Musalman Viceroys, of Lower Bengal and ol the Coromandel coast, \\ere more successful, and the Hindu kingdoms of Karnata and Telugana also broke off In >m tin- empire and became independent
Tughlak ruthlessly demanded land taxes increased ten and twenty-fold twixt the (iangesand Jumna, and the ruined husbandmen rled before his tax gatherers, leaving whole Tu' villages to lapse into jungle, \\hile those \\h« should have rxa tilled the soil became robber bands.
Tughlak's cruelty and reckless waste of human life knew no bounds. On more than one occasion lie held an organised man-hunt Surrounding a wide area with a circle of his troops, he bade them close in anil butcher every human being, helpless peasants for the most part, whom tlu-y found within the ring.
. L
Nor was safety to l>e sought from the rage of the tyrant in the city. Kanauj, the great Kanauj centre and seat of an antient Hindu monarchy, lie gave up to general massacre.
To add to the confusion and dismay of this melancholy period in Indian history, famine, that grim camp follower of war and tyranny, swept devastating through the weary land.
There was a brief respite under the mild rule of the enlightened Firu/. Shall Tuglilak, who undertook many public works, including a great canal which is still used for irrigation, and a beautiful mosque on the banks of the Jumna. But the Tughlak dynasty was doomed, and in the next reign sank into impotence beneath almost universal revolt, and was therefore ill prepared to withstand the great Mughal invasion of 1398.
The incursion of Tamerlane (Timur)at the head of a mighty host of fierce Tartars, from the banks of the Oxus, that wild region which had already given to India so many son>, had the appearance of a great natural cataclysm, but it was, in fact, a caret ully timed invasion. Tamerlane had no pretext for a quarrel with the Indian princes, but he relates in hi> memoir how he saw that their disunion rendered the moment propitious for his enterprise. '• 1 ordered." he writes, " looo swift-footed camels, icoo swilt-footed horses. and i (xx> chosen infantry to march and bring me informa- tion respecting the princes of India. I learned that Tongtumish Khan had been defeated by Auroos Khan ami sought assistance from me Received information that the princes of India were at variance with each other Resolved to undertake it (the invasion) and tu make mv>elt master of the Indian Empire . did so."
Thus in brief colourless notes, such as might serve for the entry of a business transaction, he rei ords the conquest of a new empire and the beginning of a scene ol carnage and horror such as even the tragic hi>torv of war, has rarely, if ever, equalled.
His vast army crossed the Indus upon a bridge of raft* ami reeds, marched to Tulamba. a citv on the banks ol the llvdaspes. and sacked and burnt it. putting all the
1MHA ! I'AM AM) I'KKSKNI
inhabitants to death. They marched on towards Delhi, leaving in their track a desert. Only one town did Timur spare, Ajudin, where lay the tomb of a famous Muharnmadan saint.
He swept down upon Delhi and signalised his arrival by slaughtering his prisoners to the number of 100,000. The slauK|lIei
ol pnsone
imperial city, despite the fact that it surrendered under at Delhi promise of protection, was sacked and plundered, and then, at last, the earth-shaking conqueror, sated with blood and victory, turned homewards, only pausing upon his north- ward journey to execute a general massacre at Meerut.
He left behind him in India, famine, anarchy and pestilence, and carried off to Samarcand thousands of slaves and an enormous booty.
Ruined cities were the only traces of his power in India and, for a time, the dynasties of Tughlak, Sayyid and Lodi ruled, albeit with diminished sovereignty, in Delhi.
Meantime the Hrahmani kingdom ol the Dercan emerged as the representative of Muhammadanism in southern -riu-Biah India and reached its highest power under Brahmani kingdom Ala-ud-din II, in 1437. but was broken up by the dissensions of hostile sects belonging to the rival Shia and Sunni faiths Numerous independent principalities grew up out of the fragments of this kingdom, to be at last merged in their turn in the Mughal empire, the greatest unification of govern- ment in India prior to the establishment of British rule.
Babar, direct descendant of Timur. invaded India in 1526, and found it suffering from the old trouble ol divided councils among princes too hostile to one another to be capable of combining against a common enemv.
He defeated the Delhi sovereign Ibrahim I.otli at 1'anipat, and overpowered the Rajputs ol Chitor at the memorable B..t>... -. field ol Fatehpur Sikn. near Agra. lie was succeeded bv Humaytin. a monarch whose life-story \va^ crowded with strange adventures and hairbreadth escapes, but who was successful in regaining, at last, the throne ot I >elhi. where his splendid mausoleum is still to be seen.
Akbar the great, the son of Humayun, who succeeded his father, at the age of fourteen years, was the real founder of
INDIA ' I'AST AND
Akba
the K
Abu'l Fazl s survey of the empire
Shah Jahan
Delhi the city of temples and palaces
the mighty empire of the Mughals. Victorious alike in arms and in diplomacy, Akbar, during his long and glorious reign, consolidated his empire, which included Kashmir, Bengal and (hijarat.
He conciliated his Hindu subjects, abolished theja/iah, or tax on non-Musalmans, and restrained the restless ambition of the Muhammadan princes.
A splendid builder, organiser and patron of arts and letters, Akbar stands out as one of the greatest among the Muhammadan rulers who initiated the policy of strong unified central government so essential for the safety and progress of India. Two-and-a-half centuries after his death, in 1605, a British Viceroy reverently laid a cloth of honour on the plain marble slab which marks the place of Akbar's sepulture in the mausoleum of Sikandra.
During this reign, the land revenue of India reached an immense total. His finance minister, Abu'l Fa/1, who was also a famous man of letters, compiled the "Akbar Namah," a survey of the empire, which incidentally contains a vivid picture of India, at the commencement of the seventeenth century.
Jahangir, the next in order, but not in greatness, among the Mughal emperors, kept a brilliant court, to which many Europeans repaired. The reign of his successor, Shah Jahan, coincides with the most splendid achievements of the dynasty of Timur's descendants, for, though shorn of its Afghan province, Kandahar, the empire was greatly extended southwards by conquests in the Deccan. The famous kingdom of Ahmadnagar was incorporated, and tribute taken from Bijapur and Golconda. Shah Jahan was a magnificent patron of architecture, and his pearl mosque, the Moti Masjid, of Agra, is perhaps the most exquisite house of prayer ever built even in this land of temples, and it may be doubted if marital affection ever raised above the ashes of the loved and lost a more perfect memorial to virtue and beauty than the Taj-Mahal.
At Delhi, too, the Jama Masjid, with its fine cupolas, pinnacles and colonnades, rose in massive dignity and splendour. The palace of Shah Jahan, near the port, covers
a great area and contains tin- majestic Diwan-i-Khas, a masterpiece of delicate inlaid work and poetic design.
Aurang/eb still further extended the actual limits of the Kmpire, but also laid within it the seeds of decay. The essential weakness of the system ot personal despotism made itself felt in the succeeding years from 1707 till 1761, when the Mughal empire ceased, in all but name, to exist.
As long as the princes of the house ol Timur had been men of intellect and commanding personality, as Habar. Akbar and lahan undoubtedly were, their rule continued,
Decay of th.-
but the very concentration of power which they effected Mughal ,-mpn worked the disintegration ol the empire when its diamond sceptre fell into weaker hands The Diwani, or power ol administration ol Bengal, Orissa and Hehar, was transferred by the reigning Kmperor to the British in I7('5-
The rise ol Islam has left an indelible mark upon India's history, and one which is to be seen not alone in the mosques, palaces, and other splendid buildings which adorn its great cities, but also in the great Muliammadan community which lorms so important a feature ol the population of Bengal, the Punjab and the Tinted Provinces, and is also scattered over many other parts of India There is a soldierly simplicity, dignity and fidelity in the character ol the Musalman, which command respect ; and amon<_; the elements which tend to give strength, solidity and defence to the Kmpire of India the Muliammadan population, amounting to over f>o millions, is gre.itlv valued.
Islam has ever been a vigorously proselytising faith, and has won and is still winning manv adherents to its standard.
Although there is but lit lie intermingling ol Muhammad. -ins and Hindus by marriage, vet another unifying process, less obvious and material, is constantly in progress, namely, the fusion ol ideas, which comes from the force ot example and the puisuit ol a common ^oal
The future ol India \\ill be shaped and its prosperity secured, not by one race alone, but by the united efforts ot all who have an interest in its sod : and in the accomplish- ment of this object, the vigour, loyalty and patriotism ol Islam will be an ellective contribution.
PAST AM)
CHAPTER V THE LAND AND T n K C 1. 1 \\ A T K
What ol the land upon which, as upon a stage, the drama of history lias exhibited such a sequence of mighty events ? The hare outline of the most appealing circumstances in that history has alone been indicated ; yet enough has been said to show that, long before the dawn of the modern epocii, India was a magnet of attraction sufficiently powerful to draw a vast incursion of humanity across Central Asia and through the difficult and forbidding fastnesses which protect its northern frontier ; that it supported a great population of many races, produced several noble, though diverse, types of civilisation and became the home of a wealthy and powerful empire.
India, to-day, means not theantient kingdomof Hindustan alone, nor even merely that great triangular peninsula, the base of which rests upon the Himalayas, and whose sides are washed by the Arabian Sea and the Bay of Bengal. It includes also huge mountainous plateaux stretching as far north as the frontiers of Persia, Russia and Tibet, and to the west it takes in also Burma and Tenasserim, a region which stretches from the source of the Irawadi. upon the slopes of the Namkiu mountains, to the Malay peninsula in the south.
The upper half of this great Km pi re consists of the high- lands and lo\s lands ol Baluchistan. Kashmir, the Himalayas and Burma: the lower, the peninsula itself, tapering south- wards to Tra\ ancore and Cape Comorm
It lias been chietlv in the western region ot the northern uplands that the land gatewavs to India have been lound in the past, either through the rockv footwavs ol South Baluchistan, the plains ot Kandahar, or at the parses of ( iha/ni or Kabul.
The distance across from the dry and withered plains of Makram to the land of the Kachins. in North M'.irma. is I.MOO mill's, being nearly equal to that \\hich divide-- the northern and southern limits of the empire, Kashmir and Cape Comorin.
INDIA : I'AST AND I'KKSKXT
The Himalayan range is at once the protecting barrier and the storehouse of wealth for India. The name means, literally, the abode of snow. There is one vast elevation, 100 miles in width and stretching for 1.500 miles through 20 of longtitude in a curve, which has been compared, by travellers, to the blade of a scimitar. The snow line varies from 15,000 to 16,000 feet, and the topmost peaks of the mountain range I Nanga Parbat and Everest) are from 26,182 to 28,000 feet above the sea level. It may, therefore, be judged what myriad tons of snow perpetually feed the great Indian rivers and fertilise the plains which lie, far below, in the great Gangetic valley or Middle Land of India.
These calm, icy pinnacles, piercing the very heavens with
their immense snow deposits, unexplored and unthought
and their °^ ^° ^Ie teemmK inhabitants below in the crowded bazaars
wonderful and upon the broad rice fields and plantations of India,
have a function to fulfil in the economic life of the country,
the importance of which it is impossible to exaggerate.
They are the water purveyors of a continent.
When the rays of the vertical sun, through the long hot months of the year, are beating down remorselessly upon the land and drying up every leaf and twig to the familiar burnt-up colour, which is the prevailing tint, the sea is also exposed to the same burning glare.
Over the wide expanse of the Indian Ocean the air is becoming laden with moisture. Then the heat diminishes, and the land, giving off its stored-up heat to the air above it more quickly than the ocean, draws by the ordinary mechanism of winds, the life-giving, moisture-laden air from the sea. The mechanism Such are the south-west monsoons, soft humid winds blow-
of the monsoons , . , . . . . . .
ing up from the Indian ocean and bearing with them the means of life and livelihood for millions. But their precious burden of moisture might float over many parts of India without benefiting an acre of its soil if it were not for the mountain ranges, which literally drain water from the winds and send it flowing for thousands of miles in a life-giving stream through the parched and thirsty land.
Unfortunately, the causes which determine the course of the south-west monsoons are many and complex, and
periodically, through some unforeseen al tern t ion ot relative temperatures, their help is wanting, and Indian agriculture droops and famishes in consequence.
Yet even then its noble rivers remain, the (lances, Mother Mllthl (langes, the sacred and aiitient water-way which Hows
through the Middle Land, past the temples, pinnacles and tombs of Benares and Allahabad, never fails the toiling rayats who call to her for water.
The Indus and the Brahmaputra How down from the Central Himalayan region on either side through deeply- eroded valleys and carry their waters to regions as distant Tlle as Karachi and Lakhimpur. The rivers ot India not only fertilise the soil, they add to it, tearing down the mountain side in rapid flood, they bear with them a load oi earth and the debris of rocks. \Ylien the river's movement becomes less rapid, this silt is deposited, forming islands and banks and building up land on what was once the sea shore.
( >ne ol the islands thus built up by tile Brahmaputra trotn silt carried hundreds of miles upon it-> rapid course, now measures .).( i square miles
The Narbada. the Mahanad: and the (iodavari. water the vast region ol the I>eecan. and besides these, there are hundreds of lesser streams and tributaries many of which are splendid rivers, and only relatively- small \\hen compared tr, the mighty (iangesor the lordly Imlu-.
To the I lincl us. their rivers have ever appeared as the most it,-i,. beneficent and delectable gilts nf nature, and thev have "'vr lavished upon them names lull ul poetic significance, thus one, the Saraswati is interpreted as the < '.oddess of Flowing Speech ; the Suvarna-rekha is the Stieak of ( iold Chitra, the ('ilancing Waters, others are called bv names which indicate the Sinless One, the Arrowrv. the (iolden. the Stream at which the Deer Prinks; The River of Tools
The most sacred spot in all India to millions of her sons, is the meeting place of the (iange-. and |nmna, the tongue of land upon which Allahabad i-- built To bathe in
1J A (i 0 I) A , T I U I' I1 A I I
96
PAST AM)
the waters and to die upon the banks of the Ganges is the prayer of all hearts.
The scenery of the river plains is extremely beautiful, along their undulating banks in Bengal populous villages lie clustered beneath umbrageous trees.
The mango groves scent the air in spring and yield their luscious fruit in summer, The spreading banyan, that marvellous tree which builds a whole forest of arched roofs and spreading foliage, with its hanging roots, affords agreeable shade ; the loftv pipal and the crimson-flowered Thebeautyof
the river plains
cotton-tree stand out in vivid contrast against a background of waving yellow crops.
The fruitful soil of the river plains affords a vast wealth and variety of vegetable products. Agriculture is the chief industry. No less than 295 separate kinds of rice are grown, besides wheat, millet, pulse, oil seed, tobacco, poppy, tea, coffee, and fruit and vegetables in great profusion.
Throughout the whole country 2.46 million acres of land produced a harvest during the year 1909.
Southern India is separated from the Gangetic valley by a great range of hills and tableland, the Ymdhyas, below which again lies the Narbada valley, containing some ol The vmdhyas the most exquisite scenes of natural beauty which earth affords. Upon the slopes of the Vindhyas are vast masses of forest, high grassy plains with patches of rich cultivated soil on which the cotton plant is now being grown.
The Eastern and Western Ghats form the remaining sides of the huge triangle which encloses tin- plateau of Southern India. From its surface, rise the Blue Mountains, where Utakamand. the summer capital of Madras, gleams white and cool at an elevation ol some 7000 leet above the sea level.
The Western (.hats are largely covered with forests M,Hllltaills abounding in huge trees ol splendid growth, and in bound- and inrests less variety ot shrubs and creepers. The teak tree, winch provides a fine grained and valuable wood, is found in the greatest abundance in the districts of Kanara. and on the Anamalai hills ol Coimbatore and Cochin.
The Coorg forests, through which elephants, tigers and bison roam, are typical of the primeval jungle which still covers a vast area of the countryside.
Stretching, as it does, through nearly thirty degrees of latitude, India presents almost every variety of climate. The upper, or continental, region ends in the snow moun- tains and arctic cold.
The peninsular portion is almost all within the torrid zone. There are three well-marked seasons, the rainy, the cool and the hot, the last continuing from the time when the sun crosses the equator until it is vertical over the Tropic of Cancer.
The rainfall varies from 15 inches a year to the surprising total of 600. Even 805 inches of rain have been known to fall during one year in Cherrapunji, a narrow valley among the Khasi hills.
The temperature in like manner varies immensely in accordance with latitude and elevation. The hottest area is the Pat Desert of Upper Sindh, where at Jacobabad the highest day temperature recorded has ranged from 117 to 126°. The average mean temperature at most of the stations on the plains, varies between 71° and 84".
In the hill stations it varies from 42'6& at Leh, to 70^4 ' at 1'achmarhi.
The cold weather lasts from January to February, during which the normal rainfall measures only o 99 inch ; during the hot weather season, from March to May, it increases to 4^58 inches ; in the south-west monsoons, from June to September, J4'65 inches is the average, and the remaining three months of the year account upon the average for 4'(J inches.
INDIA : I'AST AND I'KhsKXT
CHAPTER VI T H i; B R i T i s H R A )
It is not the purpose of this work to relate in detail the historical circumstances which led to the establishment of British sovereignty in India, sufrice it to remark that when the Mughal Kmpire uas falling into decay, it became evident that all the splendid achievements of the Indian peoples, their temples, cities, social institutions, agriculture and accumulated wealth were in jeopardy. In the absence of a central government strong enough to maintain order, the fierce strife of many conflicting interests, and tin- passionate opposition of diverse races and religions, bred anarchy, and threatened to whelm the whole country in universal disaster.
Political disorder was pressing, as it invariably must, with fearful weight upon the whole body ot the people, upon the workers in every industry, and especially upon that great industry of agriculture which forms, in India, the life-work and the support of eighty per cent, of the inhabitants
The task of government was forced " ineluctabile manu upon tlio-ic who alone possessed the strength to render it effective.
At the end ot a long and successful period ot British administration, and at a moment when the myriad voices ol India are united in acclaiming the coming of tin- King- Kmperor to the antient and royal citvot I'elhi, it \\ill be interesting to recall some ol the striking developments \\liich differentiate the present regime from those of the past India has never lacked that potent factor in the production of national prospentv. an industrious popula- tion. For ages her fruitful and responsue soil lias been cultivated with patient assiduity I'rugahtv is another great factor in wealth production, and the Hindu peasant is the in, ist frugal ot men . he is largely a vegetarian : liis wants are few, and the conditions of the climate, in many parts of India, render clothes rather a matter ot decency than warmth. The simple margin of necessaries upon
99
SIR O'MooKE CKKAC. ii. V.C.. G.C.I?. Commander-in-chief of His Majesty's Forces in India
INDIA : PAST AM) I'RKSKNT
which existence is not only possible but comfortable, beneath radiant skies and encompassed by such favourable natural conditions, made India populous.
The idyllic happiness which this highly-favoured clime offered to mankind was, however, perennially threatened by adverse fates of which war, famine and pestilence may be taken as the typical and awful ministrants.
To say nothing of those great wars of conquest or invasion undertaken by powerful monarchs, such as Nadir, the Persian, who slew 150,000 men in Delhi ; or Aurang/.eb, who, for the fifty years of his reign, was hardly ever without a great army in the field in some part of India ; there were Di: also the endless tribal wars and family feuds, and local uprisings, which wasted and debilitated every part of the country in turn.
With many tribes a state of war against their neighbours was pre-supposed as the normal condition of things, and it only wanted opportunity to fan the flame of some smoul- dering grievance to fever heat, or to send a troop of fierce marauders to demand cliont from the hapless villages of some less military tribe.
The tide of war rose and fell with almost tin- regularity of the seasons, and besides taking its terrible toll, year by year, of human life, disturbed all industries by rendering all men insecure in their possessions.
Hritish administration has conferred upon India the inestimable boon of peace both external and internal.
Since the great pacification solemnly pronounced in the name of yueen Victoria at Allahabad in 1*5*. no hostile army has invaded and no uprising seriously disturbed the serene calm of the Middle Land. There have been, it is true, frontier wars, affairs of outposts and great border States, but these have been far away from the historic cities and fruitful plains of the Gangelic valley.
Fifty years of peace and of security have marvellously HI increased the productiveness and the population of India.
At the beginning of the eighteenth century the average value of exports did not exceed £1,000,000; it rose slowly to about /to, 000,000 in 1854 ; the returns for 1910 indicate
INDIA : I'AST AND I'KKSKNT
that the prodigious total of £137, 000,000 has now been reached.
According to the latest census returns, 315 million persons are now living in British India, and the safety of their persons and property is either directly or indirectly guarded by all the forces at the disposal of the Indian Government.
The firm but paternal treatment meted out to the lawless An uitabie elements among hill tribes, such as the Moghias and the
land settlement hillmen of the Bhagalpur district, long the terror of the lowland villages, has turned predatory clans into peaceful cultivators. An equitable land settlement, differing in accordance with the needs of each of the great provinces, has been carefully worked out. While securing the proprietarial rights of the Talukdars, Zamindars and feudatory chiefs, the government have sought to protect the actual cultivators by conferring occupancy rights upon all tenants of more than three year's standing.
Out of the Panchayat or village council of five, an immemorial institution of Hindu communities, municipal bodies, containing an electi%-e element are being built up, and have power to raise funds for local purposes.
impartial Law is administered without fear or favour, and by its
strict impartiality, and its adaptation to Hindu and Muhammadan domestic customs, it has won the confidence of the people.
The causes of tribal dispute and dissatisfaction have in many cases been removed by accurate survey, the delimita- tion of rights, and by substituting a definite legal status for the loose bond of traditional custom.
Every movement for the improvement of the people, every step in the march of progress, is dependent upon the maintenance of peace, and this is undoubtedly one of the greatest gifts which the British administration has conferred upon India.
It would be impossible, probably, to mention a more striking instance of the way in which the " pax Britannica" has benefited the citizens of the great eastern empire than that which is furnished by the history of the suppression of
INDIA : PAST AM)
Thuggee and Dacoity. These two forms of crime, in the Thuggee strange atmosphere of eastern thought, had assumed in the Dacolty minds of their debased adherents, the dignity of ancestral pursuits, and the most atrocious outrages upon peaceful passengers, by jungle-path or lonely mountain trail, were sanctioned by tribal custom. Crimes of theft and murder, as secret, sudden, and noiseless as the fall of a leaf, were perpetrated, and the criminal concealed and protected by all the other membersof the wicked confederacy. Among the Thugs, assassination had come to be regarded as a religious duty, and to kill, not from enmitv or spite, nor even in the hope of gain, was thought by some to be a virtuous act, likely to propitiate IMiowanee, the stern goddess of their vows.
The term Dacoity, derived from a Hindu word, ilukti , plunder, indicates robbery by armed gangs of marauders This was a pursuit by which several wild highland clans once maintained a precarious existence.
Amongst the predatory races were the Budak of tin- Nepal Terai, the Dasadh of Behar, the Bind of Cha/ipur, the Nath, Borin, Kiirmi, (iujar, and a host of other lesser tribes.
In the Punjab, Dacoity usually took the form of cattle lifting, and the tribe of the Meena were concerned in many of the raids in Northern India with this object.
The more terrible crime of Thuggee was practically suppressed by the energetic action of a department formed for the purpose of dealing with it, during the Lieutenant- (lovernorship of Lord William Hentinck. and under the command of Major (afterwards Sir) \V. H. Sleeman.
Information concerning these remarkable criminal associa- tions was first brought to the notice ot the Knglish authorities at Fort St (ieorge, by Dr. Hit hard Sherman and Captain Sleeman as early as 1810.
1'hansigars. or stranglers (in the northern parts of India called Thugs, or deceivers), had been apprehended shortlv after the siege of Seringapatam. in i-i»<i, but it was not Tnr Plla
or stranR
until the date above mentioned that by the capture of Feringhea, afterwards immortalised in Eugene Sue's famous novel, "The Wandering Jew," the widespread and
G K N K K A I.
\V. H. Si. 1:1: 1799-1856
.IAN. K.C.B.
A British officer who conferred a lasting benefit upon the peaceful inhabitants of India, by the suppression, between 18.50 and KS40. of the once prevalent system of organised theft and murder known as Thujiiiee. Sir \V. H. Sleetnan was afterwards British Resident at the Court of the KinH of Oudh, I.ucknow.
104
INDIA : I'AST AND I'KKSKNT
dangerous character of these associations was disclosed. This arch %'illain was laid by the heels by Major Sleeman : and to this extremely able and intrepid officer of the Bengal army was entrusted the task of stamping out Thuggee in the dominions under the British control.
The special department formed for the suppression of Thuggee and Dacoity, remained in operation up to the year 1884. But its main task was achieved in the first ten years of its existence, under the leadership of its heroic founder.
Major Sleeman forced some of the Thugs whom he captured to become informers, and from them he learned the names and descriptions of their confederates. The stories these men told of wholesale murders seemed at first Sjr incredible, but were confirmed by incontestable proofs, w. H. sieen Their method was to attack travellers in superior force ; they would pretend to be themselves peaceful travellers, anxious to secure protection by joining forces with any company they might meet upon the road. At a chosen spot they would ruthlessly strangle their victims and make off with the booty.
They had their omens and superstitious observances ; the cloth and pickaxe with which they strangled anil then buried their victims, were held sacred, nor would they carry out their fell project if a snake should cross their road, or if they should chance to inert a carpenter, an oilman or a Brahmanre woman.
Huhram. one of the most notorious of the Thugs, was believed to have murdered, during the forty yrars of his career, no less than 951 persons, and Futtrh Khan, in a period of twenty years, had done to drath 508
The Thugs had a secret language of their own called Kamaserana. Their crimes were committed so stealthily, they were in league with so many allies, and at tin- least TheThuRs hint of danger they could melt away into the jungle with lanKuaRe such ease, that the task of tracking them down, and break- ing up their evil confederacy, seemed well-nigh impossible. Captain Valiancy, one of the officers employed upon this difficult and dangerous service, writing in a Madras journal
105
INDIA : PAST AND
at the time, said: "The day that sees this far-spread evil eradicated from India and known only by name, will tend greatly to immortalise British rule in the East."
The difficult task was accomplished, and to-day, though crimes of violence occasionally occur, Thuggee, as an organised system of theft and murder, is only a memory of the past.
The task of dealing with famine in a vast agricultural country where an immense population has to be supported from the annual harvests of the soil, is even more difficult.
Great heat, a fruitful soil and the periodic recurrence of heavy rains are the factors of India's agricultural prosperity ; unfortunately, the last is sometimes disturbed by the failure of the .monsoons. When this happens the cultivators of the innumerable small farms into which the land is split up soon come to the end of their resources, and millions of agricultural labourers are thrown out of employment.
To this problem of recurrent famine the Indian Govern- ment has given its most earnest attention and has evolved practical means of combating its worst effects.
The organisation of relief when drought has actually deprived people of their means of sustenance has been well- nigh perfected by experience and now a telegram from head-quarters suffices to set the machinery at work and mobilise relief in any famine-stricken district, but this is felt to be only subsidiary to the better and greater task of diminishing the severity of famine beforehand, and of placing the people in a better position to endure occasional and local failure of crops. A sum of ^1,000,000 is annually set aside for the purpose of famine relief and insurance. A portion of this sum is usually spent on the construction of railways and irrigation works.
The intensity of the distress due to famine lias been enormously reduced by railways. In former times the inhabitants of one district might be perishing of hunger whilst plenty reigned in a region not 100 miles away.
On the other hand, one of the most terrible famines which afflicted the Madras presidency during the early- days of the railway era was alleviated by the importation
of nearly a million tons of grain gathered from remote and
more fortunate provinces, all of which was carried into
the interior by two lines of railway in a single year. The ^Jiwa
salvation of India from the curse of famine lies clearly in
the direction of improved communications, and, to effect
this, railway construction has been vigorously pushed
forward by the Government.
The old guaranteed companies, some of which date back to 1850, were taken over by the State, and, in addition, restrictions on the introduction of private capital for railway enterprise have been removed. The activity which has M(x)ern followed in this direction is rapidly covering the land with railway the ready means of transit. There are at present no less t-merPris than 31.014 miles of railway, equipped at a capital 'outlay of /J22, 000,000, under the supervision of the railway department.
Up to the middle of the nineteenth century there were lew roads in India and not a single mile of railway. Roads \\ere merely footpaths or tracks lit cnly for ox-waggons. There are now 60,000 miles of good roads, one-third of which are macadamised and provided \\ith bridges. The Roads magnificent highway which stretches tor i ,500 miles from Calcutta to IVshauar is a line example of engineering skill and a striking monument also to the energy and faith in the future which could undertake and complete so gigantic a task. There are 560.000 miles <>l postal route, and 55.000 miles of telegraph lines.
India with its teeming population, its many wants and the varying necessities which climatic conditions may force upon distant provinces, is now better prepared than ever lor those rapid interchanges of intelligence and ol merchandise which are so essential to a modern state
The good communications which now connect Calcutta, Hombay, Madras and other great cities \\ithevery part of the Indian Kmpire are the first line of defence both against war and famine.
Navigable canals have also been constructed by the government and these, which are quite distinct from Nav,Kah| irrigation canals, are not remunerative commercially, but, i-anais
PAST AM) I'KKSKST
in conjunction with the great natural waterways, furnisli additional and most valuable means of conveying quantities of corn from one district to another.
The construction of works and canals for irrigation isalso a very important line of defence, which, although not initiated by the government, for it is an extremely antient practice in India, has been greatly developed and largely utilised in the war against famine.
A typical instance illustrating the magnitude of such works is the great Chenab canal which irrigates an area of about 2,000,000 acres and has a discharge of 11,000 cubic feet of water per second.
Innumerable wells, tanks and reservoirs are helping to
India not
orer-popuiated conserve the natural water supply and render it available when and where required, and it has become evident that great as is the population of India, it is as yet far beneath the number which its natural resources will maintain in comfort when those resources are carefully husbanded and properly controlled.
The forests of India have an important function to fulfil in relation to the prosperity of the country, and a special department of the government is concerned with their preservation.
In the old days nomadic tribes practised agriculture in a very primitive, and, at the same time, wasteful style. Wandering through the forest they would choose a site for a brief settlement and proceed to clear it by the simple device of setting fire to the forest, taking little or no pre- caution against the spread of the conflagration. After having one or two crops from the virgin soil they would move on to another encampment.
Under the forest department this wasteful method lias been discouraged and the immense importance of the preservation of forests insisted upon.
It is in the soil of the forests that the rainfall water is stored up, and their foliage supplies moisture to the air which descends upon the fields in grateful showers or de%v. The grazing afforded to cattle in years of drought is also of great value.
108
INDIA: PAST AND I-RI^KNT
Tlie use of suitable manures is being encouraged in every way, and this is increasing very largely the productivity of the soil.
When drought comes it must inevitably inflict suffering and privation where so many millions are dependent upon husbandry for their daily sustenance, but at least starvation will be averted, and the- worst effects of the shortage pre- vented, by the remedial and protective measures which have now been adopted.
Another method by which the Indian ( iovernment seeks to avert the dangers of famine, is by stimulating and preserving native arts, industries and manufactures. The distribution of grain to the various parts of this great country, with sufficient rapidity, and in quantities which will prevent any undue shortage, is but one aspect of the question. The provision of an alternative occupation to agriculture, when that fails, is equally important. Many very interesting indigenous crafts have existed in India from an early period. The tine muslins of Dacca, Madras and Ami were famous from remote times
Cotton weaving dates bark to the time of the Mahab- harata ; the (ireek name for cotton, sunion. is etyino- logically the same as that of India or Sindh, and the name calico is derived from Calicut, on the Malabar coast, where the fabric was first woven
Hand-loom weaving still continues in main parts of the country, and many cotton nulls ot the Knglish type, equipped with modern machinei y, ha\ e been established, mostly in the Bombay Presidency. These latter have greatly increased during the last twenty years, and now find employment for 2<J.ooo persons.
Jute mills have doubled in number during the same period, and now employ i«i2,ooo persons. The total number ot factories using mechanical power is -'.500, and it is calculated that i.ooo.oco persons are employed in them
The great tea industry of Assam, which i^ of compara- tively recent growth, employs already 600.000 people
These great and thriving industries present an alternative career to the growing ot cereals, and thus relieve the dead
INDIA : PAST AND PRESENT
weight of numbers pressing to find a livelihood from their cultivation.
In the villages and towns, and in the great cities of India, other more highly specialised native arts and industries flourish and find employment for great numbers of the population.
Beautiful silk fabrics, both pure, and the variety mixed with cotton, known as mashru or sufi, are woven in the Punjab and Sindh, at Agra, Haidarabad, Tanjore and Trichinopoli.
Brocades of gorgeous hue and delicate texture are the
speciality of Benares, while, in Bombay, steam silk weaving
handicrafts factories are employed in converting raw silk from the
cocoons into bandanna hs, taniains and patsoes, chiefly for
the Burmese market.
From the old historical cities of the Deccan, such as Gulabgarh and Aurangabad, come beautifully-embroidered velvets for the canopies and rich housings of royal elephants.
Gujarat is famous for its delicately-tooled leather work,
and Kashmir for its shawls; while Agra, Mirzapur,
Jabalpur, \Varangal and Malabar send forth to the markets
jewellery of tne world many thousands of carpets and rugs, some of
which are worth not less than £10 per square yard.
Silver filigree work, red gold and precious stones assume exquisite shapes under the hands of the jewellers of Jaipur, and he who desires a sword of damascened steel, hammered with gold, and encrusted at its handle with diamonds, may find many a cunning workman to do his bidding at Gujarat or Sialkot, or among the artificers of Kashmir.
Benares besides being the home of brocades is famous for its brass work.
Apart from this higher plane of manufacturing and industrial activity, there are the ancestral village craftsmen of India who make their wares, often with wonderful skill Sindh tier not ^or exPort but f°r tne village communities of which
they form a part. Of these the potter is the most typical, and his work, especially in the province of Sindh, risesto the level of a fine art. Sindh pottery, consisting chiefly of tiles
110
I'AST AM)
and domestic vessels, is ornamented with tasteful flower patterns in turquoise blue, copper green and sometimes dark purple or golden brown, and is coated with a fine transparent gla/e.
Wood and ivory carving, inlaying and sculpture are among the remaining art-industries of India.
The third danger threatening Indian civilisation in former days was, as has been said, pestilence, and while it is not claimed that this terrible visitant has been entirely banished under the British rule, much has been accomplished to modify and abate the evil.
Plague has been present in India for the last fifteen years, and has, unfortunately, carried off many victims, but the Re dawn of a better epoch is beginning ; this terrible scourge is "^. being dealt with successfully, and wherever the conclusions and directions of science are listened to, it disappears. It has been proved that the plague is conveyed to man by rat fleas, and that the two effective remedies are inoculation, and the evacuation of infected houses.
The provincial governments are spending considerable sums in the campaign against the plague, many facilities are now offered for improving sanitary conditions, and there arc signs that the people are realising the truth and the worth ol such preventive measures.
The British Raj exists for the welfare of India that fact is stamped like the impress of a royal signet upon every department of the administration and every section of their riu varied activities. In the British House «( ('oinmons a of I notable Secretary of State, the late Lord VVolverhampton, once said : " livery member ol this House is the member for India." and the statement was re-echoed with enthusiastic approval by the whole British race.
To India and her peoples, Britain has given her best. The highest intellectual achievements, the noblest lineage, the most splendid record of public service, these have been the qualifications which have been sought in those who should preside in various capacities over the administration of this great country.
tNDIA : PAST AND I'KKSKNT
The royal visits
Upon the ancestral shield of the heir to the throne of England is inscribed the motto " I serve,'1 and it is in that spirit that he mounts the steps which lead to the duties and responsibilities of an imperial throne. To govern for the good of the governed, to fight for the defence of the Empire, to work for the uplifting of his people, have been and are the watchwords and ideals of His Majesty's house.
As Prince of Wales, his late Majesty, King Edward the Seventh, visited India in 1875, and his son and successor, accompanied by the Princess of Wales, made a tour of its States and provinces in 1906.
The visit of His Majesty the King-Emperor George the Fifth is but another instance and pledge of his determina- tion to fulfil the high mission of his race, and a pledge also of the concord and amity of the whole British nation with their brethren and fellow subjects in India.
112
SOME GOVERNORS
A N n
VICEROYS OF INDIA
LORD C 1. 1 v K
Born at Styche, near Market Drayton, 1725, Robert dive began his Indian career as a writer in the service of " John Company," but on the outbreak of hostilities, took naturally to soldiering and early displayed his extraordinary genius for war by the capture of Arcot (1750, which he held against a vastly superior force.
This was followed by the victories of Arni and Kaveripak and the capture of Kovilam and Chengalpat. After a brief period in England, Clive returned to India to avenge the atrocity of the Black Hole. Calcutta and Chandarnagar were soon taken, and at Plassey, one of the most fateful battles in the history of the British Empire, he defeated Suraj-ud-Dowla's large army with a small force of 3,200 men. On returning to England he was honoured with an Irish peerage atid a seat in the House of Commons. In 1765, the affairs of the East India Company having fallen into disorder, he returned to Calcutta, and during the twenty-two months of this second Governorship established the Indian Administration on a firm basis. In doing so he roused a storm of opposition from those whom he displaced, and, on his return to his native country, his earlier proceedings in India were severely commented upon in a parliamentary enquiry.
In its final resolution, Parliament, while admitting his great and meritorious services, passed at the same time some censure upon Clive's conduct. This so preyed upon him. that ill in mind and body, he died by his own hand on November 22nd, 1774.
Clive's splendid victories at a critical moment in the History of India won for the British the virtual sovereignty of Bengal. Behar and Orissa. established their military prestige throughout the whole country, and paved the way for an Imperial Suzerainty.
115
WARREN H A S'T i N G s 1773-178*
This great Indian Administrator was born at Churchill and educated at Westminster, he went to Calcutta in 1750 in the service of the Kast India Company, and was appointed British Resident at Murshidabad in 1758. In 1769 he became second in council at Madras, and three years later Governor of Bengal and President of the Council.
As Governor-General, to which position he was appointed in 1773, Hastings made an appraisement of the landed estates, revised the assessment, improved the administration of justice, organised the opium revenue, waged vigorous war against the Mahrattas and made the Company's power paramount in many parts of India. After violent dissensions with the members of the council, and a duel, in which he wounded Phillip Francis, one of his opponents, he resigned office and returned to England. Having been impeached at the bar of the House of Lords, he was involved in a trial which lasted seven years, completely stripped him of his fortune and would have reduced him to poverty had not the East India Company for which he had, during troublous times, accomplished so much, provided for his declining years.
By his generalship and diplomacy Warren Hastings established upon a firm basis the British occupation of India.
T ii K M A u i.) r I s \V i-; 1. 1. 1: s i. K v 1797-1805
Richard Cowley Wellesley, eldest son of the first Marl of Mornintiton. was appointed Governor-General of India in 1797. His victories over the French and the followers of Tipu Sahib, and later, assisted by his brother (afterwards Duke of Wellington) over the warlike Mahrattas, followed up by a far-sighted and vigorous administration, made Britain the paramount power on th^ «reat Asialic Peninsular.
M A K •
Our of the lirratfst of Inili.ui Pro-Consuls. 1
1S47. His linn nl' office \v.i> nut les- sue tcrrilorv tli.ui in developing Indian resm adininislration. 1'enu and ilic I'nnj.il' Oiulli. Salara. Jbansi and Herar annexi railwavs and telegraph wires laid, tlie G.
In, I,
his rule in India
of
t'.m.il anil iinporlanl e nine short vears of
A
}:. A K i. CANNING 1856-1862
Succeeded Lord Dalhousie in 1856. In 1858 he became the F-irst Viceroy, and in 1859 was raised to an Karldom.
i: i> u \ K 11 l< o H i K i Karl of i. \iton
lS7l.-ls.M1
Succeeded his father as I.or.l I. \tton in lS7.i. Receive.! tin C.raml Cross of
the Hath and ma.le Yicerox in l-O.. Chief event- of his \'icero\alt\ were
the proclamation of (Jueen Victoria .is Kmprcss of India < 1X77 ami tin out-
break of the Afghan war 1S7» . C'r<at<'d l;..iil of I. \tton ISNI
THE MA RUT is OK LASSPOWXK. 1888-1894
122
1J3
K A K i. C f K 7. o s OF KKDI. KSTON 1899-1905
124
SOME FA. \\ous
SECRETARIES o i: STATE
I:OR INDIA
THK RIGHT HON. SIK H. H. FOWL K.K. G. C.S.I. Viscount Wolverhampton
1S9-I-IS95
128
T HI K i ., H r II <i s . .1 » 11 N M i) i ViM-.-iint Moi-lfx . I' »l;irUnmi I905-l'>',0
K O B K K T O I I- I. K V A S H H I' K 1 (I N C K K \V I. -Mil. N 1
K.G.. I'.C.. M.A.. I-.S.A.
Maniuis of Crevve d'.K.l and Karl of Madelcv since 1910
PROVINCES OF INDIA
AND T HEIR R U L E R S
THK KK.HT H<
LOKD HAKIMNGK i>t PENSHURST Viceroy of India s-ince 1910
I'KDVINfKS ()K INDIA AM) THKIK KCI.KKS
M A D R A S
HISTORY. — The first British settlement in Madras was made at Masulipatam in iCn. This great province of India, which occupies the most southerly portion of the continent, and has a coast line of 1,730 miles, was not only the oldest, but was also the most important of the three original presidencies before Clive's conquest of Bengal. It was, however, small in extent until the annexation of the Carnatic in 1801. The Laccadive Islands are included under the same administration.
DATE OK ANNEXATION. — 1746.
ARKA. 141,72') sq. miles.
CLIMATE. — Tropical; differs greatly according to elevation.
POPULATION.- 38,209,436.
CAPITAL. Madras.
CiovKKNOR. — Sir Thomas David Gibson-Carmichael, Bart., K.C.M.C.
GOVERNMENT.- Consists of a Governor assisted by Execu- tive and Legislative Councils.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS Madras is divided into twenty-one districts, each of which lias a collector and district judge. British law. modified by special Indian enactment--, prevails.
RACKS. Chiefly Hindus
DKVKLOI-MKN i s. There are good roads, railway com- munication is extensive, and irrigation works have been carried out on a very large scale.
KKI.IOION. There are over one million native Christians, Roman Catholics and Protestants : I linduisin or Brahnanism is the prevailing religion.
LANGUAGE Tamil and Tehigu are the principal languages, Malayalum, Kanarese and I'riva are also spoken.
EDUCATION. Numerous government and mission schools and colleges exist.
PRODUCTS. Kice. millet, indigo, cottee, su^ar. wheat. Madras is not rich in minerals, but gold and iron have been found, also diamonds in the Karntil district. The (crests are ol great value, teak being the principal wood.
ION. COL. SIR GKOKGK S. C i. A i< K K , K.C.M.G.. G.C.I.K.. F-R.S.
Governor of Bombay
since 1907
134
BOMBAY
HISTORY. — The western province of India takes its name from the island of Bombay, which became a British possession in i6f>2, as part of the dowry of Catherine of Bragan/a, wife of Charles II. The greater part of the present territory was obtained by annexations from the Mahrattas, and by the lapse of the Satara State. Sindh was conquered in 1843. and its administration is in some respects, separate from the remainder of the presidency.
DATK OF ANNEXATION. -if>r>j.
AREA.-- 122, <>s.j sq. miles.
CI.IMATK. The coast districts are hot and moist with a heavy rainfall during the monsoon. Mean temperature at Bombay, 72 F.
Poia'i.ATiov 1^.51 5, 5^7.
CAPITAL.— Bombay.
GOVERNMENT. Consists of a Governor, a-si-ted by Executive and Legislative Councils.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. The administration has its base in the village officer, the patel ; he reports to the mamlutdnr, and he in turn to the deputy collector, who is responsible to the assistant collector or collector.
On the judicial side there art- magistrates, -mall rau-e court judges, special and assistant judges, and finally, the High Court ol Bombay and the Judicial Commissioner in Sindh.
RACKS. •F.specially the home ol the Mahrattas.
DKVI.I oi'Mi N i . Very advanced, the capital ;- a magnifi- cent city and a threat centre ol commerce, posies-ing railways, newspapers, cotton mills, and many magnificent public buildings.
RKI.K.ION. Muhammadan, Hindu, I'arsee.
I.AMiUAur.s — Marathi, Gujarati, Sindhi and Kanaicse
EDUCATION. Is at a high level, numerous schools exist throughout the province, and in the city ol Bombay there is a tine university, also several art college-, veterinary and technical schools.
PKOIH'CIS. — Oil seeds, millet, rice, sa^o, - :i;ar, pepper, cotton, coal, iron, silver and gold.
Manufacturing industries have become very active in recent years.
SIK K. N. BAKKR. K. C.S.I.
Lieut. -Governor of Bengal
since 190S
I'KOVINCKS OK INDIA AMI THKIK Kt I.KKS
BENGAL
HISTORY. — The old Presidency of Bengal comprised, in pre-mutiny times, the greater portion of northern India, but the province no%v under this administration consists of a part of Bengal proper with Behar, Orissa and Chota Nagpur. Fifteen districts of Eastern Bengal were detached from the province in 1905, and combined with Assam, while one district from the Central Provinces was added to Bengal.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1757.
AREA. — 115.819 sq. miles.
CLIMATE. —Hot and humid on the plains. Mean tem- perature 77 F.
POPULATION. — 50,722,067.
CAPITAL. — Calcutta.
GOVERNMENT. — The Lieutenant-Governor is assisted by a Legislative Council. An Executive Council is being created.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — There are nine divisional com- missioners under the Lieutenant-Governor of Bengal, who superintend the revenue, criminal and executive adminis- tration of their respective divisions These divisions are again sub-divided into districts, eacli under its district officer, who, besides exercising general supervision, is also the chief magistrate in his district
RACKS. Most of the people are descended from tin- Aryan stock. There an- also representatives of the aboriginal races, such as the Santals, Gonds. Kols and Bhuiyas.
DEVELOPMENT. Good railway-., canals, and irrigation works have been constructed
RELIGION. Hinduism and Muhammadanism are the prevailing religions.
LANGUAGES. The principal arc Bengali. Hindi and Bihari.
EDUCATION In every village of any si/c there is a vernacular school called a path sal a, and in every district secondary schools affiliated to the Calcutta I'niv crsitv , which teach up to the matriculation standard.
PRODUCTS Rice, opium, indigo, oil seed--, Miyar. tobacco, silk, tea and jute.
S I I' A l< 'I 1 ! A \ I. I S . K I
i f l'".astcrn Hcnu»1 ;.i'd \~- A|-|i<iiiitc<i ion
TKOVINCKS
EASTERN BENGAL AND ASSAM
HISTORY.- Assam, the region of the Surma and Brahma- putra valleys, was ceded to the British after the first Burmese war in 1826, but it was not until 1838 that, in consequence of the misgovernment of the native rajah, the entire country was placed under British administration It was for many years a separate province, hut in 1905 was linked to Master n Bengal.
DATK OF ANNEXATION.— 1838.
AREA.— 106,130 sq. miles.
CI.IMATK. There is an abundant and well distributed rainfall.
POPULATION.— 30,961 ,459.
CAPITAL.— Dacca.
GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a Lieutenant-Governor and a Legislative Council.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — There is a regular system of sub- ordinate and superior courts of justice, culminating in the High Court of Calcutta, which is the Supreme Court of Appeal. Trial by jurv has been successfully introduced in Assam.
RACKS. Muhammadans and Hindus.
DEVELOPMENT.— A large part of this north-eastern tract is still forest, but there are now over 600, oco acres of tea plantations, and this industry has become one of the most important in India. Railways, telegraph lines and canals, furnish the means of communication.
RKI. Kims. Muhammadans, Hindus and some Christian converts.
LANUVAGKS. Bengali and Assamese, are the chief among a great variety of languages.
EDUCATION. — About 20 per cent, of the boys, and j per cent, only of the girls, attend school. The Welsh Calvinistic Methodist Mission and other missionary bodies are actively engaged in educational \\ork
PRODUCTS. — Rice, tea, jute, wheat, oil seeds, sugar, tobacco, coal and iron.
SIR JOHN PKISIOTT H i: w K T r , K. C.S.I.. C.S.I.. C.I. 1C
I. ieut. -Governor I'nitecl Provinces of Atfni and Oiulh
since 1907
I'KOVIM KS
THE UNITED PROVINCES O I- AGRA AND OUDH
HISTORY. — Forming the upper part of the great Ganges plain to the west of Bengal, these provinces correspond with the Hindustan of the old Muhammadan historians, and contain many famous cities of Indian history and myth within their borders. These include Benares, the most sacred city of the Hindus, Agra and Allahabad.
From the conquest of Delhi, by Kutb-eb-den, in 119:, to the advent of the English, a period of 600 years, the Muhammadans were the rulers of this part of India. Seven years after Clive's famous victory at 1'lassey, Sir Hector Munro conquered the combined forces of the Emperor Shah Alim and his ally, Shujah-ud-dowlah, at Baxar. In the absence of any natural military frontier it became necessary to occupy strategic points in Oudh in order to protect Bengal. After the Mahratta war of 1803, Doab, and the country on both sides of the Jumna, was brought into the sphere of Britisli influence. The whole area was placed under one administration in 1877.
DATK OK ANNEXATION. 1X03.
ARKA.— 107,164 square miles.
CI.IMATK. — Hot, but well watered rind extremely fertile.
Poi'i'i.A i ION. -47,691 ,7X2.
CHIKF CITIKS. Allahabad (Agra): Lucknow (Oudh).
< lovi.RNMi.NT. Consists ot a Governor and a Legislative Council
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. British la\\, modified by special Indian enactments and local customs, is administered in civil and criminal cases. The habits of tin- Hindus, especially in regard to marriage and food, are regulated by the la\\ of caste, all the septs ot the same caste resident within a traditional area, are under the rule ot a fmnchayat, or council of elders.
RACKS. Hindus of Aryan and Dravidian extraction, and Muhammadans who are divided by history and descent into three great communities the Pathans of the south-eastern districts, the Mughalsof the t'pper I >oab, and the Afghans in Rohiikhand.
SIR I.oris WII.J.IAM DANK. K.C.I.K.. C.S.I.. I-.R.C..S.
Lieut. -Governor of Punjab
since 1908
Tub r N i T E u PROVINCES c > i AGRA AND O L u n i«ntinut.<.
DEVELOPMENT. — Railways now traverse almost every district in the provinces, and a net-work of roads connects them with every village of importance. Two great canals on the Upper Doab have been constructed.
RELIGION. — Hindu and Muliammaclan.
LANGUAGE. -Hindustani : also Biliari.
PRODUCTS. — Wheat, rice, barley, pulse, tobacco, millet, cotton, sugar, oil seeds, iron and lead.
PUNJAB
HISTORY.- The province of the Five Rivers, which occupies the north west angle of the great northern plain of India, remained without a break, under the rule of Muhammadan dynasties of foreign extraction, from the beginning of the eleventh century till the latter half of the eighteenth, when the Sikhs revolted and established a Sikh kingdom. In 184*. after the Sikh \\ar, Dulip Singh's territory became a Itritish province, with Sir John Lawrence as chief commissioner. During the mutiny, many of the Sikh soldiers helped to light the rebels, and when peace was restored, Delhi and its territory were added to the I'unjab.
DATE OK ANNEXATION 1849
AREA. — n~,2o<> square miles
CLIMATE. Very hot from May to September in the plains ; varies according to the elevation in the hilly regions.
POPULATION. -.20. 330. j }<>
CAPITAL. Lahore.
GOVERNMENT. — Consist* ot a Lieutenant-Governor and a Legislative Council.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. The inheritance of luml proceeds throughout a large part of the Punjab, according to the custom known in England in Saxon time as gii-cclktiiil. that is, all the sons take equal portions of their father'- estate. This custom has produced village communities of peasant proprietors, the descendants of a common ancestor.
SIK M\KVI-:V ADAMSON, K. C.S.I., O.I.
I. it-iit. -Governor of Hiinna
sines I'M!)
Pt'N I A H— continued
RACKS. — Rajputs. Jats, I'athans and Beluchis.
DEVELOPMENT. — Railways with bridges spanning the great rivers, canals, and irrigation works have been constructed in many parts of the province.
RELIGION. — About half the population is Muhammadan, and half Hindu or Sikh ; the Buddhists, Jains and Christians, together, only number about 100.000.
LANGUAGES. — Punjabi and Hindi are the chief languages ; the native language of the I'athans and Beluchis is 1'ashtu, and is quite distinct from Indian dialects.
EDUCATION.— The Khatris and Kashmiri 1'andits have a special aptitude for education, and main- members of these two races have distinguished themselves in commerce, in the civil service of the government, and in the learned professions.
PRODUCTS. Wheat, millet, barley, maize, pulse, oil seeds, sugar, cotton and salt.
BURMA
HISTORY. ---A Buddhist Barman dynasty \vas established on tin- Irawadi as early as the eleventh century. The gradual extension eastwards of the borders of British India brought its frontier into proximity with Burma, and, o \\ini; to border raids by the Burmese, war broke out in iSj4 At its conclusion. Assam, Arakan. and Tenasserim. u ere ceded to the British government. I he second and third Burma wars resulted in the deposition ot the Kin.i; of Ava. and the complete annexation of Lower ami Upper Burma, uhirh \\ere placed under one administration in i £!•><">.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. iS^
AKKA. -3". 73^ S<1- miles.
CLIMATE. Very trying to Europeans, in the delta ard along the coast; the rainy season lasts n\e. six, and sometimes even seven months. From February to April it is dry and hot, the temperature sometimes rising to 100 F, in the shade.
I'OPVLATION. IP,. (ilO.o .14.
I'KOVINCF.S OF INDIA AM) THKIR Kl'I.F.KS
BURMA -i-ontintietl
CHIEF CITIES. Rangoon (Lower Burma), Mandalay (Upper Burma).
GOVERNMENT. — Vested in a Lieutenant-Governor and a Legislative Council.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. —Woman occupies a higher position in Burma than in other parts of India, and the laws affecting marriage contracts are more equitable. The Burmese are extremely fond of music, dancing and social entertainments.
RACES. — Burmans, Karens anil hill tribes, such as Kachins, Singphos, Palongs and Chins.
DEVELOPMENT. — Several railways are in operation, including one from Rangoon to Mandalay. The trade of the country lias made immense progress during the last forty years.
RELIGION. Buddhism is the religion of nearly 90 per cent, of the people.
LANGUAGE. — Burmese.
EDUCATION. — The primary schools of the country are the Buddhist monasteries, where every Buddhist lad is expected to serve as a novitiate. There are also numerous government schools. Over 60 per cent, of the males in Lower Burma can read and write.
PRODUCTS. Rice, teak, bamboo, cotton, iron, copper, lead, tin, coal and petroleum.
THE CENTRAL PROVINCES AND BERAR
HISTORY. — The Central Provinces, which include the Vindhyan and Satpura tablelands and the great plain of Nagptir, were formed, in 1861, out of territory taken from the north-west provinces, and from Madras, and originally belonging to the old Mahratta kingdom of Nagpur.
Previous to the rise of the Mahratta power in India, this region was ruled by native (Jond dynasties, the most famous
I'KOVIXCI-.S "I INDIA \M>
Tin; CENTRAL I'KUVINCI. s AM> BKRAR— c
being that of Garha Mandla, in the sixteenth century It still contains an unusually large proportion of aboriginal tribes, whose ancestors retreated to the hilly fastnesses of Gondwana, before successive waves of Aryan invasion, in early times.
DATE or ANNEXATION. — The northern part of the provinces in 1818 ; Nagpur and its dependencies in 1854 ; Berar was leased, in perpetuity, from the Nizam of Hyderabad in 1902.
AREA. 82,635 square miles. Berar 17,710 square miles.
CLIMATE. Hot and dry, except during the south-west monsoon (June to September).
POPULATION. — 9, 237. 65.4. Berar, 2,75.4.016. CAPITAL. — N'agpur.
GOVERNMENT.— Under a Chief Commissioner. All legis- lation is enacted by the Governor-General's Council.
LAWS AND CfSTOMs. British law as modified by special Indian enactments prevails, the chief difficulties lie in the direction of the enforcement of sanitary reforms and of forest conservation
CHIEF COMMISSIONER. The Hon. R 1 1. Craddock, C S I. RACKS. Malirattas, Kajputs and Gonds.
DEVELOPMENT. Much has been done, bv the construction
ol roads and railways, to open up the country.
Ri I.K.ION. Most of the people are Hindus, about one- seventh belonging to aboriginal or nun-Aryan tribes Mill adhere to their primitive faiths.
I.A\(if.\<ii's. Mainly Hindi and Marathi.
EIH'CA ITON. There are 2,5"° State schools and colleges at work in the provinces.
I'KOIUXIS. Kice. \\heat, millet, pulse, oil seeds, cotton, coal and manganese ore.
SIR H. K. Me CALL IM. K.C.M.G
Governor of Ceylon
since IC07
CEYLON
HISTORY. — An Aryan invasion established a Cingalese dynasty in Ceylon in the fifth century, B.C. Buddhism was introduced two centuries later. The Portuguese formed settlements in 1505, but were subsequently dispossessed by the Dutch. The British occupation dates from 1795-6, when the settlements were annexed to the Presidency of Madras. War was declared, in 1815, against the govern- ment of the interior, whereupon the last Kandyan king was taken prisoner, and the whole island came under British rule.
DATE OK ANNEXATION. — 1815.
AREA. 25,332 square miles.
CLIMATE. — The heat is less oppressive than in Hindustan. Mean temperature along the coast So F.
POPULATION. — 4,082,936.
CAPITAL.- Colombo.
GOVERNMENT. Is that of a Crown colony, and is in the hands of a Governor, assisted by executive and legislative councils.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. The basis of the law is Roman- Dutch, but the criminal code has been remodelled from the Indian penal code. In addition to the district courts, there are Gansabawas, or village councils, empowered to deal \\ith petty offences and trifling claims.
RACKS. Cingalese, Tamil, Moormen (Arabs), Burghers, Eurasians and Malays. About yooo European residents. In the interior are the vestiges of an aboriginal nomadic race, the Yeddahs.
DEVELOPMENT. 57') miles of railways arc owned and worked by the government. Colombo harbour is strongly fortified.
RELIC, ION. Buddhism, Bralimanism and Muhammadan- ism are the chief religions, but Christian missions are making good progress.
LANc.fAciK. . The Cingalese speak an Aryan language closely allied to the Pali, or modernised Sanskrit.
PROIH'CTS. — Tea, coffee, cinchona, cocoa, cinnamon, cardamoms, ebony, vanilla and the cocoanut palm.
SO.ME NATIVE STATES
AND
PRINCES OF INDIA
d:a
H. H. THK Nix AM OK HYDKKABAI., G.C.B., G. C.S.I. 1'rciritr Prince of the Indian Empire. Born 1H66. succeeded his father 1S69;
assumed charge of Government 1S.S4. His Highness receives a salute of 2\ films.
152
I'KOVISCKS 01 INDIA AM) THKIK KI'I.KKS
HYDERABAD
The Hyderabad State occupies the greater part of the I >eccan proper, or Central plateau of Southern India, between the provinces of Madras and Bombay. The surface is a slightly elevated tableland. In 687, the territory, long called the Nizam's Dominions, became a province of the Mughal Empire; but soon after 1713 the Viceroy of the Deccan made himself independent.
AREA. - 82,698 sq. miles (excluding the British assigned districts of Berar q.v.).
POPULATION. —11,141, 142.
CAPITAL. — Hyderabad, stands on the right bank of the River Musi, 1,700 feet above sea-level, and is distant 390 miles by rail from Madras. Population 450,000.
RELIGIONS. — Hindu and Muhammadan. The Muham- madans number 1,138,66(1, and are found mainly round the capital.
LANGUAGES.- Telugu, Kanarese and Marathi are the chief languages used.
Hyderabad is under the direct supervision of the Governor-General in Council.
This State includes all the territories of His Highness the Gaekwar. Gujarat, the northern maritime province o! Mombay, was at one time included in the Mughal Km pin-, but in the early part of the iSth century, the Mahrattas, under the leadership of Damaji Gaekwar. and afterwards of his son, Pilaji, succeeded in wresting all power out of the hands of the Mughal officers. From that time. Baroda has remained continuously under the sway of the Gaekwar family, who. ultimately, became feudatory to the British <i, >\ eminent under the guarantee of a treaty executed in the \\ar ol 1817.
Copyright] I' • ' •*"''> K I-0"'101
H.H. THI: MAHAKAJA < G A K k w A K ) o i BAKODA, G. C.S.I.
Born 1863. Succeeded 1S75. Invested with powers 1S81.
His Highness receives a salute of Jl ^uns.
B A ROD A ccntimictl
AREA of the territories of the (Jaekwar in various parts of the province of (iujarat, 8,570 sq. miles.
POPULATION.— 2,185,005.
CAPITAL. — Baroda, 248 miles north of Bombay. Population 105,000.
Baroda is under the direct supervision of the (lovernor- Cieneral in Council
M Y S O K K
The Mysore State is situated in Southern India between it 40' and 15 N. lat., and between 74 40' and 78 30' !•".. long., and is surrounded entirely by the districts of the Madras Presidency. Mysore is an extensive tableland, much broken by hilly ranges, and divided into two portions by the watershed between the Kista and Kaveri. In early times, Mysore was the principal seat of the Jains. The State has always been governed by Hindu rulers, except for a short time during the i<Sth century After the capture ol Seringapatam, in I7<j<), the British restored a representative of the antient line: but the subsequent misgovernment of this native prince led them to assume the administration in 1831. In iSSi, Mysore was restored to the native dynastv.
ARKA. 29,444 s(l miles.
Pi i rr i. A ri ON. 5,539, j>»<).
CAPITAL. — Mysore. A prosperous and well-built town of 70,000 inhabitants, situated 245 miles \V.S.\Y. of Madras.
Mysore is under the direct supervision of the (iovernor- General in Council. The annual value of the exports (Betel nut and leaves, coffee, cotton, piece goods, cardamoms, rice, silk and sugar) exceeds /~i, 200,000 ; of the imports (piece goods, cloth, wheat, etc.), /"i, 500,000.
Gold is mined in Kolar. The fixers are used for irrigation.
KASHMIR AND .IA.\H'
Kashmir, or Cashmere, is an irregular-shaped moun- tainous region in the extreme north of India. It lies in the basin of the upper Indus, among the Himalayas. It is a land of perpetual spring, and one of the loveliest spots in
H.H. THK MAHARAJA OF MYSORE, G. C.S.I. Born 1884. Succeeded his father 1895. Invested with full rulin« powers
by Lord Curzon at Mysore 1902. His Highness receives a salute of .21 nuns.
156
KASHMIR AND J AMU— i ontinual
the whole world. It is hemmed in on all sides by snow- capped peaks, and is watered by the Jhelam, which forms, in its course, Lake Wulur and other beautiful lakes.
Kashmir \vas conquered by Akbar in 1586, and became part of the Mughal empire. It was overrun by the Sikhs in 1819. Ghulab Singh, the feudatory of the Sikhs, made a treaty with the British in 1*46, by which he recognised British supremacy. In 1887, a land settlement (under pressure from the Indian Government) abolished serfdom.
AKKA.— 80,900 sq. miles.
I'oi'i'LATiox. — (Including its dependencies, Ladakh, |amu, Gilghit, etc.), 2,905,578. In Kashmir proper — 1,158,000.
KKI.KIION. — The ruling family is Hindu, but about three-quarters of the inhabitants are Muhammadans.
L.\N<.f.\(ii-:s. Tliirteen dialects spoken. Kashmiri itself is very closely related to Sanskrit.
Kashmir is under the direct supervision of the Governor- General in Council.
KAJIM'TANA Ac.liNCY
Kajpmana is tlie name of a great territorial circle em- bracing twenty native States (each having its oun autonomy and separate chief), and the British district of Ajmere- Merwara. It lies between Sindh ion the West) and the Punjab (on the North). Of the native States, seventeen are Rajput, two are (at (Bhartpur and I>holpur), and one only i- Muhammadan (Tonk).
Tlieir combined area is 127.541 s<| miles, and thev contain a population of 11,7^3.^01. The Kajpnt Agency is under the direct supers ision of the (lovernor-Cleneral in Council.
The following table gives a detailed statement of the estimated area and population i including forest tribesi of the Stales in the Rajpulana Agency : —
, yriAbt]
H.H. Tin. MAHAKAJA OF KASHMIR AND JAMI. G. C.S.I.
His Highness receives a salute of 21 tfuns within the limits of his State.
and of 19 Huns in the rest of India.
SOMK NATIVK STATKs AMI I'KIXCKs Oh INDIA
R A I l> t T A N A A (i K N : C Y- t o >i tinned
Aluar
Hranswara and Kushal^aili Bhartpur
liikaner
Kuncli
Dholpur
Jaiiuir
Karauli ...
Ki>tah
Marwar or Joclhpur
Mewar or l'daipi;r
Sirolii
Tonk i partly in Central India Seven Minor Stales ..
C K N T R A L INDIA A G E N C Y
Central India Agency is the name given to tlie country occupied by tlie nati\'e states grouped togetlier under the supervision of tlie political officer in charge of the Central India Agency These states lie between Rajputana and the Central Provinces. The British Districts of Jhansi and Lalitpur divide the Agency into two main divisions — Native Bimdelkhand and Raghelkhand on the east, am! Central India poper on the west.
The total area is 7-^,77^ s<). miles, and the total population 8,6.28,781,
The great majority of the people are Hindus.
The Central India Agency is under the direct supervision of the (iovernor-General in Council.
The principal states are eight in number and the follow- ing list gives their approximate si/e and population : —
fi.'HIJ (rfi.S.'Vil
yu ir.i.rso
I.77S ltj.115
_':>.i>t] J. '»:>.>. (XH
H . H . T H K MAHAKAJA • S i s i> H i A OF G w A 1. 1 < > K G.C.V.O.. Hon. LI.. I). Canil).. A.D.C.
Went to China as orderly officer to General Gaselee. 1901. and provided the expedition with a hospital ship at his own expense.
His Highness receives a salute of Jl nuns within the limits of ri- State. and of 19 nuns in the rest of India.
160
NATIVE STATES UNDER THE MADRAS PRESIDENCY
The Madras Presidency includes five native states cover- ing an area of 10,0X7 sq. miles, and having a population of 4,188,0X6; of these Travancore and Cochin represent ancient dynasties, and I'udukottai is the inheritance of a chieftain called the Tondiman.
The two petty states of Banganapalli and Sandur lie in the centre of two British districts.
The principal states are:- -
C'ochin 1.3M SlJ.OJ:i
I'mlukottai ... 1.I7S .iSO.440
Travancore 7.l_'<> J.95J.157
NATIVE STATES I'NDER T H I! PRESIDENCY OF BOMBAY
The native states in this presidency number 377 and are divided for administrative purposes into H) agencies. Total area 65,761 sc| miles, population G.<»oS,6.iN. The agencies are :
Bijapur Agencv, J states.
Cutcli ,, i state.
IMiarwar ,. i ,. (Savanur).
Kaira ,, i ,, (Cambavi.
Kathiauar ,. 187 states.
(principal states Bhaunagar, I >hranghadra. (ioudal,
Jnnagarh, Nawanagan. West Khandesh Agency, jo states. Kolaba ,. I state ijanjirai.
Kolhapur <) states
(principal state, Kolhapur with <i leudatory states) Malii-Kantha Agency. 51 states (principal state Idar). Nasik Agency, i state (Surgane).
H.H. THK MAIIAKAJA (HOI.KAK) 01- INDOKI-
His Hinhness receives a salute of 21 nuns within the limits of his State
anil of 19 Huns in the rest of India
-<I\IK NAIIYI. SIAIIS AMI I'KIM l.s ni INDIA
NATIVE STATES INDER THE PRESIDENCY <>i BOMBAY
ci) nt i n n c it
Palanpur Agency, 17 states (principal state Palanpur).
Foona Agency, i state (Bhor).
Kewa-Kantha Agency, 62 states (principal state
Raj pi pi a).
Satara Agency, i states. Sawantwadi Agency, i state. Sholapur Agency, i state. Sukknr Agency, i state (Khairpur). Surat Agency, 17 states. Thana Agency, i state (Janhar).
The following list gives details of the area and population of the most important states :
V.inii- ..( St.ite
Cinch .........
nhrarujhadra •
C.nlNl.ll .........
I.l.ir
1 1111. it;. nli i I un.ik.iilli i
Khairpur
Kolhapur
N.i\v,ui.i»;,ir ( \;i\ Mii.iu.i
I'alanptir
NATIVI: STATES V N I) t R Till: ( . () V E R N M I N T OH THI-: I'fN.IAH
There arc ^4 states under tlie government of the Punjab, which may be grouped into three main classes The Hill states, 2} in number, lie among the Punjab Himalayas and are held bv some of the most ancient Kajput families in all India. The Miihammadan state of Bahaualpur lies along the western halt of the southern border. The remaining states, including the Sikh principalities of Tatiala. J;ml and
H.H. THK MAHARAJA <»F KOI.HAIMK. G. C.S.I.. G.C.V.O.
His Highness is entitled to a salute of 1') tains. and a personal
salute of two additional uuns.
MIMI-; N ATI VI-. STATI-.S AM> 1'KIM ].S OF INDIA
NATIVE STATES UNDER THE GOVERNMENT 01 THE P U N J A B — c a nt i lined
Nahlia lie east of Lahore, and, with insignificant exceptions, occupy the centre of the eastern plains of the province.
TOTAL ARKA 36,532 sq. miles.
POPULATION 4,424,398.
The following list gives the area and population of the most important states : —
Population,
|
Nairn- of Stair |
Area in |
|
Bahawalpiir |
15,000 |
|
Chainba... |
3.216 |
|
Jin.l |
1.259 |
|
Manili |
1 900 |
|
Nabha |
9 '8 |
|
Patiala .. |
5,412 |
|
Sinniir (Naliani |
1.198 |
NATIVE STATKS I'NDER THH (, O V L: R N .\\ H N T O F K K N < ; A L
Tliere are 27 native states under the Government of Bengal. These states comprise Kuch Hehar in the Bhagalpur Division of Bengal, the inhabitants of which are a Mongoloid people, tin- Cooch ; and the petty states attached to the Orissa and Chota Nagpur divisions, 26 in numlxT, in the south These petty States are inhabited by hillmen of Kolarian or Dravidian origin, and their condition is still very primitive
TOTAL ARKA 31, 5.26 sq. miles
POPULATION. 3.473,4's>s
Kuch Hehar lias an area of 1,307 sq. miles and a population of 566,974.
This state is bounded on the north and north-east by Tibet, on the south-east by Bhutan, on the south by the British district oi Darjeeling. and on the west bv Nepal.
H.H.THK MAHAHAJA OK BIKASKK, G.C.I. K., K. C.S.I. . A. D.C.
His Highness receives a salute of 17 fiim>
S IKK AM coilliitnitl
The population consists of the races of Lepcha and Bhoti, and the Nepali tribe, Limbu.
AREA. — 2,Si<S sq. miles.
Porri.ATiox. — 59,014, chiefly Buddhists and Hindus.
Formerly under the Government of Bengal, it was brought under the direct supervision of the Governor-General in Council in 1906.
NATIVH STATES t'NHE R T H E (,() V 1! R N ,\\ E N T OF EASTERN KENf.AL AND ASSAM
Native states under the Government of Kastern Bengal and Assam are two. Manipur has an area of 8,4565(1. miles, and a population of 284,465, of which about 60 per cent are Hindus, 36 per cent, animistic forest tribes, and four per cent. Muhammadans.
Hill Tipperah is the home of a Mongoloid race It lias an area of 4.086 sq. miles, and a population of 173.325.
NATIVE STATES INDER T II E ( , ( >V E R N .M E N T Ol THE I'NITED PROVINCES Ol A(,R\ AND Ol'MH
Native States under llic Governmi-nt ol the I'nited Province's of A^ra and (Midh are t\\o. Kanipur, area 8<jj s(j. miles, and population 533, .212: rind Tehn ((larluval). area. 4,200, population JdS s.^5
•j.yrUJit]
H.H. THK MAHAKAJA c» I'ATIAI.A. K. C.S.I. His Highness receives a salute of 17 >;uns
168
, ^
11.11. Tin M \n M< \j \ 01 Ai \\ \K . K. C.S.I
II. H. THI. MAHARAJA .. H KITH BKHAK. G.C.I.K.. C.H . A.D.C. His Highness receives a salute of 13 guns
170
II. II. Tin NKWAII 01 KAMI-CK. C..C.1.K.. A.P.
THE MARCH OF SCIENCE
'Wiilumt i >cicntitic fouiulation no permanent Mipi-r- Mriictun- i'. in lir raiM'tl. I >oc> not experience warn n* tli.it the rule of thumb is dead and that the rule of science has taken its place: that to-day \vc cannot lir -..itistictl vvitli llic crude inrtlio.ls whicli \v<rr -iittiricnt for our fon t'atlicrs. ami that thox- un MI iinlii-trii- \\liich ilo not kiip aim ast of ilu iiilv.uiri1 'I ^ci( nci inuM Min-K anil rapiilK ilicliiu-r"
l-:.\tr.ict .>M.,II ,/ .v/.,«/i In II M. Kinn (n,,lf;e V I'rin.c <•' \\',»/fM .// llic l,iUT>i.iti,>,uii Co, IK' .•»/•/>/,.,/ C;i,-,.i/.v/rv. l.,,iul,»i. .l/./.v .7. /.<*"
WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES KING STREET, LONDON > ENGLAND)
This INSTITUTION is conducted separately from the business
of BURROUGHS WELLCOME A Co., and is under distinct
direction, although in the Laboratories a large amount of important
scientific work is carried out for the firm.
174
THE W E L L C O M E CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
KRHDHRICK B. POWHR, PH.D.. I.I..D,
KING S T k i b r . SNOW HILL. LONDON ENG.I
AWAR DS
CONFERRED UPON THE
WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATOR I ES
AT INTERNATIONAL EXHIBITIONS
ST. LOUIS ONE GRAND PRIZE
1904 THREE GOLD MEDALS
LIEGE 1905
ONE GRAND PRIZE
ONE DIPLOMA OF HONOUR
TWO GOLD MEDALS
MILAN 1906
LONDON (Franco-British) 1908
LONDON (Japan-British) 1910
BRUSSELS 1910
ONE GRAND PRIZE
TWO GRAND PRIZES
ONE GRAND PRIZE
THREE GRAND PRIZES
ONE DIPLOMA OF HONOUR
FOR
CHEMICAL AND PH AR M ACOGNOSTICA L RESEARCH
ETC.. ETC.
176
T H i; WELLCOME
C H L M I C A L K H S I: A R C H I. A P, OKA T ( ) R 1 H S
O k G A N I S A T I < > N . L ',) I I I'M H N I AND D I V I I O 1> U I: N T
THOSK \vlio have observed the progress of events in (ireat Britain during the last decade cannot fail to have been impressed with the remarkable developments and achievements by which it has been attended, especially in the domains ot the chemical, physical and biological sciences The discovery within the past lew years ot several new elements in the atmosphere, and of radio- active snb-.tan.ces, the liquefaction, and even solidification, ot gases that were hitherto regarded as permanent, the synthesis of several important organic compounds, the isolation of new substances, and the more precise characterisation ot those previously known, together with the perfection of chemical processes and the applications of electricity in chemical and metallurgical operations, are but a few examples of the contribu- tions to knowledge and the industrial progress which have signalised the closing years of the past, and the beginning of the new. century.
The spirit <>l research has. in fact, now become so clif) used as to have penetrated into almost every depart- ment ot human knowledge and activity \Vith a broader recognition ol its usefulness, and even of its necessity, as an element ot progress, research is no longer confined to institutions ot learning, but lias proved to be a quite indispensable factor in its relation to industrial pursuits, as well as tor the study of those important problems in medical science which are so intimately associated with the health and happiness of mankind. It has indeed been truly said that "without a knov\ ledge of the constitution or structure of the molecules which go to make up the substances employed as remedies, therapeutics, or the administration of these remedies, can never be an exact science. Thus the research chemist may contribute, though indirectly, his share towards placing medicine upon a real and scientific basis "
ONE OF THE LA n o i; A T o i< 1 1- s — S F. c O s D F r. o o I
It is worthy of note that the year 1896 was marked by
the establishment in Great Hritain of at least three
Dfiusn
laboratories devoted exclusively to scientific research — chemical namelv, the 1 >avy- Faraday Research Laboratory con- ^e^earch
L.aix>ratorn
nected with the Royal Institution, which was formally inaugurated in December, 1896; the new Research Labora- tory of the Royal College of Physicians of Edinburgh, which was formally opened in November, 1896; and the WEI.I.COMK CHEMICAL RESEARCH LAIIORATORIKS, which were established in the summer of 1896.
The scope of these laboratories and the directions in which research is • conducted in them, naturally differ. The first-mentioned, for example, is more especially of an academic character, and is therefore devoted to some- Thc what abstract investigations in chemistry and physics ; the Wellcome second is stated to have for its primary object the examina- Rl.search tion of morbid specimens and material, the study of Laboratm-i. zymotic diseases, and, in general, bacteriological, physio- logical and pathological work ; while the third, the WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES, are designed for investigations in both pure and applied chemistry, and, in the latter instance, with special reference to the studv of that large class of both organic and inorganic compounds which are employed as medicinal agents in the treatment of disease.
The importance of the work \\hich it is the purpose to accomplish in these different, but more or less closely related, departments of science, is apparent, and is duK appreciated by those who recognise the deficiencies of existing knowledge.
In response to numerous requests, it has been con sidered that a brief sketch of the WELLCOMK CHEMICAL RESEARCH LAKORATORIKS, descriptive of their organisation, equipment and development would prove of interest to a considerable number who have not the opportunity of inspecting them.
The first announcement of Mr. Henry S. Wellcome's plan to establish the Chemical Research Laboratories
THE CoMBfSTioN ROOM ISO
WKI.I.COMK ( HKMICAI. RKSKARCH LABORATORIES
which bear his name, was made on the occasion of a dinner given by him to Dr. Frederick H. Power, the present Director, at the Holborn Restaurant, London, on the evening of July 21, 1896. The occasion was a memorable Appreciation by
c . . . • t i i 1 distinguished
one in many respects, tor the gathering included a large scientists number of distinguished representatives of the various sections of the scientific world. It was then explained by Mr. Wellcome that the work which he proposed to inaugurate was one which he personally had very much at heart, that it would be carried out on no selfish lines, but would be controlled and dictated with the highest regard for science. It was also made clear that the new Chemical Research Laboratories were to be entirely distinct from those of the Works of his firm, in which, as hereto- fore, research would also continue to be conducted. The expressions of appreciation of the high purpose and the scientific spirit which had actuated Mr. Wellcome in the development of such extended plans for chemical research, as manifested by vaiious distinguished speakers on the occasion referred to, were indeed most auspicious, and fittingly commemorated the inauguration of the work that was to be undertaken.
The 6rst home of the laboratories was in a building located at No. .|2, Snow Hill, but it was soon found desirable to make considerable extensions In order to accomplish this, it was decided that the laboratories should ,I<'.',<]t^',°Lo" ioi be transferred to a building of their own. of \\hich they should lia\i' complete use and possession Such premises were secured at No. 6. King Street. Snow Hill, where, in a very central part of London, and amid surroundings replete with many of its most interesting historical associations, the laboratories are now located.
The building is a handsome, modern one of Venetian style of architecture, and comprises four stories and a basement. A view of it is represented on pagf \~\
On the ground floor of the building are the ottice of the Director, and the library, the latter being quite complete for the special requirements. It contains not only a
isi
WKI.LC'OMK {-HKMICAI. KKSKAKCFI I.A HOI< ATOKl KS
considerable number of recent chemical and pharmacological works, but also complete sets of many journals, such as the Journal of the Chemical Society, Berichtc dcr detitsclien cheniischen Gcsellscliaft, Journal of the Society of Chemical Industry, etc. Files of many of the more important chemical, pharmaceutical and medical periodicals of England, America and Germany are also kept. As several very large and complete scientific and technical libraries are also at all times accessible to members of the staff, it is evident that the requirements in this direction are most abundantly supplied. In the library there is also a cabinet containing specimens of the various substances obtained in the course of laboratory investiga- tions, which already form a collection of considerable interest.
The laboratories proper are located on the first, second and third floors of the building, and are represented on pages 178, 180. They are similar in their arrangement, are provided with gas and electricity for both illuminating and heating purposes, and completely equipped with all the necessary apparatus and appliances for conducting chemical investigations. There are pumps on each table for filtration under pressure, and special adaptations for vacuum distillations. A separate connection with the electric mains supplies the current for heating iron plates used for the distillation of ether and other similar liquids. Each laboratory is provided with fine analytical and ordinary balances, which are carefully protected from dust and moisture by tightly-fitting glass cases. There are also telephones on each floor, so that communication between the different laboratories or with the Director's office can be quickly effected.
The basement of the building, which is well-lighted by electricity, contains a combustion furnace and all the appliances for conducting ultimate analyses, whilst two other furnaces of the most approved construction are available in the laboratories ; it also contains a large electric motor for working the shaking and stirring apparatus,
drug mill, etc., and a dark-room adapted for polari- metric or photographic work. A view of a portion of the combustion room is shown on piii;c iSo. In direct communication with the basement are dry and com- modious vaults, which afford ample room for the storage of the heavier chemicals and the reserve stock of glass- ware, etc. By means of a small lift, articles may be conveniently transported from the basement to any floor of the building.
From this brief description, and the accompanying photographic illustrations, it will be seen that the \\"I:LI. COMI: CIIK.MICAI. RKSKAKCH LABORATORIES are unique in their appointments and in the purpose they are designed to accomplish.
It is perhaps, hardly necessary to explain that some of the problems \\hich engage the time and attention of members of the staff which comprises a number of highly-skilled and experienced chemists are of technical Or'K application, having reference to the perfection of the sck,r chemical products of Burroughs Wellcome \ Co. These naturally do not always aftorcl material for publication, and many oilier difficult researches extend over con. sulerable periods of tune. Nevertheless, one hundred and Iwentv fi\e publications, embodying the results of original work contributed to various scientific societies, \\lnrh are consecutively numbered. have already been issued. * Mhcr investigations in progress will, from tune to f future communications.
Although too short a period has elapsed, since the establishment of these laboratories, to afford much material for a historical retrospect . their present measure of success mav be considered to have justified the expectations of their founder and of those uho are in sympathy \\ith the work \\lnch they aim to accomplish.
WELLCOMK CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
SCIENTIFIC PAPERS PUBLISHED BY
THE WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
1. SOME NEW doi-D SALTS OF HYOSCINK, HYOSCYAMINE AND ATROPINE
2. TlIK CHARACTERS AND METHODS OK ASSAY OF THE OFFICIAL
HYPOPHOSPHITKS
3. NOTE ON THE MYDRIATIC ALKALOIDS
4. PREPARATION OF ACID PHKNYLIC SALTS OF DIBASIC ACIDS
5. A NEW METHOD FOR THK ANALYSIS OH COMMERCIAL PHENOLS
6. THE ASSAY OF PREPARATIONS CONTAINING PILOCARPINF.
7. PlLOCARPINE AND THE ALKALOIDS OF JAHORANDI LEAVES
8. A NEW <;i.r< OSIDB FROM WlLI.OW BARK
9. THE coNSTurrtoN OF PILOCARPINF: — Part I
10. THE COMPOSITION AND DETERMINATION OF CERICM OXAI.AIK
11. RKSEAKCHES ON MORPHINE— Part I
12. OBSERVATIONS RELATING TO THK CHEMISTRY OF THE BRITISH
PHARMACOPOEIA
13. MEKCI.-ROUS IODIDI;
14. THE COMPOSITION OF BKRBERINE PHOSPHATE
15. A CONTRIIU TION TO THE PH ARMACOC.NOSY OF OFFICIAL S I ROPHAN-
THL-S SHED
16. THE CHEMISTRY 01- THE JAHORANDI ALKALOIDS
iy. A NEW ADMIXTl'RE OF COMMERCIAL STROPHAN1HI S SEED 18. RESEARCHES ON MORPHINE — Part II
I(). THE CONSTITUTION OF PlLOCARPINE — Part II
20. THE CHKMISTRY OF THK BARK OF RoBINIA PSEUD-ACA( IA. Linn.
21. THE ANATOMY OF TUB HARK OF KoillNIA PsEl'D-ACACIA. Linn.
22. A soi.fni.H MAM.ANESE CITRATK AND ( OMPOI NDS OF MANGANKM:
WITH IRON 2j. THK CHEMICAL < HARACTKRSOF SO-CALLED lODO-TAN N I N COM POT N DS
24. TllE CONSTITI'TION OF PlLOCARPINE — Part III
25. A NEW SYNTHESIS OF </-Ei HYLI RICARBALLYLH ACID
26. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE ESSENTIAL OIL Oh AsARI'M CASADF.NSK.
Linn.
27. DERIVATIVES OF GALLIC Ac ID
28. TlIK OCCURRENCE OF S.M.H IN IN DIFFERENT \Vll.l cj\x AM.
POPLAR HARK>
IS4
SCIENTIFIC PAPERS — continued
29. THE CONSTlTrtNTS OF COMMERCIAL CHKVSAROUIN
30. THE CONSTITUENTS OF AN ESSENTIAL OIL OF RfK
31. METHYL p-Mi-: nn I.HKXYI. KKTONE
32. INTERACTION OK KETONKS AND ALDEHYDES WITH ACID CHLORIDES 3^. THE ANATOMY OK THE STEM OK DERRIS CI.IGINOSA, Bciith.
34. TIIK CHEMISTRY OK THE STEM OK DERRIS UI.IC.INOSA, licntli.
35. THE coNSTiTrrioN in PILOCARPINE — Part IV
tCi. PREPARATION AND PROPERTIES OK DlMETHYI.GLYOXALlNB AND
I >IMKTHVLPYRAZOI.E 37. THI-: El.KCTROI.YTIC HKD1CTION OK PlIENO- AND \APHTHO-
MORPHOI.ONKS
?M. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OK KO-SAM SKKDS (BRTCEA SCMATRANA,
Roxb.) ;i). COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 01 THE BARKS 01- THE SALICACK.V —
1'art I
40. THE coNsri re i ION OK CHRYSOI'IIANK: ACID AND OK KMODIN
41. I'llE CONSTITUTION OK KriNEPHRINK
.\i. A I.. -wo- ROTATORY MODIFICATION OK Ql'ERCIToI.
43. THK coNSTiri'K.NTs OK THE ESSENTIAL On. OK CAI.IKOKNIAS I.ACRKL
44. SOME DKRIVATIVKS en. I'MiiEi.i.ri.oNi-
45. TllE coNSTITl'ESTS OK Ctl AU I.MOOd KA Si I US
46. Till CONS I n i- 1 ION (IK CiiAri.Mooc.Kic ACID J'.irt I
47. CHEMICAL i \AMINATION OK CASCAKA HAKK
4S. ClIIMICAl I-XAMINAIION OK ( ', •> M N 1 \1 A I.IAVls I'l. TllK. UFIAIION r.KIWK.KN \AIIIJ.\I AMI S\ N 1 11 K 1 l( A I Ci I \ ( 1 K Y I.
riiosriiiiKii Ai ins
50 ( ;\ N0< . \UDIS, A NIU C\ ANoi.ENI I K (illio-IDF
51 I'Kl I'VKAITON AM) Puol'KR I IKS ol 1:4: 5 — Tl; I M K I II V I I , I. Yo\ AI.I N I. 3.'. TllK i ONSI I I I I ION 01 I'll 01 \RI-INI • -I'.irt \'
.=,;. Tin i ONSI 111 i i"\ 01 I', \KI.AI CMS I'.irt I
^4. THK CONSIT ICKN i s 01 i HK. SPI us < n I \\ us. >i AKPI -, \vic, HTIANA
litlltllC. AND "I IhDNOCAKlMs \NIIIMMINIICA I'tCIIC
f,5. Till i .INS 1 I I CI N I s in I 111 •' SKKDS i n- CiYNO< ARDIA ODOKATA. W.Hr. Jfi Till S\ N 1111 -I-- I'l Sl'l:s I ANCI- s AIMED In Iv TI SK. I'll RI N I 57. I'lll-MIi M. I \AMINAMiiN o| ('iKINIHIIA
_S.S Clll Mil M. 1- \.\MI N \ 1 li>N 01 Al IIH's\ C^NAI'll'M, /./III/. .=.11. I'UI I'AUA I InN AMI rKOI'KR I II s (i| SIIMK M- \\ Tui'l'MM.-
(in. TIIK loNsiiniNis m nil i S-I.'N-I IAI on i- ROM 1111 IKCII OF
I'll lO.sl'ORCM I MM I AIIM. \'i'll/
\V1I.I.COMK CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
SCIKNTIFIC 1'Al'EKS — Continued
61. THE CONSTITUTION OF t'MBELLUI.ONK
62. LONDON BOTANIC GARDENS
63. CHKMICAI. AND PHYSIOLOGICAL KXAMINATION OF THE FRUIT or
CHAILLETIA TOXICARIA
64. CHKMICAL KXAMINATION OF ERIODICTVON
65. THK BOTANICAL CHARACTERS OF SOME CAI.IFOKNIAN SPECIES OF
GRINDKLIA
66. THK KKLATIONS BETWEEN NATURAL AND SYNTHETICAL (".LYCFKYL
PHOSPHORIC ACIDS — Part II
67. THE CONSTITUTION OF UMBKI.LUI.ONK— Part II
68. THE REDUCTION 01 HYDROXYI.AMINOPIHY'PROUMBELLULONEOXIMK 6<j. THE CONSTITUTION OF CHAUI.MOOC.RIC AND HYDNOCAKPIC ACIDS
70. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THK ESSENTIAL OIL OF AMERICAN
PENNYROYAL
71. THE CONSTITUTION OF HOMO-KRIODICTYCiL
"2. THK INTERACTION OF METHYI.ENE CHLORIDE AND 1HK SODIUM DERIVATIVE OF ETHYL MALONATE
73. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF THE FRUIT <>i BRUCKA AN i IDYSI NTERK A
Lam.
74. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION or THK HARKSOI BKUCKA AN i IDY>ENTKRICA
Lam., AND BRUCEA SI'MATRANA. lioxb.
75. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF GRINDKLIA — Part II
76. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF Liri'iA SCAHKKRIMA, Sumler (" Beukuss
Boss")
77. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF THE ROOT AND LEAVES OF MORINPA
LONOIFLORA 7S. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF NUTMKil
79. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION 01 Mi< ROMEKIA CHAMISSONIS Ycrh,/
BHCIKI)
80. THE CONSTITUTION ot I'MHELLULONK — Part III
81. THE CONSTITUENTS OF OLIVE LEAVES
82. THE CONSTITUENTS OF OLIVE BARK
83. CHKMICAI, EXAMINATION OF II-OMCFA I-UKI-UREA
84. THE CHARACTERS OF OFFICIAL IRON ARSKNATK
85. PREPARATION OF A SOLUHI.E FERRIC ARSENATE
86. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE EXPRESSED On. OF NUTMEU
87. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION AND PHYSIOLOGICAL ACTION 01 NUTMEI;
88. SOME OBSERVATIONS RECiARI>IN<; " Ol.FUROPKIN " FR'iM OLIVE
I, RAVES
89. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF KRIODK TYON— Part II
1)0. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE HARK OF PRUNUS SK.RoTINA <JI. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THK RKI/oME OF Al'OCYNt M ANDRO SAEMIFOLIUM
186
SCIENTIFIC I'AI'KKs
92. (SU-AMV(il)AMN, AM' Mil KI-.M'I.l I KIN ol ITS I 1 I I' I A - AC I I V I IH KIVA1 IVK
9;,. 'I'm: Ac i ION ni- NuiiK Ai:n os 1111 KTHI-KS IIP AKOVATK
M\ |)Un\\ AI.I'I H\ 1)1 S
94. THK SYNTHKSIS MI SI/IISTAM KS AU.IK.D i <> C'< > i AKSINI
C|5. OlK.MU Al. I-XAMINATU'M OK K I . A I I K ! I \I ASH 1111 (HAKAI ll-l:> nl Hi \TI-.kMN
i)f>- Tin, Ti si> ion I'i I;ITV 01 Oi IMM. SAI i>
<)7. Tin < osi-Uii KATION o] Tuoi-iNK ASH M'-Tkoi'isi \s:> Tin
KKsui.i TION 01 ATKoi'iNK cjS. Tin i oss i rn i STS 01 TIIK !• KI 11 oi- 1-^c i :A 1. 1. 1 CM Ki. \TI i;n \i
99. S\ MIII-.SI-.* IN TIIK Kl'INI 1'IIHINI Si KII S
1(10. ClII'.MK'AI. I.XAMINAI10S 01- JAI.AI'
IDI. Till. ( OSSII ll'I.S 1 -. 01 Kl'MI-X Kl M.OSIASI >
loj. Till-. I ONSTITl'1-.STS 01 Col. o( YS I ||
id). 'I'm. i ossTiTii NTS or UI:D C'I.O\IK I-'i.oui us
[(14. ClH Mil AI. I- XAMINA'l ION 01 1'l'MI'KlN Si 111
105. Cm- MUM. i \\MINATION 01 WATI-HMIION Slip
Kid. (.'ill Mil Al. I \AMIN.\IION o I { ) K SI T HIM . A I 1 M 'lH\K-~onils
107. Tin. i oxvrm IN i s oi nil. MOUIKSOI- TKIMII.II M IM \USMIM ION. Tm-: i ossi i n i- N i s oi IMI-. i i A\ K> oi- PKIM^ SK.HOIINA
109. SVNIIIFMS OK ColAKSIM
lln. Nil IK ON Ci\ SO( 'AKDINF AM' GNNo(ARHASK
III. ClIKMII A I. I \.\MISATION ol 11(1 II III KOI ^ Koii'f ol Il'o\|.]\
HCIK-I M.i.i i iij. IHI ni soi i i ION "i HKNVON i o>( isi
IIV No I K OS THE ( OS.S 1 IT1TION (II il-Kl \T I KIN 1 I (. Till ( OSS 1 1 1 I I S IS Ol I.I • !• I \M>H \
ii*,. THK. cos^ i 1 1 1 MOM 01- I%KUII>U i \ m. oi I IOMOI RI< i;iu not. AS ><
UK Ml- si'i i;i i is i 16. Tin. S\Niii!si-, oi 2:4:6 TK-HII- i ii"XM'iii' s\ i ; 4 -
I ) I M KT H U X YMT V K V I K I- 1 O s h
Ii;. Till •' I oSS'I ITT I M I s ol ( i I- (.SI Mil M
IlS. SVNIIIKM^ IN IMF. Kl'IM- IMIKINK S|.KIIS I'LTt II.
III. Till AISsilKI' I ION -ri.l TK \ ol >,I\|K M'HS I IT! I h I ' P* K \,'INI - SMl Till IK S M.T>
1^0. AriKiN oi SOPICM AMAI.'.VM ON Mi imiisK I-.IHIK-- i;i. Tin-: ciiNsrii i KN i ^ HI im KM I/OMK oi IKI- \ i K-.K oi OK
IJ^. ClIKMK Al (• XVMINA1 ION OI TIIK KO.l ol I . \ SIO SI I'll" N Mlls^ NI KIANI s
i:;. TIIK OKIKNIAIIOS oi IHI Ni i IM <,R,U r IN NITHOMYHI^ i u is i. Ai ID
124. .l-/1- Ih 1>KO\\ -r-I-MK 1 ll>i\\ IHI-SVI \\IISI . ANP IMK KFSOI.I 1!<>N'1
ll-/1- HM'K«\\rillN\ll-imi \MINI lij. Till-: t'ONM ITt I NTS HI \\11IIVSI\--.\1N11IKA
1ST
THH WE LI. co. VIE
PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH
LABORATORIES
H. H. IJALH, M.A.. M.U.
B k o < K \\ n i 1 1 A i i . H i k NI- 1 1 i i i . 1. 1 . s [> ( . N , t s r,
AWARDS
CONFERRED UPON THE
WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORI ES
AT INTERNATIONAL EXHIBITIONS
ST. LOUIS ONE GRAND PRIZE
1904 ONE GOLD MEDAL
LI EGE 1905
ONE GRAND PRIZE
TWO GOLD MEDALS
MILAN 1906
ONE GRAND PRIZE
LONDON
' Franco-British) 1903
LONDON
i Japan-British 1910
BRUSSELS
1910
TWO GRAND PRIZES
ONE GRAND PRIZE
THREE GRAND PRIZES
ONE DIPLOMA OF HONOUR
F O K
PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH AND PREPARATIONS
ETC . . E T ' .
THE WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
THE activities of the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories cover a wide field of therapeutic investiga- tion. The production of Anti-Sera and of bacterial preparations for therapeutic inoculation, and the researches in bacteriology and the mechanism of immunity necessitated by the progressive development of this comparatively new department of therapeutics, have been carried on side by side with investigations into the mode of action and the nature of the active principles of drugs of animal and vegetable origin, and the production by synthesis of sub- stances identical with, or related to, the naturally-occurring principles, in chemical structure and pharmacological action. Incidental to this pharmacological work has been the development of methods for controlling and standardising, by physiological means, the activity of potent drugs to which chemical methods of assay are not applicable.
ANTI-SERA
A large series of Anti-Sera is now available for thera- peutic use, and many have been first produced in these Pioneer Laboratories. They may be classified into Antitoxic Sera,
set um therapy possessing the power of neutralising the soluble toxins produced in artificial culture by certain organisms, or elaborated in the poison glands of animals ; and Bactericidal Sera which are obtained by immunising horses against the actual bacterial substance of such pathogenic organisms as do not form soluble toxins. Early representatives of the two classes were Diphtheria Antitoxic Serum and Anti-streptococcus Serum, and these have maintained their position as the most widely and successfully used sera of their respective classes. These Laboratories were pioneers in the production of these sera in the British Empire, and produced the first Anti-Diphtheria Serum used in the United States of America.
WKI-I.COMK PHYSIOLOGICAL KKSKAKCH LABORATORIES
DIPHTHERIA ANTITOXIC SERUM, 'WELLCOME'
Since the foundation of the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories, a number of pamphlets, leaflets and reports dealing with therapeutic sera have been issued in connection therewith.
In the early editions, the origin, history and develop- ment of serum therapy were given, as well as an explanation of the meaning of the expression "antitoxin Antitoxin
unit
unit. It is scarcely necessary to repeat that the antitoxin
unit adopted at the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories is the Ehrlich-Behring unit. It is not intended in these notes to take into view any of these aspects, but merely to bring up to date and present, in a succinct form, the progress of the treatment and the results obtained by means of it in more recent years. Diphtheria Antitoxic Serum is standardised by Ehrlich's method. In its earlier form the unit was based upon the power of completely neutralising the local as well as the general effects of the minimum dose of a given specimen of diphtheria toxin which surfaced to kill, in 48 hours, a guinea pig weighing 250 grammes. The quantity which just sufficed for this was said to contain one-tenth of a unit. Thus, if croi c.c. just completely protected, the scrum was said to contain 10 units per c.c.
Samples of serum, carefully standardised by this method in the early days of its introduction, having been pre- served, it soon became known that one-tenth of a unit of Toxoids serum would not protect against ten times the minimal '" llltcre<i
cultures
fatal dose of every filtered culture. An explanation of this curious fact has been put forward by Khrlich. The filtered culture contains, besides the specific toxin, other bodies, named by him " toxoids,'' which, while in moderate doses incapable of causing death, have yet the power of combining with the antitoxin and rendering this inert. The number of minimal fatal doses which one-tenth of a unit of serum will neutralise depends, therefore, on the ratio of toxoids to toxin in the filtrate. For the purpose of testing serum, therefore, it is necessary to use a filtrate,
WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
the neutralising capacity of which has been ascertained by careful titration with standard diphtheria antitoxic serum. This standard has remained unaltered throughout, thanks to the fact that some of the earliest serum tested has been carefully preserved.
In May, 1897, a change in the method of standardising serum was introduced by Ehrlich. The presence or absence of a local swelling at the seat of injection is no method* longer taken as the criterion of neutralisation, but the
death or survival of the animal — four days being taken as the limit ; and the test dose of filtrate is no longer that which is neutralised by one-tenth of a unit, but that which just suffices to kill the animal within four days when mixed with a whole unit of serum. This change did not introduce any alteration of the standard, because the test dose is ascertained by a series of experiments in which a unit of the standard serum is employed. It has the great advantage of being a purely objective method. For instance, no discrepancies can arise from difference of opinion as to what is to be considered as the smallest local swelling worthy of notice. All errors of measurement, also, are reduced ten per cent.
STATISTICS OF TREATMENT BY DIPHTHERIA ANTITOXIC SERUM
Amongst the most valuable English statistics on the sub- statistics ject are those compiled by the Medical Officers of the diphtheria Metropolitan Asylums Board ; and from them may be gathered the following figures : In 1894, only a small number of cases were treated with antitoxin. In 1895. 61-8 per cent., and in 1896, 71-3 per cent., of the total cases were treated with antitoxin, it not having been employed in moribund or hopeless cases, nor in those which were doubtful in nature, or so mild as not to require any specific treatment. The accompanying table shows clearly a regular percentage decrease in mortality part passii with a regular increase in the percentage of cases treated with antitoxin : —
WKI,I,( OMK PHYSIOI-OdlCAI. KKSKARCH LABORATORIES
CASES OF DIPHTHERIA TREATED IN THE HOSPITALS OF THE METROPOLITAN ASYLUMS BOARD
Mortality Year Her cent.
of all cases 1890-93 ......... 30-4
1^94 ............ 29-6
1896 ... ... ... ... 25'CJ
1897 ... ... ... ... 20-4
1898 ... ... ... ... 175
1899 154
1900 ... ... ... ... 1 2 '9
1901 ... ... ... ... 1 2 '6
1 902 ... ... ... ... 1 1 ' 8
1903 ... ... ... ... 10' 2
1904 ... ... ... ... 109
1905 ......... 90
1906 ... ... ... io'4
1907 ... . ., ... .. IO 2
Kp8 ... ... ... ... 10-9
The Colchester epidemic in the summer of 1901 furnishes evidence of especial weight.* Up to a certain date, the cases in hospital were treated with antiseptic The sprays. These in all amounted to 81, of whom 21 died, Colchester giving a case mortality of 25 9 per cent. After this date, all the cases were treated with antitoxin without antiseptic spr.iy, and of 119 so treated, 7 died. The case mortality of this group was therefore 5^8 per cent.
The inference that antitoxin thus saved many lives is much strengthened by the fact that of 37 cases treated at home before the date indicated, io'8 per cent, died, whilst of 48 cases treated at home after this date, 14 5 per cent. died. This concurrent evidence clearly shows that the severity of the disease was not declining at the time when such good results were being obtained at hospital with antitoxin.
'Journal of Hygiene, April 1. 100J 195
WKLLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RKSKARCH LAHORATOKIKS
experiments
CURATIVE AND PROPHYLACTIC DOSES OF DIPHTHERIA ANTITOXIC SERUM
Experiments on animals have shown that the amount of antitoxin which is necessary to save life increases at a rapidly accelerating rate, according to the length of time which elapses between the injection of the diphtheria virus and the administration of the curative serum, and this is amply confirmed by the results of experience in hospitals. Thus Wernicke and Behring, having determined the amount of antitoxic serum necessary to save from death a guinea pig which had immediately before been injected subcutaneously with a lethal dose of diphtheria toxin, found that ten times this amount was required to effect a cure if this administration was deferred until eight hours after the injection of the toxin ; whilst twenty-four hours afterwards, fifty times the initial quantity was necessary.
The efficacy of antitoxin given early in the disease, and the urgent necessity of beginning the treatment at the earliest possible moment, are well illustrated by the following statistics from the Brook Hospital, published in the Metropolitan Asylums Board Report for 1902 : —
Day of the disease on which treatment
Mortality per cent.
|
commenced |
1897 |
1898 |
1899 |
1900 |
1901 |
1902 |
|
First |
0 |
O |
0 |
O |
•o |
•o |
|
Second |
• 5'4 |
50 |
3'8 |
3-6 |
4 ' |
46 |
|
Third |
• " 5 |
M 3 |
122 |
6-7 |
ii 9 |
10 5 198 |
|
Fourth |
. 19-0 |
18-1 |
2O 0 |
149 |
124 |
|
|
Fifth |
. 210 |
22-5 |
20 4 |
212 |
16-6 |
19-4 |
196
WKM.CDMK I'HVSIOI.OdK At. UKSKAKCM LABORATOKIK8
The serum from normal horses may cause rashes and rise of temperature in susceptible individuals, but apart from Limltof this the only limit to the administration of antitoxin is the dose bulk of the fluid in which it is contained. Therefore, a large dose should be given at the earliest possible moment, when- _
Repeated
ever there is reason to suspect diphtheria; and in cases injections which progress unfavourably, the treatment may be repeated in about six hours, giving at least double the initial dose.
l;ar less, however, is to lie expected from repeated injections at intervals than from one full dose given at the outset of the attack. In no case should either the administration ot antitoxin or the repetition of the dose be delayed until the result of a bacteriological examination has been made known.
CURATIVE DOSE The dose for a case of moderate severity should not be less than 2000 units, and in severe cases 4000 units at least should be given at once, and larger
doses are recommended bv manv authorities. These doses DosaKe
irrespectivi should be given irrespective of age, because diphtheria is ot'age
very fatal to young children. If any difference were to be made, adults would have the smaller doses, as the prognosis in diphtheria improves with the age of the patient.
As the question of the keeping-quality of sera is frequently raised, it may be stated generally that, provided they are KeepinR- Uept in a cool place at a fairly constant temperature, and <iual"y °f protected from light, these sera may be relied upon to remain practically unaltered for at least a year from the date of issue. They are issued in phials hermetically-sealed in the blow-pipe flame, a method which greatly favours this result.
PROPHYLACTIC DOSK. Protective injections, of at least 1000 units, may be administered to the rest of the family whereof one member has been attacked with diphtheria. It must be borne in mind, however, that the prophylactic action gives only a temporary protection against attack to the person so treated, the protection thus conferred lasting probably about three weeks at the most. The whole of the contents of one phial may be injected in eacli case. It
\VKLI. «IMK I'HYSIOMHVU Al KKSKAKCH I.ABOKATOKIKS
should be carefully noted that, when once a phial is opened, it is highly undesirable, owing to risk of contamination, to reserve a portion of the contents for a future occasion. It should all be used at once on one or more patients.
BACTERIOLOGICAL DIAGNOSIS OF DIPHTHERIA
The injection of antitoxin at the earliest possible moment in the course of the disease may be a matter of such importance to the patient that this should be done on the clinical evidence alone where the diagnosis is doubtful ; but immediate steps should be taken to confirm the diagnosis by bacteriological methods.
ON S E R U At L: R I I' T I O N S
In some cases, the administration of a curative serum is followed by rashes and transitory rise of temperature : occasionally by pains and swellings in the joints. These accidents have been shown to be also caused by normal horse serum, so that they are not to be attributed to the anti-bodies in the serum. The introduction of more highlv
Normal horse . ...
serum potent serum, allowing a diminution of the bulk to be
injected, has rendered these complications less frequent. They arise for the most part during convalescence, and do not appear to have resulted, in any case, in death, though they have doubtless sometimes retarded recovery. The following account of this subject, by Dr. Arthur Stanley,* deals with 500 cases of diphtheria at the Noith- Western Hospital of the Metropolitan Asylums Hoard, all of which were treated with antitoxin: " The diagnosis of
Diphtheria doubtful cases was verified by bacteriological examination.
antitoxin The total number of deaths in the series was iSo, a death-
injections r _. . . . . . .
rate of 16 per cent. The antitoxin was injected in quantities
usually of 4000 Behring antitoxin units immediately after admission, but varied from 1000 to 30,000 units according to the severity of the case and the time of admission after onset. No constant relation between the quantity of
• Hritish Medical Journal. I-Yl>ru;tr\ 1?. HKU
REPRODUCTIONS IN ACTUAL COLOURS OF PKKTAKATION: STAIN HO WITH 'Soi.oin MICROSCOPIC STAINS
REPRODUCTIONS IN ACTUAL COLOURS OF PREPARATION:
STAINED WITH 'SOLOID MICROSCOPK STAINS
' M agnificaiinn WOO diamettrs*
\VK!.I.< n\H I'HYMul.llCilrAI. HI >l Aid H I.AIIDKATDKIKS
antitoxin given and the frequency of eruption was noted, but in one case, where antitoxins from two different sources Diffeieilt were injected at the same time, two separate antitoxin rashes antitoxin were observed : the first occurring ten days, and the second fourteen days, after the giving of the antitoxins. No special sources of antitoxin were found to cause a preponderating number of eruptions, and the eruptions occurred through- out the two years I was working with diphtheria.
"Skin eruptions appeared in about a fourth of the cases. The period of onset was usually during the second week after the giving of the- antitoxin The eruption met with was not so peculiar as to be pathognomonic, but was sufficiently marked, especially in relation to the general symptoms, as to constitute a distinct type.
"There may be a little desquamation after severe and prolonged erythemata, but there is rarely any confusion between true scarlet fever occurring in the course of diphtheria and eruptions produced by antitoxin.
"The general symptoms, beyond a rise of temperature of some 5 !•". and its accompanying malaise, are not marked. I'ains in the joints have been frequently described, but were not observed in one of these 500 cases. This result may ha\e been due to the cases being chiefly among R'1*- »' children. The onlv marked case in which pain \\as present was that of a girl of I j, who had trontal headache and lumbar pain extending down the thighs She had a marginatr rrvthematous eruption, and the temperature rose to loi !•'
" Transient early ervthematou^ blu^he-.and al->o urticaria. often occur soon after the injection ol antitoxin, but these may be generally considered to be ol traumatic origin, and not to be related to any specihc property of the antitoxin The area of skin, before injection, was sterilised with soap and carbolic lotion, and the injection syringe was boiled before each injection. No abscess at the scat of injection occurred.
" The occurrence ot an antitoxin eruption during the course of a case of diphtheria did not appear to influence the
WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
prognosis seriously, though it cannot but be held that any febrile disturbance of the heart would tend to have a harmful effect. No case, however, \vas observed where fatal heart-failure was precipitated by the occurrence of an antitoxin eruption."
A long experience of reports received at the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories, leads to the con- clusion that idiosyncrasy of the patient is more responsible for the varying severity of the eruption and other symptoms attributable to serum than the use of serum from different horses.
Several observers have found the administration of calcium salts efficacious in preventing or dispelling serum-rashes.
An interesting light has in recent years been thrown on the susceptibility of some patients to the toxic action of serum, by the observation that the injection of a small quantity of horse-serum into an animal, renders it liable to fatal intoxication by a large dose given upwards of ten days later. Goodall * has shown that an injection of serum may render a patient liable to severe constitutional effects when another injection is given even two years later ; and inter- esting cases are on record in which patients have had progressively more severe symptoms as a result of three or more successive injections of serum separated by intervals of years. It must be borne in mind, however, that cases of natural abnormal susceptibility to other substances are not uncommon. Eggs, strawberries, shell-fish, etc., produce in certain individuals, when taken in comparatively minute quantities, symptoms very similar to the serum rashes.
The administration of the large doses of diphtheria antitoxin, which most authorities now advocate, is much facilitated by reducing the volume containing the requisite number of units. Formerly this was only made possible by the chance discovery of a horse which responded well to the immunising injections and yielded a natural serum of high potency. During the last few years, however, methods of
* Journal of Hygiene, 1907 200
WKI.I.tOMK PHYSIOLOGICAL KKSKARCH LABORATOKIES
separation of the antitoxin by salt-precipitation have been developed, which render it possible to get high unit value in small volume and at the same time to eliminate those proteins of the serum which, though they have no antitoxic value, are at least equally responsible with the antitoxin- bearing fraction for the incidental toxic symptoms which serum produces in susceptible patients. Such concentrated solutions of the antitoxic globulins have been reported in practice to cause a smaller percentage of rashes and other symptoms, and those of a milder type, than are produced by equivalent injections of untreated serum.
1 Wellcome ' Brand Concentrated Diphtheria Antitoxin is prepared by such a method of salt-precipitation and fracticn- ation the final product containing 1000 antitoxic units in i c.c. or less.
A N T I V II N H N H
This scrum continues to maintain its claim to be a trust- worthy remedy for snake-bite, if injected in large quantity, not later than three or (Our hours after the bite. A case micctun reported in the J.ancit of January 5, i<)oi. illustrates the efficiency of Iresh antivenom serum, even alter the appear- ance of general symptoms, and in the absence of any local treatment except sucking the wound. The serum was injected into each rlank, about 3^ hours after the bite.
'Wellcome' Brand Anti-venom Serum is standardised against the venom of the cobra and Russell viper (Daboia), and is the result of immunising horses against these venoms.
The surgical treatment of snake-bite is very important, anil depends upon the fact that "it is possible, after even half an Sur({icai hour or more from the time of the bite, a considerable treatment portion of the venom may still be unabsorbed at the site of the injection, and so may still be destroyed" by suitable means.*
The first thing to do in every case where the position of the bite makes it possible, is to place a ligature (rope, cord
•Lancet. I-Yl>niary 6. 1'KU. /•,!£, .i?s
\VKI.I.OOME PHYSIOLOGICAL KKSKAKCH I.AIIOK ATOKIKS
or handkerchief) round the limb between the wound made by the fangs of the snake and the body, and wash the wound thoroughly, encouraging it to bleed.
The wound should then at once be bathed with a fresh solution of chloride of lime (1/60 in distilled water), or with a i per cent, solution of chloride of gold, with the object of destroying in sifn any venom which may remain unabsorbed (Calmette, Institut Pasteur de Lille).
Or a small incision may be made through the wound, and pure crystals of permanganate of potassium, moistened with a little water, rubbed into it. (Captain L. Rogers, I. M. S., quoting Brunton, Fayrer and others.*')
The successful carrying-out of either of these procedures depends upon an intelligent appreciation of the exact position of the poison, which may be indicated by a local extravasation of blood-stained serum.
The following important considerations should be specially noted : —
In severe cases, and in others where some time (two or three hours) has elapsed after the bite, the serum should, if possible, be injected intravenously.
The dose should not be less than 10 c.c., whether injected subcutaneously or intravenously. The snake-bite should be very carefully cleansed and disinfected before injecting the serum.
" Artificial respiration may ... be of great value while medical aid or antivenene is being sent for. . . ." |
A N T I - T E T A N U S SERUM
This serum, like anti-diphtheria serum, is antitoxic in its action. Although it may be stated that some cases of this disease have been distinctly benefited by its administration, in many others the serurn lias failed. A consideration of the nature of the disease shows why this is so, and why, even more than in diphtheria, it is necessary to commence the treatment at (lie earliest possible moment.
* Lancet, February f>. 1904, page 354. i Lancet, February 6. 190 1. page 35_'.
Tetanus is a disease caused by the action of the toxin of the bacillus tetani upon the central nervous system ; the toxin, as in the case of diphtheria, beins,' produced in some local lesion, the seat of the growth and multiplication of the specific organisms. In tetanus, the toxin makes its way to the motor ^an^lion cells, partly by way of the nerves in connection with the affected part, and partly by way of the blood.
Unfortunately, the convulsive sta;,'e of tetanus is an indication not ot the commencement of the disease, as is the appearance of a membrane in diphtheria, but of a comparatively advanced sta^e of the disease, and of the occurrence of serious d linage to the nervous system. The remedy should therefore be administered immediately on the manifestation of any distinct symptoms, possibly tetanic, such as difficulty in opening the mouth, stiffness in the neck, symPtomso1 or the onset, some days alter the accident and without obvious cause, of an acute pain at the point of injury : and in view of the fact that the tetanus bacillus is localised and restricted to the seat of infection, attention is called to the advantage, in cases of punctured wounds, of excising freely and thoroughly the tissues around. The curative dose ol anti-tetanus serum may vary Irom 50 c.c. to 100 c.c., in one dose or more. but. as a prophylactic in the treatment ol wounds contaminated with dust, dirt, soil, etc., a smaller dose ol 10 c.c. is said to be sufficient This protection, however, does not persist longer than five or si\ weeks. It should be remembered, in considering doses, that it is »<>••<• of tin- impossible at present to state definitely the quantity of serum necessary to meet a .yiven case, for so much depends on the seventy of the attack, and the statue at which treatment is be^uii. It is, therefore, better to ."ive a lar^e dose at the commencement. The old medicinal treatment should not be neglected.
I he records of <)S cases treated bv serum weie collected by Weischer.* ( )l these. .) t died, the mortality per cent thus bein^ .)lS
WELI.COMK PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
The serum has been injected directly into the substance of the brain with success, and it has been claimed that this method gives the best results. A full account of this, giving details of the operation, may be found in the medical papers.*
Whilst, as a curative agent, the serum has thus proved a relative failure, it has proved a most valuable prophy- lactic in the case of wounds infected with soil in districts where tetanus abounds.
BACTERICIDAL SERA
Anti-streptococcus Serum. — The disappointing results which were obtained in many cases in the early days of the preparation of anti-streptococcus serum were doubtless due in part to the absence, at the time, of any adequate classification of the streptococci, with the result that a serum prepared against one strain of streptococcus was tried for a wide range of different infections, which would now be recognised as due to specifically distinct organisms.
Polyvalent Anti-streptococcus Sera. — A prolonged and serious attempt has been made in conjunction with clinical observation and laboratory tests to obtain specific polyvalent anti-streptococcus sera. Cultures were obtained from as many cases as possible of a particular disease, taken from such situations and under such precautions as to make it probable that the organisms were causally associated with the disease. The following are details of the origin of the organisms used in producing some of the 'Wellcome' Sera: —
Anti-streptococcus Serum (Puerperal Fever). — Cultures from 26 cases, mostly fatal, obtained from the uterus or the spleen.
Anti-streptococcus Serum (Erysipelas).— Cultures from 3 cases.
Anti-streptococcus Serum (Scarlet Fever). — Cultures from 9 cases, several of which were fatal, obtained from the blood, the spleen and the knee-joint.
• firitish Medical Journal, January 7, 1899 204
\VKI.I. (OMK PHYSIOLOGICAL KKSKARCH LABORATORIES
Anti-streptococcus Serum, Rheumatism (Micrococcus Rheumaticus).— Cultures from 6 cases, obtained from the knee- or shoulder-joint.
Anti-streptococcus Serum, Polyvalent. — The horses are immunised against all the strains mentioned above, and, in addition, with strains obtained from 2 cases of Angina Ludovici and 6 cases of Ulcerative Endocarditis (from blood cultures obtained during life), and with 10 strains of Streptococcus Pyogenes from Pyaemia, Mammary Abscess, Acute Peritonitis, Suppurative Arthritis, etc.
This serum has found more extended application than any of those prepared from organisms associated with a particular clinical picture, and the recorded cases in which its use has been attended with beneficial results are now too numerous to leave much room for doubt of its efficacy in streptococcal infections.
A point to be specially borne in mind is that all cases of puerperal fever, spreading inflammation of the skin or subcutaneous tissues, are not necessarily associated with the presence of actively growing streptococci. They may be due Scptica?mi,
to some quite different organism, and so would not be due to var ,.-.,... f ,„ , micro-orgfl
benefited by injections of anti-streptococcus serum rhe
importance of ascertaining by bacteriological tests the kind of organism at work in all such cases is thus manifest.
Other anti-bacterial sera which have been prepared at the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories arc :
Anti-coli Serum. In the preparation of this, 20 strains of Hacillns «>// are used, obtained mostly from the peritoneum in fatal peritonitis and the uterus in puerperal fever due to B. coli.
Anti-staphylococcus Serum. This is also a polyvalent serum, cultures of staphylococcus albus. aureus, citreus and h.T'morrhagicus, 15 in all, and all obtained from pus, being used in its preparation.
Anti-dysentery Serum.- Prepared by injecting killed cultures of Shiga's, Flexner's and Kruse's bacilli, (> strains in all being used.
WK1.I.COMK I'HVSIOLOGICAI. RESKARCH LAIIORATORIKS
Anti-gonococcus Serum. — This is prepared from strains obtained from ureihritis and gonorrhoeal conjunctivitis, and is described as having given good results in the acute stage of the disease.
Anti-meningococcus Serum. — Four strains of llu: diplococcus of Weichselbaum are used.
BACTERIAL VACCINES
While it seems clear that, even with the methods of preparation which have as yet been fully tried, the anti- bacterial sera have a certain value, it cannot be denied that Phagocyte they have not, in the same degree as the antitoxic sera,
activity fulfilled the early hopes of their efficacy. Meanwhile, the
technique for estimating phagocytic activity introduced by Leishman, and its application and development at the hands of Wright and others, has given a noteworthy impetus to the method of actively immunising the patient against t he- organism attacking him, by injection of very small doses of a killed culture of the same organism. The new method of controlling the effect of an injection, by determination of the " opsonic index," has not only given a stimulus to The opsonic the extensive use of vaccination with killed cultures in
various chronic suppurations and localised inflammations ; it has also, to a remarkable extent, reinstated in the confidence of the medical world the tuberculin (T. R.) of Koch, which had been brought into discredit by the unfavourable results of its early application, in doses which, as the new methods of control indicate, were much too large for safety or benefit. While Wright's opsonic method has undoubtedly been largely responsible for the revival of interest in specific inoculation and the widening of its scope, its complicated and specialised technique has probably had a deterrent effect on the spread of the method in general practice. At present there is a perceptible tendency to doubt the need for the elaborate and difficult opsonic determination, and its adequacy as a control. If this
\VKI.I.rOMK PHYSIOLOGICAL KKSKAKCH LABORATORIES
movement continues in the direction of reliance on constitutional indications or a more simple phagocytic determination, it will undoubtedly lead to a wider use of these so-called bacterial vaccines.
Vaccines are usually prepared by suspending in saline solution organisms grown on nutrient agar or some such solid medium, and killing them by heat. They are standard- ised according to the number of micro-organisms present in i c.c. The counting may be done by the absolute method, i.e. direct counting of a known dilution in a Thoma-Zeiss Metllods of
standardisation
apparatus by a method similar to that employed in enumera- tion of red blood corpuscles. This is a tedious process, and it is more usual to employ Wright's or Harrison's method Wright's method is to mix the vaccine with fresh blood in kno\\n proportion, make a film of the mixture, stain and then compare the total number of red corpuscles in a large number of fields with the number of organisms in the same fields. If the number of red blood corpuscles per cubic mm , the proportion by volume of blood and vaccine, and the ratio of the counts are known, it is a matter of simple calculation to determine the number of organisms present per c.c. of vaccine. The objection to this method is that many organisms may be dissolved by the bacterio- lysins of the blood plasma. To overcome this difficulty, Harrison washes the blood corpuscles by several centrifugal- isations with titrated saline to remove all the blood fluids. determines, bv a Thoma-Zeiss count, (he number ot tells
Counting
present in the suspension of red corpuscles in saline, and ,,„, hlood
then proceeds as in Wright's method It is of considerable <clls value to control the counts by means of the dried weight. which, for each organism used, bears a fairly constant ratio to the bacterial count
Typhoid Vaccine is used only as a prophylactic, and rot at present as a curative, agent in typhoid fever. To see lire immunisation, two doses are given The first dose consists ot 05 C.C. of vaccine, equivalent to 500 million bacteria The second, given ten days later, is i c.c . equivalent to looo million bacteria.
WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
After the first, and, to a much smaller degree, after the second inoculation, local and constitutional symptoms may occur. The local symptoms, present at the site of injection, are redness, swelling, pain and tenderness.
The following vaccines have been successfully employed therapeutically : —
Staphylococcus Vaccine, Mixed
Containing Staphylococcus pyogenes auretis, albits and cilreiis.
This vaccine may be employed in various staphylococcic infections, such as pustular acne, furunculosis, carbuncle, sycosis, blepharitis and localised abscesses.
The initial dose is usually 500 million organisms. A second dose may be given in a week's time, or, if the constitutional effects of the first dose have been slight and evanescent, 1000 million organisms may be deemed necessary. Many authorities recommend the use of much smaller doses.
Staphylococcus Vaccine, Aureus
Containing Staphylococcus pyogenes atirens.
This vaccine is employed in the treatment of acne and sycosis. It should only be used when the infection has been shown to be due to Staphylococcns aiirens alone.
The dose usually employed is similar to that in the case of Staphylococcus Vaccine, Mixed.
Gonococcus Vaccine
Containing Micrococcns gonorrhaa.
This vaccine may be used in the chronic and later stages of gonorrhosa, in gleet and gonorrhoeal prostatitis, and also in such generalised infections as gonorrhccal arthritis. Good results have also been obtained in the acute stages of gonorrhrea.
The initial dose recommended by different authorities varies considerably: in some cases only 5 million organisms, and in other cases as many as 250 million are injected as an initial dose. Subsequent dosage is regulated by the constitutional effect.
208
WKI.I.OIMK rnvsioi.or.irAi. KKSKAK< H I.AIIOKATOKIKS
Streptococcus Vaccine, Polyvalent
Containing over 60 strains of streptococci obtained from the following sources : erysipelas, scarlet fever, puerperal fever, rheumatic fever, septicaemia, angina, pneumonia and ulcerative endocarditis.
This vaccine may be used in all forms of localised or generalised streptococcic infection, e.g. abscesses, pyaemia, septic;rmia. otitis media, endocarditis, peritonitis of streptococcic origin, puerperal septica-mia, and erysipelas.
The do>e is from 20-50 million organisms, and it may be administered at intervals of from one to throe weeks, according to the reaction produced.
Bacillus Coli Vaccine
Containing the Bacillus coli coniinnnis.
This vaccine may be used in all forms of coli infection of the bladder, ureters, kidneys ami peritoneum : in mucous colitis, and in coli infection of the uterus and gall bladder.
The initial dose is 5-15 million organisms, which may be repeated, or increased, according to the reaction produced, from 2 to 10 days later.
Pneumococcus Vaccine
Containing various strains of the Diplococctis pnen>n,>n:,c ( \\',-iiliselban>ii i.
This vaccine is used in pneumococcic infections of all kinds, pneumonia, empvrma, pericarditis, endocarditis, septic.-rmia, meningitis and pneumococcic infections of j< >mt^.
The usual dose is 10 50 million organisms, which may he repeated, according to the reaction produced, every 36 or .p hours.
Acne Vaccines
Recent research has shown that acne is primarily due to infection by a micro-organism known as the Acne Bacillus In the early stage, when the eruption is papular in character, a bacteriological examination of the comedones or "black- heads" shows a pure acne bacillus infection. Later on. infection by the staphvlococcus occurs. gi\ ing rise to the acne pustule.
Reaction to mallein of a healthy horse immunised against
Diphtheria toxin. The horse was subsequently killed
and the absence of glanders continued by post-mortem
examination
|
Tern,,. |
Al time of |
After 9 |
After 12 |
After '5 |
After 18 |
Aftt-r |
2nd |
3rd 4tli |
|
"t'i'.m |
||||||||
|
Q I |
— O— |
1 |
||||||
|
104 |
l |
/ |
|! |
|||||
|
1 |
||||||||
|
,' |
--1 4 |
|||||||
|
100 |
-£- |
|
— |
|
, |
|
.5 T ^ _5__|- |
|
|
99 |
||||||||
|
Temperature |
9T8 |
11.4'J |
l< 4-2 |
•04-0 |
,,4, | |
M3C |
• |
|
|
Swelling |
sharply defined |
In- iil(? rapidly |
Very larye |
Reaction to mnllcinof a filanderecl horse •210
A vaccine is chosen lor treatment, therefore, in accord- ance with the stage and nature of the infection. Acne Bacillus Vaccine
This is intended for the treatment of the papular form of acne. In this form comedones are abundant, but suppu- ration has not yet occurred. There is no febrile reaction after the injection of this vaccine, but if the dose be excessive, a prolonged negative phase results, in which a fresh crop of acne papules appears. However, these papules disappear by subsequent injections.
Acne Vaccine, Mixed
This is for use in ordinary cases of arm-, usually characterised by the presence of comedones and pustules. A bacteriological examination of such cases shows a mixed infection by the acne bacillus and the staphylococcus (aurens, albns or citrciis}.
DOSK. The initial dose is 4 or 5 million acne bacilli with or without staphvlococci, according to the nature of the case. Subsequent dosage is regulated by the local effect. Larger doses than 10 million acne bacilli can rarely be tolerated.
In the pustular and liiruncular forms of acne without comedones, Staphylococcus Vaccine, Mixed, is used Tubercle Vaccine (Human or Bovine)
An emulsion of killed tubercle bacilli of human or bovine origin.
Treatment should commence with a dose of I r c. of emulsion containing o oooi ingm. dried tubercle bacilli, increasing to 00005 mgm.. or even more, according to the indications of the opsouic index, or the clinical symptoms.
MAM. li IN AND 11 lUiRCl'l. IN
Mallein is a bacterial liltrate used in the diagnosis of glanders. It is prepared trom cultures ot the organism causing glanders (llttcillns niallih \\hich have been grown for about six weeks on bouillon containing glycerin, sterilised by heat and filtered A small quantity ol some antiseptic.
WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
such as phenol, is added as a preservative. When injected under the skin of a normal horse, mallein produces little or no apparent effect, but, should the horse be suffering from glanders, a large swelling forms at the seat of injection, and this is usually accompanied by a rise in the temperature of the animal.
Recent investigation at these Laboratories* has shown that many non-glandered horses, if they have been immunised against other bacterial products, give a reaction to mallein in some ways similar to that given by glandered animals.
The size of the swelling produced in such cases appears to depend on the degree of immunity. Thus, in the case of a group of horses injected with diphtheria toxin, 6 of which were highly immune, all gave large local reactions ; out of 7 moderately immune, 4 gave large swellings ; and glandered '" 4 horses in which the serum had a low antitoxic value,
horses only small mallein reactions were produced. The local
swelling obtained in such healthy, immune horses differs very markedly from that given by the glandered animal in its rapid disappearance. Similarly, when a rise of tempera- ture is produced by mallein in a healthy horse immunised against other bacterial products, this is smaller, attains its maximum more rapidly, and is far less persistent than the febrile reaction to mallein of a horse suffering from glanders. These differences are illustrated in the charts on page 210.
Similar results were obtained upon immune horses with tuberculin and several other bacterial products, such as those obtained from Streptococcus, Bacillus coli coniinnnis. Bacillus typhosits.
Tuberculin ("Old" Tuberculin). — Tuberculin for veterinary diagnostic use is prepared from bacillus tuber- culosis by a method similar to that used in the production
Diagnosis of ,, . , , •,, ,, • ,. , ,• • c \
tubeicuiosis of mallein from bacillus mallei. For the diagnosis ol tuber-
culosis in cattle, the temperature reaction is of much greater importance than the local effect of the injection. A rise in temperature of 2-5° I-". within 12 to 15 hours of
* Sihhnersen and Glenny, Journal of Hygiene, 1908 212
WKLLCOMK PHYSIOLOGICAL KK^KARCH LA HORATOKIKS
injection is usually considered sufficient to warrant the condemnation of an animal.
Ophthalmo-Tuberculin Reaction. — The reaction is produced by purified tuberculin obtained by the alcoholic precipitation of ordinary tuberculin. If a small quantity of the precipitate, dissolved in water, be applied to the P""*"*1
. , . . . tuberculn
surface of the conjunctiva, a marked reaction results in the case of tuberculous individuals. Cases have been reported where some inconvenience due to persistence of inflammation lias arisen as a consequence of the application to the eye. Cases have also been reported in which reactions have been obtained in non-tuberculous subjects.
Other modifications are the reaction of von I'irquet, in which the "old'' tuberculin, applied to lightly scarified areas of skin, produces, in a large proportion of tuberculous subjects, inflamed papules persisting for some days, and Moro's modification, in which an ointment containing tuberculin is rubbed on the skin, with a similar result.
THE SERUM DIAGNOSIS OF TYPHOID l: II V E R
A series of investigations, made in different countries, has brought to light the fact that the serum of an animal rendered highly immune to the typhoid bacillus has a marked action upon the organisms, causing them to lose their motility. and to become collected together into little masses, which rapidly sink to the bottom of the tube containing the mixture of serum and culture.
Following this, the fact that the serum of patients suffering from typhoid fever usually gives a reaction with cultures of the typhoid bacillus, similar to, though less marked than, that given by the serum of animals immunised Typhoid by the bacillus, has Iteen confirmed by a host of observers This affords evidence of great weight that the bacillus !•% really the cause of typhoid fever, and it also affords a valuable method of diagnosis.
In the serum of those suffering from typhoid fever, the reaction is said to have been observed as earlv as the fourth
<lav. Usually it appears about the beginning of the second week, hut it is undoubtedly often absent at this period. According to Courmont,* it is in cases which are excep- tional, either on account of complications or severity, or because they are extremely mild, that the agglutinative power is feeble or delayed : in simple cases of moderate severity it appears constantly about the sixth or seventh <lay, is active, in dilution of i in 100, about the tenth day. undergoes a more or less rapid rise towards the end of the febrile period (critical rise), and then disappears more or less rapidly. The persistence of the agglutinative power after recovery appears to be very variable, in some cases rapidly disappearing, in others remaining for years. The blood of those who are not suffering from typhoid lever, and from whom no history of this disease can be obtained, occasionally gives a reaction in dilution of i in 10, or even t in jo (the dilutions recommended by \Vidal). Hut these instances do not appear to be sulliciently numerous to impair seriously the value of the test It is thought desirable, however, to use higher dilutions. \i/ , i in 50
From the considerations briefly set out above, it seems permissible to conclude that (i) A negative reaction is o! little value in the early days of the fever. It is of greater importance in proportion to the lateness of the period at which it is observed. It can, however, never absolutely exclude typhoid fever. |2) A positive reaction, on the other hand, except with dilutions of less than i in 40, is sound evidence of typhoid fever, present or past The latter can be excluded it several quantitative tests have been made at different periods, and decided changes in the agglutinative power observed
Recently an ophthalmo-reaction in typhoid lev er, produced by a special culture filtrate and resembling the tuberculo ophthalmic reaction, has been described by Chautemessr. and some promising results of a similar nature have been obtained by the use of a typhoid endotoxin prepared at the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories
' Kertic ,/< M,\i,\i'i,. (VtoK-t. IS-r
216
\VKI.I.«)MK PHYSIOLOGICAL RKSKARCH LABORATORIES
ORGAN O-THERAl'Y
The brilliant success which attended the introduction of the treatment of myxcrdema by administration of thyroid substance, led to the investigation of the effects of other ductless glands. In no other case has a similar success attended similar methods*; but the attention directed to these organs has resulted in the discovery of marked physiological actions, of great therapeutic importance, possessed by some of them. It has been shown, by Schiller and others, that the posterior or infundibular lobe of the pituitary gland contains an active principle — as yet of unknown nature — the effects of which are not less striking than those of the more familiar active principle of the supra-renal medulla. The effects of the pituitary extract include a pronounced rise of blood-pressure chiefly due to arterial constriction, the heart-beat being somewhat slower, and more powerful: intense and prolonged contraction of tin- uterus,* and profuse secretion of urine. All these effects have already found important therapeutic applications, the clinical value of the extract having been demonstrated by Blair Bell '
ORGANIC AMIMiS • M i;.\\ i s i N \\'
' Hemisine ' is a name given to ihe active principle occurring in the medulla of the supra-renal gland and other smaller masses of paraganglionic tissue related to sympa- thetic ganglia. Its action likewise is closely connected \\ith the sympathetic nervous system, intravenous injection producing all the effects which are elicited by stimulation of the nerve fibres of the true sympathetic system. Prominent among these is a great rise of blood-pressure, produced by constriction of peripheral arteries and augmentation of the heart's activity. So active is 'Hemisine' in this direction, that a dose ot as little as o oooooi gramme will produce a perceptible rise of blood-pressure. Contraction of the uterus
4 P.ilf. /Vi.'-C/ic-);iiV<i/7<>MMi<i/. imy)
I Blair Bell, lititifh .V.-./iV.i/./.'iu.i.i/. 1'W
WELL-COME PHYSIOLOGICAL KKM AKlH LABORATORIES
is also caused in those animals in which the sympathetic nerve-supply to that organ is motor in function. These effects are illustrated by tracings (see page 220).
1 TYRAMINE'
' Tyramine' is a name which has been given to the organic- base Para-hydroxyphenylethylamine (HO-<H> CH2-CH._,- isoiated NH2). It has been recognised now for some years, having
at w. P. R. L. been first pointed out by Abelous and his associates, that extracts of putrefied meat contain substances which, when injected into the circulation, produce an effect on the blood- pressure reminiscent of that produced by supra -renal extracts. The same phenomenon was encountered by Dixon and Taylor, who found that certain extracts of human placenta caused a rise of blood-pressure and contraction of the uterus, it being subsequently demonstrated by Rosen- heim that a certain amount of putrefaction of the placenta was necessary for the development of this activity. The substances concerned in this action have recently been isolated at the Wellcome Physiological Research Labora- tories, and identified as /so-amylamine, phenylethylamine, and ^>-hydroxyphenylethylamine.* The action of these substances has been found to be similar in most respects to that of the supra-renal active principle, but weaker and more prolonged.!
Of the three, />-hydroxyphenylethylamine is much the most •Tyramine' the active, being also the most nearly related in chemical most active structure to the supra-renal principle. Its relatively weak
and prolonged action, as compared with the latter, enables it to be absorbed from the alimentary canal or the sub- cutaneous tissues, so that its general constitutional effects, rise of blood-pressure, increased vigour of the heart's action, and contraction of the uterus, can be produced by administering it by the mouth or hypodermically. The study of this substance has recently gained greatly in interest by the discovery that it is present in watery extracts of
* Harrier and VValpole. Journal of ]'hyswl<>xy, xxxviii.'p. .W. I'lOO. t Dale ami Daon, Journal of Physiology, xxxix, p. _'5. 1'Xl'i.
WKI.I.COMK I'llYMol .111, ll \l. KKM-.AKC II I. AHOKATOK 1 1 >
ergot, and is chiefly responsible tor the well-known effects of such extracts on the blood-pressure and the uterus.*
Several methods of preparing this base synthetically have been worked out at the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories ' and it will probably find wide therapeutic use.
Another aniine derived from an amino-acid by splitting off carbon dioxide is M-iminazolylethylamine, which can be obtained from histidine by the action of certain putrefactive bacteria (Ackermann) or by chemical agents.
This base has an action of quite a different type, being a very potent stimulant ot plain muscle, conspicuously of uterine muscle, irrespective of innervation. In carnivora. however, it causes a large fall of systemic pressure by arterial dilatation, its action in this and other respects being markedly similar to that of various depressor organ extracts of certain commercial preparations of " peptone " (Dale and Laidlow). Harger and l>ale identified as this base the constituent of ergot extracts chiefly concerned in the very powerful action on the isolated uterus described by Kebrer.
f: R(i OTOX 1 N I. AND 'I: KM 'TIN1
Many substances which have in the past been described as active principles ot ergot, and which undoubtedly showed physiological activity, have not possessed the characteristics Aniv ot pure chemical substances Such were the sphacelinic £""rc acid and cornutin of Kobert, and the chrysotoxin, secalin- to\m, and sphacelotoxin of Jacobj. On the other hand, the alkaloid which Tanret isolated in an undoubtedly pure and crystalline form, and named " eigotinine," was found by several observers to possess practically no pharmacological ni(. action, although there was some clinical evidence ot its aikai activity. Kecent work in the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories! has cleared up this anomaly by
' Bawr and I >alc. y,>ini;,i/ ,<t l'li\ .sic.'i^ \ . I1';:", \\xvm. p. " ,1'ioc. I'liys. Soc.l
t Banter. Journal of the Chemical Society, xi-v. ].. ] u;,. l<>o<>.
iOale, _/<>«;•»!. <>/ I'hysio!- xxxiv. p. K,.i, l<iO(> ; Har.m-r and I'arr, ,/OUMI. Clifiii. .Sci., xci. p. .vi 7. 1'XC: Harder and H.ilr. !lw-('hiin. J.nirn. ii. p. JIO. l«H>r.
'.'lit
s*
-ft.
:
Un.tlOMi: I'HYMOUK.K At. RKSKAKCH LABORATORIES
demonstrating the presence in ergot of the alkaloid ergotoxine, which is closely related chemically to ergotinine, being a hydrate of the latter and easily produced from it, but differing from it in being intensely active physiologically. Subsequent investigations have shown that ergotoxine has acid as well as basic properties. Unlike ergotinine, therefore, it is soluble in dilate alkali, and also forms organic esters, of which the ethyl- and methyl-esters have been prepared.
These facts throw further light on the occurrence ( f ergotoxine as the true active constituent of various preparations both of basic and acidic nature \\hich have, from time to time, been described as "active principles" of ergot. Ergotoxine, though itself amorphous, forms crystalline salts, and has accordingly been prepared in a chemically pure condition. Its physiological action is characteristic, consisting ot a stimulant action on plain muscular organs, and in particular on the arteries and the uterus. When a large dose is given, a secondary paralytic ctlect on the motor functions of the true sympathetic nervous system is produced. As a result, the injection of 'Hemisme,' or stimuli applied to the sympathetic nerves concerned, now cause a tall ol blood-pressure and relaxation ot the uterus in place of the previous rise of pressure and contraction. This secondary ai tion atlon's a convenient means of recognising the presence ot the active alkaloid, and estimating the (jiiautitv present m anv specimen or preparation ot ergot. This physiological method of assav is the more valuable in that no satisfactory chemical methc d is yet available tor estimating ergotoxine.
While ergotoxine is tin- only active principle identified a^ specific and peculiar to ergot, it does not account lor the whole of the activity of all ergot preparations. It was pointed out by I larger and I>ale, in i<i< 7. that lertain extracts ol ergot, and in particular the othcial watery preparations, possess a pharmacological activity too great to be attributed to the tracts of ergotoxine which :hey contain.
Two distinct types of activity, neitlier due to ergotoxine, can be recognised in such extracts, i.e. ( i ) a pressor effect due to a principle which, in general features of its action, resembles the supra-renal active principle ; this has been shown to be due chiefly to the presence of />-hydroxyphenyl- ethylamine ; and (2) an intense stimulating action on the plain muscle of the uterus, independent of its reaction to ner\e impulses: this lias been traced to the presence ol rt-iminazolylethvlamine (P>argerand Dale). It is quite in accord with what might be expected on theoretical grounds, that the ferments of a fungus like ergot should, equally ,.-01,uen,s ,11U with putrefactive bacteria, have the power of producing putrefactive these bases from the ammo-acids, derived, in this instance, from the proteins of the rye-grain. The presence of varying amounts of /> hydroxv phenylethylamine, together with small amounts of ergotoxine, accounts tor the whole of that action of ergot extracts on the blood-pressure, which has been widely recommended as a basis of standardisation
' Krnutin ' is a fluid preparation which contain-- these active principles of ergot in a definite and uniform proportion, unmixed with depressant and harmful impurities
I'll YS 10 l.( ><• I (. A I SI A M> A Rl> I S A I I ON No insistence is needed on the desirability ol a uniform standard of activity in all drugs, and especially in such as contain principles of a highly active and toxic nature
In the case ol some, such as cinchona or belladonna, such a standardisation is easily carried out by chemical means
There are, however, other drugs in which the active principles are of such a nature that attempts at chemical estimation are only misleading, oven though the active principles aie recognised and something Known i>l then chemical nature Typical instances of such drugs an- those of the group including digitalis, siroplianthns and squill. In the case of digitalis, research in these I .aboratm ies' has shown the futility of the chemical methods suggested and the adequacy of an estimation based on th:- etlect ol
WKI.LCOMK PHYSIOLOGICAL KKSKAKCH I.ABORATORIKS
the drug on the frog's heart. The conclusions readied apply, with little modification, to strophanthus and squill, and preparations of all these drugs are now standardised by this method in these Laboratories.
Cannabis indica is a notoriously variable drug, but, by observing the nervous symptoms produced by a given dose in a dog or cat, a fair estimate of the activity of any specimen can be made.
Ergot is another drug in which the amount of the active The active principles varies to a very marked degree. The isolation of
'ergot' 6 ergotoxine and the other active principles, and the demon-
stration of the presence of ^-hydroxyphenylethylamine in ergot extracts, may eventually lead to the development of a satisfactory chemical method of determining its activity. Hitherto, however, physiological methods, based on the action of ergotoxine and of the amines described above, have proved a far surer guide than any chemical assay.
The purity of a specimen of ' Hemisine ' can be much more satisfactorily determined by comparison of its activity to that of a standard specimen than by chemical tests. The method illustrated, in which the amount of a given standardisation specimen is determined, which produces a rise of blood- of 'Hemisine' pressure equal to that given by a given dose of a specially- prepared pure standard sample, is found in these Laboratories to be workable to an accuracy of about 5 per cent., and is used in standardising all supra-renal preparations.
Kymograph tracings are reproduced on pages 220 and 222. They represent the results of pharmacological research and some methods of physiological standardisation in use at the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories.
DESCRIPTION OF TRACINGS
(i) ' Hemisine.' The lines of tracing, from above down- wards, are : —
I. Plethysmographic tracing of heart volume. II. Manometer-record of blood-pressure from the
carotid artery. III. Signal line, showing time of injection.
WKI.I.CiiMI PHYSIOLOGICAL KKSKAKr H I. Al«)l< ATOKIKS
At H, o'oooi gm. of ' Hemisine ' was injected into the jugular vein, causing a large rise of blood-pressure, and quickening and strengthening the heart-heat.
(2) ' Hemisine'
(</) Effect of ' Hemisine ' on the blood-pressure ol a decerebrate cat : —
Lines of tracing
(1) Blood-pressure
(2) Signal line marking the point of injection
(3) Time-clock marking every 10 seconds.
(b) Method of standardising ' Hemisine' and other supra- renal gland preparations. Varying doses of the solu- tion to be tested are interposed between injections of 0-00002 gm. of the standard specimen of ' Hemisine.' Effects of standard doses are indicated by a X. Between the injections the recording drum is moved back so as to produce partial superposition and f aci 1 i tate com paris< >n .
(i:) Effect of 'Hemisine' on the isolated heart of a rabbit, perfused through the coronary circulation with oxygenated Ringer's solution (Locke's method). At X o' 00005 Km (>f ' Hemisine' was added to the perfusion fluid
(j) Effect of 'Hemisine' and ' Ernutin ' on the blood pressure
(</) Eftect on the blood-pressure of intravenous injection of
(A) o1 00005 gm. of ' Hemisine.' (li) 2 c.c. ' Ernutin. ' (C) 0-00005 K'm ' Hemisine
Showing the rise of blood-pressure and the subsequent reversal of the effect of ' Hemisine,' due to ergotoxine in the • Ernutin '
v> s - •-
O _ .H
U'KM.fOMK rHYMllI.or.lCAI. KKSKAUCH I. A HI >K AT OK 1 1 >
DESCRIPTION OF THH W K 1. 1. CO ,\\ I! PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
The original laboratories, established in 1894, were i
enlarged from time to time to meet the requirements ubora of constantly increasing work, until it was found necessary to acquire more commodious premises. The new laboratories were established at Brockwell Hall, Herne Hill. London (Kng.), in the early part of 1899
Brockwell Hall is an old-fashioned country mansion, standing in its own grounds. The adaptation of these premises to the requirements of research work has been carried out with the greatest care, and no pains or expense have been spared in rendering their appointments as complete as possible, so that the Institution's highly- qualified staff of research workers have full scope for their energy.
The room shown in the illustration on puge 21 j. is the principal Bacteriological Laboratory. In this laboratory
Bade i
research is carried on in bacteriology and serum-thera- |OKk-a politics, injections are made for the standardisation of sera Chemi prepared in the establishment, and the elaborate series ol sterility tests is made to which all sera are submitted before issue. On the other side of the entrance-hall is the principal Chemical Laboratory (xr«- page 2i6| devoted to research on the nature of naturally occurring substances of biological importance, and the synthesis of new compounds likely to be pharmacologically cind therapeuticallv interesting.
A small Chemical Laboratory, the Secretary's office, a dark-room for photographic work, and the Library, are also on the ground floor. The Library is well supplied with standard works of reference, both chemical and physiological, and the current scientific literature of both these subjects, as well as that of bacteriology, is well represented.
The spacious cellarage contains, in addition to compart- ments for storage of various materials, a cold chamlier.
9 ft. x 7 It. in floor area, kept constantly below free/ing point by means of an ammonia free/in;,' installation, and also an incubating room.
The Physiological Laboratories are situated on the first- floor of the building. In these rooms physiological and physiological pharmacological research, and the physiological testing Laboratories and standardising of various drugs and chemicals are carried on.
On the same floor are : -
(1) The Directors' Office.
(2) Serum Office. A small room at the head of the staircase where all the records of procedures connected with serum production are preserved in perfect order for daily work and reference.
(3) Serum Concentration Laboratories. A room paved with cement is fitted with special glass benches for the manipulation ot serum It ran be flushed all over with water to tree the air from dust, and, with the door closed, can be sterilised with formalin. This and the- adjoining laboratory are used for the processes involved in the artificial concentration of antitoxin. A special chemical laboratory is devoted to research in connection with these processes.
(4) Vaccine Laboratory. A room devoted to the preparation and standardisation ol bacterial vaccines.
(5) Serum testing room. A room set apart for making dilutions of diphtheria antitoxic serum and preparation of injections of mixed diphtheria toxin and serum used in standardising the latter for issue from the laboratories (to Burroughs Wellcome & Co.). The standard apparatus employed is never moved from this room nor used for any other purpose.
Two special laboratories are devoted to the preparation of media : one, a small pent-house, occupied entirely in Nlltli,.llt the production of test-tube media for use in the media bacteriological laboratory ; the other, a commodious well-lit outbuilding communicating with the l>oiler-house. having a floor paved with cement, and the walls enamelled
u
'- ' -• • -
OF THE I N ( lli A I I N (, C H A M H K K S
C O I. 1) S 1 (i K A C. K C H A M II I: R
\VKI.I.CilMK I'HYSIiil.oiiK \l KI-.M-:.\KrH LABOKATOR1KS
in order to facilitate cleaning. Here is made nutrient broth of various kinds on a large scale, to be used in the preparation of the various cultures and toxins for use in the stables. This laboratory is also used for the initial work upon crude animal material before it is sent to the chemical laboratory for further elaboration. Between this room and the boiler-house are two compartments, one for stores, the other to accommodate the large high -pressure steriliser which can deal with bottles, containers, etc . of large size.
The serum, after being obtained in the collection-labora- tory adjacent to the stables, is taken to a special building recently erected, where all further processes involved in separating it and measuring it into phials are now carried out. The building contains a cleaning-room for all apparatus used in the manipulations ; a sterilising-room, for the heat- Germ-pi
filters
sterilisation of the same ; and a phial-room, where the phials, in which the sera and vaccines are issued, are cleaned and prepared for sterilisation, and subjected to scrutiny after filling. The rest of this building is completely closed from the outside air, and ventilated by an ample current supplied by a large motor fan, placed outside in a special building The air is passed through :i germ-proof filter before it enters the main building : the rooms are constructed with- out angles or corners, rind can be sterilised nightly with formaldehyde vapour, uhich the sterile, fan-driven air removes again in a lew minutes This sterile section includes
(1) A store-room in \\hich the sera and vaccines are kept, ready to be run into the issuing-phials
(2) Duplicate rooms in which the process of separating the serum from the clot is carried out One of these rooms is always lieing sterilised while the other is in use These rooms open out of the serum store, and can only be approached through it A small chamber, in \\hich the serum is mechanically driven through germ-proof filters into the storage bottles, also opens out of the store- room
ONK OK THK ROOMS IN UHICH PHIAL s AKI I-'ii. i. KI>
SFKCIAI. I.AMOKAIOKY KOK THK C <> 1. 1. K< TION OF Bi.oon
AND SK I1 A RATIOS OF SKUA
\VKI.I.roMK I'HYSIiil.'
( j) A room in wliich the serum is tilled into phials. This is approached from the phial-preparing room by means of a double air-lock. Before entering the room the assistants must assume sterilised overalls, caps and goloshes, and sterilise the hands. Into this room the serum passes by tubes from the store-room, and each phial, as soon as filled, is passed under a glass screen to another assistant, who immediately seals the neck at the blow-pipe.
All packing of serum is done in an adjacent, separate building, built for the purpose, and self-contained in every P*--i<ii way, which also provides amply for the storage oi the materials used.
Between the main building and the animal houses a brick building of one store}- has been erected. The one room on the ground level is specially fitted for bacteriological work, otiiei The floor is cemented, the walls tiled to a height of four ' feet, and all corners avoided by a rounding of angles. In this room manipulations are carried out connected with stock cultures, special research work, and the preparation of various vaccines. The cellarage, surrounded by a drained area, is divided into two rooms. The larger, i^ ft square, is kept at a constant temperature, ranging from 35 -40 at different levels in the room. This is used for incubation on a large scale. Alongside it is a smaller room, in which a still atmosphere affords especially suitable conditions for bacteriological operations. Recently another building, containing three laboratories, and two rooms for keeping rodents, has been erected at a distance from the other buildings, for the purpose of special bacteriological research.
Tin. S T A i ; i i •: s A \ i > o T 1 1 K R A i > i r N c r >
The stables are situated about one hundred yards from the laboratories They are lofty, well lighted and well ventilated, and are fitted with every convenience and contrivance conducive to the well-being of the horses The walls are of white gla/ed brick and cement, the floor being paved throughout with the best stable bricks
The old stables and coach-houses of the Hall have been remodelled in accord with modern views, and are now used
WKI.U OMi: I'HVSIOI.OC.ICAI. KKSKAKCH I.AIIORATOKIKS
for the testing of new horses with mallein and tuberculin
before they are admitted to one of the large stables. Near collection of
by is a special laboratory for the collection of blood and sela
separation of sera This laboratory, like the stables, has
been so built as to permit of the whole room being flushed
with water, so that sera can be manipulated under the
conditions necessary for ensuring sterility.
An entirely new system of drainage for the laboratories, stables and other premises has been carefully carried out.
The laboratories, stables, outbuildings and grounds are electrically-lit, and are all in telephonic communication. The boiler, engine and dynamo necessary for the genera- tion of the current used in the various motors on the premises are placed in brick and cement buildings adjoining the south-west side o! the Hall. Near the boiler is a large cylindrical steriliser, constructed lor a working pressure of jo Ib. The sterilisation of all large vessels containing nutritive media, etc , is effected here, as also of all vessels which have been used in the laboratories.
The grounds contain a large paddock, and also gardens for growing vegetables for the animals. A large store pHd<1' for fodder, with electrically-driven chaff-cutter, has recently been erected
T 111: ANIMAL 1 1 < > r s K s
A large annual house has been erected, which accommo- dates all the rodents required for the work of the laboratories. It contains full provision for the ellicient isolation of animals Kl|i»«-i» inoculated with living cultures. The heating and ventilation of this building have been very carefully carried out. with a view to the health and comfort of the animals
Another range of sheds contains well-drained, comfortable kennels for dogs, a stable for ijoats. and a steam heated apartment for rats, communicating \\iih a large open-air
T H I;
K VOLUTION Oi: W HA PONS i OR THI;
BATTLE OF LIFE
m
A DAI' A
About 6000 ii. < .
Adapa is the earliest known personage directly associated with medicine. He was the human incarnation of Marduk, the divine Son of Ea. and was believed to possess the spells of life and death. " Ha gave him wisdom.
So that his command was like unto the word of God. To him also he gave deep knowledge : With the healing s|«-ll of life and the spell of death he was made.'
I Translated from a Baby Ionian Tahiti)
HISTORICAL EXHIBITION
r ) }
RARE AND CURIOUS OBJECTS
RELATING TO
MEDICINE, CHEMISTRY. P H A R M A c v
AND THH A L L I i; I) SCIENCES
TO BE HELD IN LONDON, 1 9 I :<
ORGANISED BY. AND UNDER THE DIRECTION Oh
HENRY S. WELLCOME
WITH the object of stimulating the study of the great past, I have been for some time organising an Exhibition in connection with the history of medicine, chemistry, pharmacy and the allied sciences, my aim being to bring together a collection of historical objects illustrating the development of the art and science of healing, etc.. through- out the ages.
For many years I have been engaged in researches respecting the early methods employed in the healing art. both among civilised and uncivilised peoples. It has been my object in particular to trace the origin of the use ot remedial agents, and enquire why and how certain substances came to be employed in the treatment of disease.
A consideration of such questions is aluaysof interest and sometimes adds to our knowledge
I anticipate that the Exhibition \\ill reveal many fads, and will elucidate many obscure points in connection \\ith the origins of various medicines, and in respect to the history of disease. It should also bring to light many objects of historical interest hitherto knoun only to the possessors and their personal friends.
I shall greatly value any information sent me in regard to medical lore, early traditions or references toantient medical treatment in manuscripts, printed \\orks, etc. Kven though the items be but small, they may form important connecting links in the chain of historical evidence. Medical missionaries, and others in contact with native races, can also obtain particulars of interest in this connection. Every little helps, and. as I am desirous of making tin- Historical Medical Exhibition as complete as possible. I shall be grateful for any communication you mav be able to make.
It is my desire ultimately to place before the profession, in a collected form, all the information obtained.
The success of the Historical Medical Exhibition will depend largely upon the co-operation of those interested in the subject with which it deals, and I again appeal, there- fore, to all who possess objects of historical medical interest, to render their kind assistance by lending them to me so that the Exhibition may be thoroughly representative. I should also highly esteem your kindness if you would inform me of any similar objects in the possession of others.
I need hardly say that the greatest care will be taken of every object lent. All exhibits will be insured (also while in transit, if requested), and packing and carriage both ways will be paid.
The Exhibition will be strictly professional and scientific in character, and will not be open to the general public.
The response to the preliminary announcement has been beyond my expectations, and this, together with the many valuable suggestions received from leading members of the medical profession, chemists and others at home and abroad, has prompted me to considerably widen the scope of the undertaking since it was first projected.
I have been strongly urged, and have now decided, to hold the Historical Medical Exhibition at the same time as the International Medical Congress, which is fixed to take place in London in the year 1913.
This decision will, I have no doubt, suit the convenience of the many medical practitioners from all parts of the world, who will be visiting England on the occasion of the Congress, and the intervening time will enable me to make the Exhibition more comprehensive, and to include many objects of exceptional interest that have been promised from different quarters of the globe.
Hints and suggestions in connection with the Exhibition will be much appreciated.
HENRY S. WELLCOME SNOW HILL BUILDINGS
LONDON, E.G., ENGLAND
CLASSIFICATION OF EXHIBITS
S K c T i o N i Medicine ; -
(a) Animal medicine ; materia meclica of the animal creation : the tradi- tion of tlie connection ol animals \\ ill) the healing art.
(h) Medical deities of savage tribes and nations, figures, fetishes, charms, implements, and other objects associated \vith the art ol healing by primitive peoples.
(c| Antient deities of healing and other subjects associated with the art ol healing by primitive peoples ard the early civilisations.
(</| Votive offerings for health ( Dontirm). amulets, amnletic ir.edi -
cines, gems rings,
:l.e O i- ,
c h a r in s ,
and other objects cor- nected \\ith the art ot healing.
1'aintings. drawings, engrav- ings, etchings, photo- graphs, models, bas- reliels, sculpture^ and casts ot medical interest.
Pictures from MSS. of all ages, of medical, surgical. pharmaceutical and al chemical interest
mb
HISTORICAL MEDICAL KXHIIilTIOS
(g) Portraits in oil, water-colours or wax, miniatures, silhouettes, etchings and engravings, or busts in sculpture of physicians, surgeons, alchemists, botanists, apothecaries, chemists, pharmacists, nurses, etc., of all periods.
(h) Pictures of medical, chemical and pharmaceutical institutions of all nations.
(i) Pictures representing the important epochs and interesting events, such as original operations, discoveries, etc., in the history of medicine, sur- gery, chemistry and pharmacy.
(j) Medals, medallions, plaquettes and coins of histori- cal medical interest.
(k) Rare and curious MSS., xylographs, incunabula, early printed books and works of especial historic interest, periodicals, pamphlets, book-plates, etc., of, and connected with, medicine, surgery, phar- macy, chemistry, botany and the allied arts.
(I) Historic letters, prescriptions, autographs, case and note books, records of experiments, antient
diplomas, licences, corporate insignia, and persornl relics of medical, pharmaceutical and chemical interest.
(in)
cl the influence of astrology in medicine, scopes, and other astrological diagrams bear- ing on tlie an of healiny
S !•: c i i o N j
Sur^'fry, I >ental Sur<;erv. Veterinary Surgery and An.i sthetirs
Ml Instruments used in sur^erv l>y pre-hisioric anil sa\au;i- peoples.
(/>! lli^torv and development of instrument-- and appliances used in Mir^ery from the earliest times.
(<.•) Curiou^ appharce^ u--ed in antient time^ : l>ar!>er ^ir^eorV lileedmu basins and bov. IM, cupping implements, etc.
UARIIKK- Sr RUKON 's S HOP
I-'roin an Kn^ravinri of the X\'II century
Improvised instruments and appliances that have been used in emergencies, especially those that have led to inventions and discoveries.
(f| Calculi, and other curious specimens of historical interest.
I/) Relics of antient dentis- try ; early artificial den- tures. (^() Antient dental instruments
and appliances. (//I Antient instruments used
in veterinary surgery. Ul Historical apparatus con- nected with the discovery and use of an;rsthetics.
SECTION 3
Anatomy, Pathology, Ob- stetrics, etc. :
(it) Curiosities of anatomy, i lu-iriM.eiit- ;ul(l curious anatomical
models in wax, ivory, etc.
(/M History of the nomenclature, causation and treat- ment of the nmst important diseases that have afflicted mankind from the earlie-t time-, (ct Obstetric chair-, and other appli- ance- u-ed in early midwifery practice, the lying in room in antient time-. model- for ob- stetrical teach- ing.
I-/) Manacles and other appliances used in the treat- ment ot the in-ane in antient tim
•J45
As A I'OTH i:< A i< Y 's SHOP 1505
SKCTION 4 Ophthalmic* :
(u) Ant lent spectacles, eye-classes and instruments used as an aid to sight.
(In Antient instruments and appliances for testing sight, employed by oculists.
(t) The microscope from the
earliest period. (tit Historic microscopes.
SKCTION 5
Hygiene. I'ublic llealt!) and Pre- ventive Medicine :
U/l ()l>jects of interest, antient and modern, connected with public liealth. preventive and tropical medicine.
(!>) Masks, and other pre\entive method^ of protection against plague in antient times
((.•) Kxhihits illustrative ol physio- logy, anthropology, micros copv, bacteriology, biology. parasitolojjy, and geograpliy.
(</l Placards, posters, manifestos, declarations con- cerning epidemic diseases, etc. ((•) Antient bills of health.
S i c i I o \ 6 1 'hnrmacv
(<n Antient pharmacies.
(hi Materia medica of all ages, specimens ot antiert medicines and remedial agents ni \anoiis periods.
ic I Specimens illustrating the Use of arimal substance- in medicine.
HISTOKK'AI, MEDICAL EXHIBITION
(d) Early and curious relics of pharmacy.
(e) Antient stills, alembics, mortars, and pharmaceutical
implements.
(/) Specimens illustrating the history of early pharma- ceutical preparations (julip, rob and lohoch).
(t>) Curious bottles, carboys, ointment and specie jars, drug vases, pots, ewers, mills, containers, and implements and appliances used in pharmacy.
('//) Scales, weights and measures of all ages,
(»') Antient prescriptions and curious pharmaceutical
recipes and recipe books.
(j) Antient prescription books and price lists. (k) Antient counter bills, labels, business cards, curious
advertisements and trade tokens. (/) Old travellers' note books and curious orders. (HI) Antient apothecaries' shop signs and early fittings,
early pharmaceutical preparations and specimens
of obsolete and curious medical combinations, (ii) Antient and modern medicine chests, civil, military
and naval.
SECTION 7
Chemistry and Botany :
(</) Alchemists' laboratories.
(b) Antient stills, mortars and curious apparatus used bv earlv alchemists.
(V) Historical apparatus used by famous discoverers. (it) Products and preparations, antient and modern, of chemical and scientific research.
u'i First specimens of rare alkaloids, and other prepara- tions made 1>\ their discoverers.
in Rare elements and their salts, etc.
(:,') < urious astrological, magnetic and early electrical appliances
tii I Antient herbaria.
a) Specimens of abnormal plant forms anil curious roots used in medicine
i /') Relics of famous botanists.
S i : c i 1 1 > \ s
Hospitals. Nursing and Ambulance:
u'l ( )bjects connected \\ith early hospitals and general
nursing.
i/M I-'arly appliances in nursing the --ick. ic i liarly ambulance appliances
!i/) Antient feeding cups, bottle--, uiinals and bed-pans, n't Naval and military nursing and ambulance appliances
and eiitiipments.
Si. KO sufteri-rs from the
r — X\'I centun
( /) Kelics and objects of interest associated with nurses Kelics of foundling hospitals.
SECTION >j
Toxicology and Criminolo^v : (<n Spec i in en s o f
rareand curious
poisons.
</») Historical ob- jects connected
with famous
poisoning and
other criminal
cases.
(c) Curious methods of torture and execution.
\t{\ Improvised in- struments used for criminal purposes.
Si. CTION 10 Quackery : —
(it) Antient and modern pictures, prints and relics of notorious quack doctors.
HISTOKICAI. MKDICAI. KXHIIUTION
(b) Antient and modern specimens of quack medicines, preparations and appliances.
(c') Old bills, placards and pamphlets referring to quack medicines.
SECTION 1 1 Adulteration of Foods and Drugs : —
(a) Specimens showing the adulteration and falsification of drugs, medicines, foods, fabrics and other articles affecting health, or associated with medicine, pharmacy and allied sciences.
S K c T i < > N 12 Photography : —
(a) Objects illustrating the invention and history of
photography. (6) Early cameras and apparatus.
(c) Daguerrotypes.
(d) Portraits of the pioneers of photography.
(e) Original papers and MSS. connected with photography.
(f) Application of photography to medicine and surgery. X-ray photography.
(g) Early and rare apparatus.
(h) Curiosities of photography and its latest develop- ment.
W HA PONS OF PRECISION
PKOIH'CED BY
SCIENCE AND INDUSTRY
254
THE WORK OF BURROUGHS WH 1. 1. COME & CO.
FROM the time of the founding of the firm, scientific advance has been steady and continuous. The keynote of Keynote or this success lies in the firm's own original work, conducted success under the most favourable conditions, as well as their ready recognition of all forward movements in scientific research, and adaptation of the results to the methods of modern production.
taken its place'
" Science and Industry" has been the guiding motto of B. W. & Co. from the first. They have aimed at attaining and maintaining the highest possible degree of excel- "Science lence in the products they issue. By keeping abreast of Induslry' research work, and by promptly adopting the most scientific modern methods, they have not only kept pace with the latest developments in medicine and pharmacy, but have been pioneers in the introduction of some of the most notable agents employed in modern medicine, and have contributed largely to the great advances of the times.
Patient and persistent research* by a staff of chemical, pharmaceutical and physiological experts has yielded fruitful results. Not only has the firm satisfied the highest require- Results,, ments of physicians by the purity, reliability and sciclltlt": scientific precision of the products, but it has met the needs of conscientious pharmacists who pride themselves on the supreme quality of everything they dispense.
To supply medicaments characterised by purity, accuracy, uniformity and reliability has been the firm's policy from
|
' Res |
arch pioneered by Burroughs Wellcome \ Co. many years a^o is |
|
still coi |
tinned in their works by a hiuhl\ -iiualified staff. The Wellcome |
|
Chemic |
il Research Laboratories. Kim; Street. London ( Knu.'. and the |
|
\\Yllco |
ne Physiological Research Laboratories. Brockwell Hall. Herne |
|
Hill. I. |
ndon (Kni;.1. are Institutions conducted separately and distinctly |
|
from th and dis |
i business of Burroughs Wellcome \ Co.. and are under separate inct direction, although in these two Institutions a lart;e amount |
of important scientific work is carried out for the fin
PORTION OF FRONTAGE
BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co.'s CHIKF OFFICES. LONDON
Corner of Holborn Viaduct anj Snow Hill
facing Holborn Viaduct Station
'I III-: WIIKK
its earliest days. This lias been achieved by devising
ne\v appliances, by employing only the most scientific
methods, and by conducting the various stages of manu- .. Wc»ponsof
facture under the direct supervision and control of Precision"
specially - trained and qualified pharmacists and other
experts. High appreciation has been accorded by
physicians and pharmacists throughout the world to
the "\VEAPONS OK PRECISION"' created by the firm.
I'ntiring, strenuous endeavour and vast expenditure have
been required to attain these successful results.
WORKING IMPERIALLY
Mr. Joseph Chamberlain has taught the nation to think Imperially -Burroughs Wellcome & C'o. work Imperially. It has been the special ambition of this firm .
r J Bringing back
to win back to England by actual merit some of the lost to England
industries snatched away from the country in recent years lost "1(tustries
by alert, enterprising rivals of other hinds, who wisely
and well apply science to their industries, and slumber not.
H. W. & Co., never content with the time-honoured " rule
of thumb" methods, have in a considerable measure
gratified their ambition. Particularly in the production of
Fine Medicinal Chemicals including the powerful alkaloids,
glucosides and other active principles now so largely
replacing the use of bulky and nauseous crude natural
drugs, thus securing greater certainty and uniformity of
potency.
In this work it has been the aim not only to equal but to surpass foreign production, and the results speak for themselves.
PlONKEKS IN Nr.W 1>KI'(.S
The firm has pioneered the introduction of many new and valuable natural drugs, notable amongst which may be mentioned Strophanthus, or Kombr, the powerful African arrow poison which has proved so efficacious in certain heart disorders. Science and enterprise ha\e in this instance
'Turin <1 .1 ili.ulh i n< im into .1 \.il
J .-m
United States of America: BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co. • s
Offices and Exhibition Rooms
35, 37 & 39, West Thirty-third Street (near Fifth Avenue) NEW YORK CITY
•258
Sir THOMAS FKASKK, of the Edinburgh University, pioneers in the first investigated and demonstrated, in 1885, the properties of introduction of Kombe from a comparatively small specimen, and H. W. £ Co. immediately took vigorous steps to procure supplies of the drug regardless of expense and immense difficulties.
Emissaries were sent to collect the small reserves of arrow poison from the rude huts of many Central African warriors. In this way a fair quantity was accumulated, but at a cost of more than £20 per pound.
Thus, the true Strophanthus Kombe was first introduced to England and to the world- 1-5. \V. & Co. were first in the field.
pound
These earliest supplies were obtained quite regardless of monetary considerations, and. notwithstanding the great cost, parcels of the drug and its preparations were at once distributed, without charge, to leading physicians throughout the world. Hy this means the therapeutic properties of Strophanthus were confirmed by investigators in various lands.
For more than a year this was the only supplv of Strophanthus outside the " Dark Continent," and thru 1 '>. \V. iS: Co. again secured all that was obtainable, and were the only suppliers for many months. Stro- phanthus is now one of the approved remedies of the I'harmacoptrias. In less than two years the firm was treating several hundred-weights of Strophanthus seeds at a time, thus securing perfect uniformity in the activity
re prc- iri of dos
iiiiimi
fV^^^*^ ^^5!^? Ill ^>^^^g saai LuM j ^
'^^irewerir^T
**
• '^^•^^B
fr
Fl
ti ir
Italy :
BURROUGHS WELLCOME * Co. 26, Via Legnano, MILAN
THK \VOKK OK m'KKOfC.HS U KI.I.COM K .V Ci
of the products, and enabling the dosage and action to be controlled with precision.
Amongst those who were interested in the introduction of Strophanthus were Sir JOHN KIRK (then of Zanzibar), and Dr. DAVID LIVINGSTONE, who referred to its employment by natives as an arrow poison, in his narrative of his expedition to the Zambesi. It was the intimate association which BURROUGHS WKLLCOME & Co. have always had with the pioneers of African exploration which enabled them to be first in placing supplies of the drug at the disposal of the medical profession.
STKOPHANTHUS KOMBK, the source- of the drug, is a woody climber growing freely in many parts of Kastern Africa. From the seeds the natives prepare a paste with which they poison their arrows.
Australia:
BURROUGHS WELLCOME A Co. •Hi Kent Street. SYDN EY, N.S.W.
The seeds are contained in follicles, and eacli bears a beautiful plume-like appendage springing from a delicate stalk. Each seed weighs about half a grain.
I'K INKERS IN PHARMACOLOGICAL WORK ON ANIMAL SUBSTANCES
When renewed attention was drawn to the therapeutic action of certain animal substances, this firm pioneered the pharmacological work on the various glands. Having already been long engaged upon researches on brain matter and other substances of animal origin, they were first to produce a stable and reliable product of the thyroid gland, and this remains the standard and accepted preparation amongst the medical profession throughout the world.
Although the principle suggesting and guiding this
. . Anti
modern departure in therapeutics is the outcome oi recent physiological research, the belief in the use of organs or tissues for the relief of human suffering, or for the production of certain physical conditions, is known to have existed from the earliest times.
The belief in the utility and value of animal glands and tissues in the cure of disease is not altogether the outcome of modern research, for we learn from Herodotus, fifth century i. c , that in his day, the people called Hudini ordeloni "used the testicles of otters, beavers and other M|iiare-faced animals for diseases of the womb." From prehistoric times savage peoples have eaten the hearts ot lions, tigers and other courageous animals, and even of human enemies, with the object of acquit ing added valour in battle.
Among old-world medicines, compounds of the organs and tissues and excreta of mammals, birds, fishes and ^m insects occupied permanent positions of prominence subst They were included in the London Pharmacopeia issued by the Royal College ot Physicians in 1(176. and in Salomon's New London Dispensatory of I'-S^ The present increasing use of animal substances may be largely traced to the researches and enthusiastic advocacy
South Africa:
BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co. 5, Loop Street, CAFE TOWN
THK WOKK OK lU'KKOl (,Hs \V1 I.I.COMI. .V CO.
of Brown-Sequard, though it must be admitted that such advocacy was exaggerated, and perhaps lacked dignity and reserve. In spite of his attitude, which experience has not justified, he, in some considerable measure, succeeded in establishing his contention that all glands, with or without excretory ducts, give to the blood, by internal secretion, principles always important and in most cases essential, to the general well-being of the body.
Organo-therapy, animal medication, and glandular thera- peutics are among the terms now applied to the admini- stration of organs or tissues or of the internal secretions Modern
r i j • • i • • i j 11-1 knowledge
of glands, in certain diseases, induced, or believed to be induced, by the degeneration, disease, defective development, or removal of the corresponding organs, tissues, or glands. Many diseases, arising from defective functions of particular organs, are now treated with these animal substances, and the principle has been established that the lessened or lost power of an organ may, in some cases, be restored by the administration of corresponding organs taken from healthy lower animals.
The work of Burroughs Wellcome iS: Co. on these animal substances has been directed not only to the therapeutic but to the chemical and pharmacological side, and the production of active and staple products for the use of the medical profession, and in this they have attained marked success.
Amongst other animal products dealt with was the supra- renal gland, which yielded first to Abel and Crawford a powerful and highly valuable active principle which thc-v named Epinephrine. Other workers produced modified products, but the active principle was first produced in a dry. soluble, active form in the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories, and is now issued by the firm under the title ' Hemisine.'
A XKW Bi.oon I'KicssfKK RAISING I'RINCII-I.K More recent researches have led to the discovery at the B. W. iv: Co. Works Laboratories of a synthetic sub- stance. ' Kpinine, ' possessing the valuable properties of the
THK WORK OF HUKKOIOHS WKI.I.COMK >V CO.
natural active principle of the supra-renal gland and, in addition, showing certain marked advantages in use. Being a synthetic base which combines to form crystalline salts, ' Epinine ' can be readily purified, and the rise of blood- pressure produced by it is equal in degree and more prolonged than that due to the supra-renal active principle.
GOOD OR EVIL
Ergot, " the blessed and cursed blight of rye," which has Ergot blessed wrought much good and much evil, is now greatly valued and cursed as a remedy, yet it destroyed countless lives during the
grain plagues, called St. Anthony's fire, in the middle
ages.
Ergot of rye for many years presented a problem which baffled scientific workers. It has been investigated in these same laboratories, and the true representative active prin- ciple has been discovered, and is now issued as a standardised product, 'Ernutin,' of great power and uniform activity, of immense importance to the medical profession.
THERAPEUTIC SERA
At first for The Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories were
pioneers in the production of Anti-diphtheritic Serum in the British Empire, and also supplied the first used in the United States of America. During the early days, and until the real value was conclusively demonstrated, all offers to purchase supplies of the serum were refused, but all that could be produced was freely placed without charge at the disposal of the principal clinics, hospitals and private medical men who had diphtheritic cases under treatment. These trials proved successful, and the 'Wellcome' brand of serum, supplied by Burroughs \Yellcome & Co., has continued to hold first place throughout the world. These laboratories have done a vast amount of original work in the whole range of therapeutic sera — and in vaccines, etc., and in many other organic bodies of importance in medicine.
Though these Physiological Research Laboratories are conducted under separate and distinct direction, and many
of the researches are solely of scientific interest as contributions to human knowledge, yet much work of practical value is carried out for the firm, the Principal of which founded the laboratories.
I-'INK CHKMICAI.S
The Wellcome Chemical Research Laboratories have worked in the same manner, with benefit to science and to the firm, devising new chemical processes and producing new Rajsj,,K ,|,, chemical agents, both organic and inorganic. The standard investigation of vegetable drugs and their representative principles have yielded highly important results, both in the discovery of new principles and in raising the standard of purity and potency of valuable well-known substances, notably I'ilocarpine, Aconitine, etc., etc. The co-operation of these two research laboratories, with their efficient scientific staffs working under the guidance of the two highly-qualified Directors, distinguished for thoroughness and accuracy, is of immense importance to the firm.
Hut the research work does not rest here. There is also in the experimental and analytical laboratories at the firm's works, a highly-skilled staff constantly engaged in research for the discovery of new active chemical and pharmaceutical substances, and for the improvement of those already known
Amongst the notable discoveries are 'SoAMis,' the new substance which has proved so successful in the treatment of Syphilis, and of the dread Sleeping Sickness so prevalent among the population of the Congo, t'ganda and other parts of Central Africa; also 'Ni/:\,' the new antiseptic, powerful, but tree from many of the dangers of other antiseptics.
A large number of other important developments in chemistry and pharmacy have been made in the Works ,-h',^0','nl Laboratories, including the production of Chloroform of a standard that secures greatly increased uniformity and safety, and the confidence of the medical profession.
In the manufacturing departments every operation is studied with the view to new discoveries and improvements, and aiming to make daily progress.
267
THK WORK OK HI'KROUGHS \VKI.I.COMK \- CO.
EQUIPMENTS
Completely fitted cases have been devised to meet the requirements of up-to-date medical men and others engaged in medical and sanitary science ; for example, hypodermic, ophthalmic cases, urine testing, water analysis, bacteriological testing cases, etc.
Medicine and first-aid chests, cases, belts, etc., for military and naval purposes, for explorers, missionaries, travelling journalists, war correspondents, aeronauts, aviators, motorists, yachtsmen, planters; in fact, equipments for the air, for the earth, for the depths, and for every clime under every condition.
HISTORY OK COMPRESSED DRUGS
Burroughs Wellcome & Co. are successors to, and the Origin of sole proprietors of, the business of BKOCKEDON, who, in
compressed 1842, originated compressed medicines in the shape of
products
bi-convex discs — issued under the designation of "compressed pills." The production of compressed substances has been developed and carried to a high state of perfection by B. W. & Co. This has been accomplished by research and the use of chemicals of exceptional quality, and by the employment of specially-devised machinery of rare accuracy. This exclusive machinery, invented by the firm, and produced at great cost, operates with the precision of the finest watch-work. By its aid the firm's specially- B.W. & Co/s trained expert chemists are enabled to prepare compressed TCrfrctjn products for issue under the ' Tabloid,' ' Soloid,' and other
brands, of unique accuracy of dosage and of a perfection of finish never before attained. These products present medicines, etc., of so varied a character as to represent a range of dosage of T7fon of a grain to 60 grains or more.
The qualities of purity, accuracy, activity and stability appreciation which characterise ' Tabloid ' and ' Soloid ' products have
secured unusual appreciation and approval from medical and pharmaceutical experts, and these preparations are prescribed in private practice and in military and civil hospitals in all parts of the world.
MKDICAI. AND FIKST-.\II> Lyr
Burroughs Wellcome & Co. have, from the time of the founding of the business, made a special feature of studying medical and surgical requirements for expeditions to tropic and arctic and other trying climates, especially for the use of explorers, journalists and other travellers ; for armies in camp, on the march, and on the battlefield.
Careful and prolonged enquiry and practical experi- mentation have enabled them to so perfect their equip- ments for these purposes that almost every military expedition and journalistic pioneering tour of recent years has been fitted out by the firm.
1!. \V. eV Co. (iKNKKAI. OK KICKS
The firm's chief offices and administrative premises are centrally situated in the City of London, facing Holborn Viaduct Station, and at the junction of Holborn Viaduct and Snow Hill. They are thus within a stone's throw of such historic sights as St. Paul's Cathedral, the Old Bailey (Central Criminal Courts), the Charterhouse, St. Bartholomew's, and Smithfield.
1>. \V.\- Co. Fxmr.iTioN ROOM
A well-equipped Exhibition Room lias recently been opened at 5.), \Vigmore Street, London, \Y., for the purpose of providing increased facilities tor the inspection ot medical equipments and other products of the firm. A great variety of ' Tabloid ' Medical and First-Aid Equipments suitable for offices, factories, workshops, mines, expeditions, theatres, etc.. may here be seen. .S<v /viiy ^-n.
•\YKI.I.COMK' CHKMIC.W WOKK^
The 'Wellcome' Chemical Works (illustrated on pa»,- j>)), which form the principal manufacturing premises of the firm, are situated at Dart ford. Kent, near London. On one side, the Works have direct water communication with London and the Docks of the Waterway of the Thames ; on the other side they front on to the railway and so are in touch with the metropolis and the Continent.
SKVK.N r>. \\'. & Co. KN i 'AUMSHMKN rs AI;RO.M> Burroughs Wellcome & Co. have fully-equipped establish- ments at New York, Montreal, Sydney. Cape Town, Milan, Shanghai and Buenos Aires Photographs of the New York, Milan, Sydney and Cape Town Houst-s appear on pa»<-s ^58, Jt>o, 2<<2 ami j<< ( .
MALARIA
AND O U I N I N E
MALARIA AND QUININE
Malaria is computed to cause an average annual death- rate in India of five per thousand, which, in so densely populated a country, amounts to the alarming total of 1,130,000 persons. Every employer of labour, or master of a household, has a direct financial interest in the diminution of this evil, which at present incapacitates men in all grades of life for a considerable proportion of their whole working time, and thus adds enormously to the cost of upkeep on every estate.
The remedy lies in the habitual use of quinine, both for treatment and prevention. The death-rate, so far from being the whole extent, is only the index to the suffering, inconvenience and loss which malarial fevers inflict. Between a quarter and a half of all the cases of sickness in hot countries are malarious in origin, and a very large number of residents are prevented at one period or another every year from carrying on their ordinary pursuits. The whole nation is the loser.
Although not directly the most fatal, malaria is undoubtedly, from an economic standpoint, the most injurious of all
Malaria
human diseases.
It is not surprising, therefore, that malarial fevers have become, during recent times, the objects of the closest and most careful study.
The extreme importance of quinine in tropical countries is well enforced by the following striking statement by one of the greatest living authorities on malaria. Speaking of the long struggle between the invading parasites of disease and the natural forces of the body in a non-immune and non-treated case, he says : " The case may be cut short at any time by death, spontaneous recovery, or quinine."
The researches of Celli, Laveran, Ross, Grassi and
other distinguished scientists have clearly demonstrated
The method that malarial infection is due to certain animal parasites
of the genus plasmodia belonging to the sporozoa
infection ~ ° r
group. These parasites are conveyed to man by the agency of mosquitoes, and, although Europeans appear to be more susceptible to the infection than others, it has been proved that no race of mankind is immune to these
•272
MAI.AKIA AND olIMNK
attacks, Families and individuals here and tliere appear to be endowed with natural immunity, but they are comparatively rare.
A natural immunity is also acquired by persons of long residence in malaria-infested districts, ii they survive the debilitating influences of successive attacks, but the risks and suffering incurred constitute a sufficient drawback to this method of escape.
Two practical measures remain for dealing with malaria : first, the absolute avoidance of mosquito bites, and, second, the use of quinine.
The mosquito (anopheles) is most likely to convey the infection at night ; it drives its proboscis into the skin of its unconscious human victim, and injects from a few to some thousands of protospores of one or more species of fliisinotiiii . Many of these are doubtless killed off. but the survivors enter the blood corpuscles and begin to multiply. After the organisms have developed within the corpuscle the latter bursts, and the free spores invade ness corpuscles and undergo similar changes. No inconvenience is felt until something like fifty parasites per cubic millimetre of blood are present, when fever commences. At the same time, the forces of resistance available, varying in different individuals, are called up ; germicidal and antitoxic sub- stances are formed in the blood, which tend to diminish the number of the parasites and lessen their effect upon the body.
Tin- subsequent history of the attack is that of a constant struggle, swaying now to one side and now to that, between successive incubations of parasites and the grouing forces of immunisation in the blood.
The relapses which occur indicate that so long as any of the hostile animalcula remain in the blood there is always the possibility of their multiplying and again reaching the fever limit.
The devices evolved to avoid these uncomfortable and sometimes disastrous results, by destroying the mosquitoes or by using suitable netting to keep them auay, are excellent, and. \\ithin certain limits, mav be successful, but it is
MALARIA AND QL'IMNK
obvious that they do not at the present time furnish efficient protection from infection.
No one can spend his whole life under a mosquito net, and, although much useful work has been done in various parts of the world, by drainage, the use of oil on standing water, etc., to diminish the mosquito pest, these efforts are purely local and are liable to be counteracted from time to time by the amazing fecundity of these insects.
Quinine exerts its beneficial action by directly destroying the malarial plusmoditi. Laveran has shown that a solution of i in 10,000 is sufficient to kill them. Romanowsky and Scientific Mannaberg found that in patients who had been taking
quinine the nuclei of the parasites underwent degenerate changes, and that many spores within the sporocysts were dead. In this remaikable alkaloid of cinchona bark has been discovered an antiseptic and germicide powerful enough to destroy the invading parasite of malarial disease, yet without toxic effect upon the human organism.
The scientific demonstration of its extraordinary value has confirmed the experience of nearly three hundred years in its practical use. Its unique utility in the curative treatment of malaria, kala-azar, blackwater fever, etc., is widely recognised, but it is not so generally appreciated that a judicious use of quinine is an efficient preventive against malarial infection. And yet this is a point of supreme importance, especially to those whose rank and adminis- trative position surrounds them with many servants and subordinates whose efficiency depends upon their health being maintained.
In all countries where malaria is most dreaded, quinine has been successful in warding off the disease, while in those cases in which malaria has appeared after prophylactic preventive treatment, there is reason to believe that the attacks have
been much less severe than would have been the case without the previous use of quinine. Small doses are given for preventive purposes, but the point of primary importance is that they must be taken systematically. As has been said in a Government report : " Take quinine systematically, and one is absolutely malaria-proof."
•274
MAI.AKIA AND
In one province of India, regular prophylactic administra- tion of quinine to all prisoners in the jails has been carried out very thoroughly. The result is strikingly seen on comparing the rate of incidence of malaria among the Striking jail population protected by quinine, with that for the ri same period among the free population not protected by quinine. The figures (</) refer to the whole province, (/>) and (c) to particular areas : —
MAI.AKIA KATK
Aniotm quinine-protected AinonM free population
jail population not protected by quinine
(</) 10 per cent. 90 per cent.
(/>) i .. 33
(O 3'84 -. S5-,SS
The economic importance of such results wherever large numbers of people are employed is obvious : their average working strength will be greatly enhanced by warding off attacks of malaria. And, from the point of view of the employer or the master of a large household, there is another consideration. The regular administration of quinine to every servant who comes within a short distance of the house is one of the most useful measures of protection for those within the house itscll. The anophelines who carry the infection art- weak, short-lived insects. They do not travel far from the pools which are their breeding-places. II they bite no malarious individual in the course of their wanderings they have no opportunity of conveying the disease to another.
As to \\hich particular salt of quinine gives the best results, there is no general agreement among authorities. All are in accord as to the necessity for using only prepara- tions of great purity and of high alkaloicial value In the keen competition to produce quinine at lou prices, the importance of this point is sometimes overlooked, with the result that preparations are put on the market containing undesirable alkaloids and impurities
The products of Burroughs Wellcome A: Co are reliable highly-standardised quinine preparations, \vell-kno\\n for their purity and potency. In their production the utmost
MAI.AKIA AM) ol'IMXK
care is taken to eliminate everything which might be detri-
and potent mental to their therapeutic effect. Being pure and uniform
preparations jn composition, they are uniform also in activity and effect,
while their solubility and ready assimilability are other note-
worthy features. Their use is not followed by disagreeable
after-effects. In keeping-qualities the H. W. & Co. products
are unrivalled.
An interesting discussion has recently been carried on in a leading organ of public opinion in Calcutta with regard to the quality of drugs and chemicals which are offered for sale in the bazaars.
It is alleged that gross adulteration is being practised, and
Danger ot
adulteration chemists of long experience and high reputation confirm
that unscrupulous firms are shipping to India very large quantities of drugs, the sale of which in England, Germany, France or the United States of America (or any country where a food and drugs act is in force) would expose the vendors to prosecution.
So-called one ounce bottles of quinine are imported containing only 390 instead of 437^ grains.
Another report states "short-weight, mis-description, imitation of labels and packing, and adulteration to a most astonishing extent are used to reduce cost and secure business."
Under these circumstances, the only pathway of safety is to insist upon chemicals of known purity, the high standard of which is guaranteed by the trade mark.
This is specially important with regard to quinine, since it is so easily adulterated by other cinchona alkaloids of very similar appearance and physical characteristics, but possessing febrifuge properties greatly inferior to the true quinine.
":;.' 'TABLOID I.KAM. QUNINK
[.'= H. \V. & Co.]
The various 'Tabloid' Brand preparations ol quinine present the drug in what is, undoubtedly, the most desirable form for general use. ' Tabloid ' products are easy to take, and they do away entirely with the objections which so
27H
\IA1.AKIA AM)
generally attacli to quinine on account of its taste. Each contains an accurate dose of medicament, so that all trouble and inconvenience of weighing and measuring are rendered unnecessary, while, in addition, the ease with which the 'Tabloid' products may be carried about in the pocket or bag ensures the taking of regular doses in all circumstances. •Tabloid Brand Ouinine preparations contain only ingredients of the utmost purity and medicinal activity, and can always be relied on to produce the best possible results. Their therapeutic value is in no way affected bv any climatic conditions
AH l.OI I)'
XM. QUININE BISULPHATE
B. \V. A: Co.
• Tabloid ' Ouinine Bisulphate is a particularly useful preparation on account of its being readily soluble, and therefore easilv absorbed a highly necessary quality in such conditions as malaria, where the digestive disturbance is considerable. It is also very stable, and does not lose its activity or solubility on keeping, or in unfavourable climates.
As a preventive against malaria, etc., or as a tonic and bitter stomachic, two grains are usually given twice or thrice daily. For the treatment of malarial conditions, much larger doses are used, as much as from t.ventv to sixtv grains having been given in extreme cases, though the usual anti-periodic dose may be put at ten grains. When large doses are employed the bowels must be kept open. In ordinary chills, intluen/a and levers, tour grains are prescribed three or four tunes a day
1 Tabloid < hiimne Bisulphate. sitgiir- * contcd. is particularly easv of adminis- tration, and manv people who cannot tolerate quinine in any other form, take it without trouble. ,'
For dispensing purposes, on estates, etc., 'Tabloid products are supplied in containers of 500 at special rates.
MALARIA AND QUININK
blackv fever
Well tolerated
' Tabloid ' Quinine Bisulphate is issued in seven strengths : gr. £, gr. i, gr. 2, gr. 3, gr. 4, gr. 5, plain or sugar-coated ; and gr. 10, plain only.
Supplied in bottles of 25 anti too, except gr. A and gr \,iMch arc in bottles of 50 and too, and of 36 and 100 respectively.
of y
"".' 'TABLOID'
QUININE HYDROCHLORIDE
[•" B. w. & Co.]
This is an extremely soluble product of high alkaloidal value, which is stated to be preferable to other quinine salts in cases of blackwater fever and in regions where blackwater fever is prevalent. It is also valuable in those cases where large doses of quinine are not well borne. In the treatment of malaria, (£' three to four ' Tabloid ' products, of the greatest strengths, should be administered, followed by smaller quantities regularly. As a tonic and stomachic, small doses only are given.
For dispensing purposes, on estates, etc., 'Tabloid' products are supplied in containers of 500 at special rates.
' Tabloid ' Brand Quinine Hydrochloride is issued in five strengths : gr. i, gr. 2, gr. 3, gr. 4 and gr. 5, plain or sugar- coated.
Supplied in bottles of 25 ami 100
«« 'TABLOID' HRANI.
QUININE HYDROBROMIDE [- B. w. & Co.]
This product is largely prescribed by physicians for patients who are liable to suffer from the disagreeable effects which sometimes follow the use of other salts of quinine. It has the advantage of being very soluble and is readily absorbed.
' Tabloid ' Quinine Hydrobromide is issued in five strengths : gr. i, gr. 2, gr. 3, gr. 4 and gr. 5, plain or sugar- coated.
Supplied in bottles of 25 and 100
278
MALARIA AND (Jl'ISINK
'"."«' 'TABLOID' i!KAM) QUININE SULPHATE
[.•:! B. W & Co.]
Quinine Sulphate, which formerly was the salt most commonly used, has still adherents. For these, 'Tabloid ' Easyand Quinine Sulphate is the ideal preparation. It is greatly J^^"' superior to the powder in being easy and pleasant to take, and is quite as readily absorbed, since it disintegrates immediately. Its compactness leads to a great saving in space, and allows of a supply being carried, the bulk of which, in the ordinary form of crystals, would present difficulties.
' Tabloid ' Quinine Sulphate is issued in five strengths : gr. i, gr. 2. gr. 3, gr. 4 and gr. 5, plain only.
Supplied in bottles of 25 atut too, except gr. i, tchich is supplieil in bottles of 36 and 100.
For dispensing purposes, on estates, etc., 'Tabloid' products are supplied in containers of 500 at special rates.
'.'.'.''TABLOID' DRAM. QUININE COMPOUND [. B. w. & Co.]
1 Tabloid ' Quinine Compound is a valuable prepara- tion combining the specific action of quinine with analgesic, expectorant, stimulant and tonic laxative properties. By its administration the normal action of the bowel is regulated tonic ia and maintained, thus assisting in the elimination of toxic materials.
Supplied, plain only, in bottles of 25 and 100
'„';..' ' TABLOID ' »KAM> QUININE AND RHUBARB COMPOUND B. w. & Co
(HY// A-»IH:>-II for many ynns us ' TAIH.OIH ' I.I\ isr.sroM KOISKK
This product is specially adapted for use in tropical countries. It combines purgative with tonic, stomachic and anti-periodic properties, and in the treatment of malaria is PurK»t stated to be of marked value When an attack of malarial tomc- '
period i<
fever threatens, one to three • Tabloid ' products should be taken with a little water . the dose may be repeated in two hoars if necessary.
Supplied, pi.un only, in b< ;.'/. 5 or 25 ,ind ion
For dispensing purposes, on estates, etc., ' Tabloid ' products are supplied in containers of 500 at special rates.
' Tnhloitl' Hum, I Quinine frehinitions ,irc ,>hf,iiiitihle 'nun the Icettlinn ifliolesiile tinil retiiil eheniists.
219
MAI.AKIA AND cjUISIXh
"Sf 'WELLCOME' KRAM> QUININE PRE[>ARATIONS
In order that those who prefer to use quinine in the form of powders or fluid mixtures may be able to do so with full assurance that the materials they employ are of the same high standard as ' Tabloid ' products, a series of quinine preparations is supplied under the trade mark ' Wellcome.' These ' Wellcome ' Brand products are prepared under the direction of highly skilled experts, by the most perfect processes and with the aid of the latest and most accurate appliances and are submitted, before issue, to a series of tests, unique in their stringency.
M£E 'WELLCOME' »KAM> QUININE SULPHATE
This preparation is typical of the ' Wellcome ' Brand products. It presents the drug in an exceptionally pure state, the standards of purity to which it is required to conform being higher than that demanded by the official testsof the British and U.S.A. Pharmacopoeias. It is issued in two forms, "large flake" and "compact crystals." The " large flake " is the ordinary form of bulky feathery crystals, which in the ' Wellcome ' Brand products are unusually large and white. The " compact crystals" are identical in composition with the large flakes, but occupy only about one-third of the space, and have much, therefore, to recommend them from the point of view of convenience in storage.
1 Wellcome ' Brand Quinine Sulphate is issued as follows: " Large Flake," in £ oz., A oz. and i oz. bottles, and in 4 oz., 25 oz. and 100 oz. tins; "Compact Crystals," in i oz. and 4 oz. bottles, and (Large : in 25 oz. and 100 oz. tins. •' 7j •'
When ordering ' Wellcome ' Quinine Sulphate, please indicate whether " compact " or " large flake " is required. 1 Wellcome' liniml Quinine l'ret><iriiti<ms tire obtainable from
the lemlinti icliiilesule ttntl retnil chemists.
2X0
T;;;.1 'TABLOID' HKANU FIRST-AID
Atitomobilists, Aviators, Yachtsmen, Sportsmen, Travellers, Tourists, Boy Scouts, and residents in out-of-the-way districts.
Compact outfits of bandages and first-aid accessories, etc.. suitable for use in emergencies when travelling, or at home, especially where medical aid is not immediately available.
No. 707. 'TAB I. oil)' F-'l KST-Al 1)
Contains 'Tabloid' Candayesaml Dress- ings, 'Vapor ole1 A r o m a t i c A in - iiionia. for use as " Smelling Salts. " • Corofax. ' Carron oil (solidified) and jaconet, castor oil, plaster. protective skin, .scissors, pins, etc.. and seven tubes of ' Tabl.. id ' and ' Soloid ' Crand
Products.
In Rex K.-d i, is
illust>;it,;ii. Royal Clue or Crcwstcr ( Ireen Knamellecl Mi-tal. or in Alnminised Metal.
No. 715. 'T AIM. oil)' I- Iks. I -Am
Contains 'Tabloid' l'.andai;es and Dressings, ' \'ap. .role ' Aromatic Ammonia, for use as " Smelling >alls, ' Corota.v. sal \olatile. Canon ,„;
(.solidilifd). jai o,M.,.
No. 708. 'TABLOID' FIRST-AID (FOR NLRSES)
Contains ' Tabloid liandages and Dress- ings, 'Vaporole' Aromatic Ammonia. for use as " Smelling Salts," ' Borofax,' Carron oil (solidified), jaconet, plaster, pro- tective skin, camel- hair brush and safety- pins ; also a supply of 'Tabloid' Am- monium Carbonate, for use in place of "sal volatile," and a tube of ' Soloid ' antiseptic products.
In Rex Red, Royal Blue or Brewster Green (as illustrated! Knamelled Metal, or in Aluminised Metal. Webbing-strap for attachment to waist- belt at a small extra charge.
No. 709. 'TABLOID' FIRST-AID (FOR BOY Scoi TS)
Contains ' Tabloid ' Bandages and Dress- ings, 'Vaporole' Aromatic Ammonia, for use as "Smelling Salts," ' Borofax,' Carron oil (solidi- fied), jaconet, plaster, protective skin, c a m e 1 - h a i r brush, pins, etc.
In Rex Red or Royal Blue (as illus- trated > Knamelled Metal.
Belt or Cycle attachment (as illustrated) may l>e obtained at a sma extra charge.
No. 730. 'TAHLO1D' FIRST-AID
Has lii-tri) di-si^m-d in iiu-i-t thu iR-t-d for an c-llicit-nt first-aid mi-lit in l:ir«L- buildin-s such as theatre*, chilis, assembly
and Dn-ssin-s. • I l.,/,-lin.- Hi.. -id Wit, h ll.i/.-l. ' H:i/elim- ' Crram. •" Ha/i-linc1 Snow." • |?,,rofa\,' t'arron oil. ' Vap..r..li- Amman,
liair t.rushrs. pi istrr. .•!,.. .iNo ,-i-ht plii.iK ,.f ' Tal.l.id in.',!., a.nr,,ts
.111,1 t«l> tllllfs of •>o|,.i<r .llltisl-plll- pr.Hllll-ts.
No. 710. 'TABLOID' FIRST-AID
This first-aid outfit is very little larger than a cigarette cas can easily be carried about in the pocket in constant readi- ness for emergen- cies. It contains a ' Tabloid ' Bandage, ' Tabloid ' Dressings, ' Vaporole' Aromatic Ammonia, for use as "Smelling Salts," ' Borofax,' Carron oil (solidified), camel-hair brush, plaster, etc.
In Scarlet Kna- melled Metal (as illustrated).
IteaBuremeiits : 4 X :ij*(l X jj
No. 905. 'TABLOID' PHOTOGRAPHIC OUTFIT
A complete outfit of ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals for develop- ing, sepia toning, inten- sifying, reducing, gold toning, fixing, etc.
Kresh, reliable solu- tions without weighing or waste.
In Rex Ked, Royal Blue, Imperial (!reen or Bright Scarlet Enamelled Metal (as illustrated), or in Black Japanned Metal.
•J X -I X 24
No. 231 'TABLOID' BRAND MEDICINE CASE
(As suggested by SIR W. MOORE)
Measurements: loif x ~i x 3 in.
Contains fifteen i-oz. corked phials and one 4-oz. corked bottle ; minor surgical instruments and dressings. Fitted with 'Tabloid' Brand products, etc., as recommended in SIR W. MOORE'S M annul of Family Medicine Jor India.
In Black Japanned Metal With modified fittings
£3 17 6 £3 10 0
Specially adapted for use in India and the Tropics. When fitted with a thick felt cover, this case forms a very admirable motor car case.
SOME HISTORIC FLIGHTS
B V
AIRSHIP AND AEROPLANE
The charm of rapid movement through the air, on the earth, or above it, exercises an irresistible fascination, and gains more votaries daily for aviation and for motoring.
It is impossible to eliminate entirely all risk of injury from these attractive sports, and, unfortunately, accidents occasionally befall even the most careful and experienced.
The most famous aeronauts of recent times, including those whose flights are here recorded, have carried with them ' Tabloid ' First-Aid as their sole medical equipments on their voyages through the air.
1 Tabloid ' Equipments have been specially designed to provide within the least possible space, what is necessary for rendering first-aid in cases of accident or injury, and have been carried on air voyages by such distinguished aeronauts as M. " Beaumont, "M. Vedrines. M. Pnulhan, Mr. Grahame- White, etc., and on the Clement-Bayard II., the " Willows," and other famous airships. So that no one need be deterred from carrying a first-aid equipment by its bulk, an outfit (No. 706) has been specially designed, the si/e of which has been limited to that of an ordinary cigarette case.
It contains one bandage, ^ yards by 2.} inches, one small package containing pins and compressed boric gau/.e, a metal box containing strapping plaster in detached pieces mounted on tape, so that it can be used without scissors, safety pins and ' Vaporole ' Aromatic Ammonia, for use as " smelling salts "
FIRST-AID I'OCKKT-CASK
A tubeof Carron oil (solidified), for use in case of burnsor scalds is also included ; a packet of jaconet, some of which may be placed over the oil, and forms an impervious covering, protecting the injured part from the air ; and a little booklet of court plaster cut into convenient-sized strips.
The case is made of aluminium, light yet rigid, with a fluted surface and a steel spring catch. It can be carried in the pocket under all circumstances without the slightest
;J X
inconvenience, and forms a real safeguard against the com- plications which may arise out of a neglected wound.
The preparation of a complete ' Tabloid ' First-Aid outfit of such small dimensions has been rendered possible by the use of the ' Tabloid ' pleated compressed bandages and dressings originated by Burroughs Wellcome & Co. A small quantity of gauze or lint can be removed from one of the packages, when required, without disturbing the bulk, and the remainder retained, free from contamination by dust or dirt, for future use.
Among the Grand Prizes awarded to Burroughs Wellcome & Co. by the International Jury of the Franco-British Exhibition, one was presented specially for Medical and First-Aid Equipments.
N'iiv.il -Unit. Ir.in ilr t'onm-.iM. lirltiT knmvn mull r the innn ./.• ml of
"An, Ire IV.
"10. .iml \v<ii in ill s i\ pc iif marliinc tin- Kurnpran Circuit K.icc. i-i>\ci MIL; !«• whole I||>;MI-<' n s.s In-. .>s nun.: .mil ;I!M. the l),iil\ M,iil '."IO.(KK1 iri/c for tin- cii -ni of Kritiiin. tini>hiny hrst in .:.; ln>. JS mill. l> sec.
:
PAUL HAN ON HIS Fl.lH HI TO MANCHESTER
M. Paulhan won the first Daily Mitil £"10.000 pri/e in 1910, for a flinht from London to Manchester. Inset is a photograph of the aviator, and the No. 706 First-Aid which he carried during his flight, and concerning which he reports : —
" Je profile de cette occasion pour vous exprimer le plaisir <iue j'ai eu de porter avec moi durant le vol que j'ai fait de Londres a Manchester line trousse Premiers-Secours 'Tabloid.' "
J I I. KS V f. I) K I N K. S
M. J. Yedrines. a Frenchman who has attained front rank in the aviation world, won the Paris-Madrid race in 1911. and holds a record of speed for crossing the Knulish Channel (European Circuit! in 30 minutes. He com- peted in the Daily Mail C 10,000 Air Race in 1911. and completed the 1.010 miles flight round Great Britain, in 23 hrs. 3« inin. 5 sec. Me flii ^ a Morane-Borel monoplane, and carries a 'Tabloid' First-Aid. photograph shows the aviator handling his ' Tabloid ' pocket outfit, concerning which he reports :—
"Je considere votre Premier- Secours ' Tabloid' comme tres utile. Son pen de volume en fait un modele d'une extreme ^s S-9 commodity."
C II A K I. K S \V K V M A N N
Mr. C. Weymann accomplished a flight of 23\ miles, carrying a passenger, from Hue to Clermont Kerrand. in 6 hours, with three stops, on September 7. 1910. In 1911 he won the Gordon-Bennett Cup for America, at Eastchurch, Isle of Sheppy, usinn a Nieuport monoplane. He is shown in the above photograph holding a No. 706 ' Tabloid' First-Aid in his hand.
290
Mr. S. F. Cody, an American who has become a British Citizen, and has done important work for the War Office, uses aeroplanes of his own design. He has made numerous suc- cessful flights, and was the winner of the British Michelin Cup in 1<)10. His was the only biplane and the only All- British machine that finished the 1010 miles circuit of Great Britain. 1911. He carries 'Tabloid' lirst - Aid as his
medical equipment. Mr. Cody reports as follows : —
"The 'Tabloid' l-'irst-Aid Case has always been in iis place on my machine and I have found the contents of in- estimable value on numerous occa- sions. I consider it altogether a most excellent idea, en- abling one. as it does, to carry in the smallest possible space, remedies with which to meet every eineoJeiic\ ."
The arrow ' Tabloid ' I
photographs indicate th is fixed on the machine of the Aviator.
of the reacli
M A r K I c i: T A i: r T i: A r
M. M. Tabuteau won the French Michelin Cup, 1910. flyinn 3<>5 miles in 7 hi>. 48 inin. 31 sec. ; he also holds the duration record of H hrs. 35 inin.. and several other distance and duration records. Originally flying a Maurice Farnian Biplane, and more recently a Morane Monoplane." he has lately joined the staff of the British and Colonial Aeroplane Company, at Bristol, and now pilots their machines. In the above photograph he is seen examining the contents of the No. ~0fi 'Tabloid ' First-Aid, which lie carrii > on his Hifihts.
Mi- HI HI LATHAM
M. II. l..ith.uii li.i> in. 1. 1. niiim Mirrc— till Miuht-. m.i.il.K .11 tin- Kin iui> \vi.nion Merlin;;. 1' IH. .mil .11 <|K Ul.u-kpool Mi-ctin^ \\lnrli t'..||o«( d. \\licn In .icc(>ui|i|i>lic(l .1 llit;lii ;i«,mi>t .1 siront; KU^I\ wind, .nid .11 ilic Kliciin^ MfctillK. 1'>IO. when he rust- tci .1 height of I.I)>N|'I-CI. Ih r, |x>n>.i- I'ullnw- :
If liens . i vou- dire coinl'K n in .1 iti utilc vot
PIERRE PRIE R
M. P. Prier is a French airman, who came to England to act as instructor to the BleYiot School at Henclon. During the motor show, 1910. he flew over Olympia, and subsequently flew from London to Paris without a stop, using on both occasions a Bleriot monoplane. M. Prier has recently joined the staff of the British and Colonial Aeroplane Company at Bristol, and will in future use exclusively that Company's machines. He reports as follows: —
" Messieurs,
[]J'ai bien recu votre lettre du 11 juillet et vous en remercie.
"La trpusse que vous m'avez gracieusement fournie m'a servi trois ou quatre fois d£ja.
" Elle est cependant encore suffisamment garnie pour un certain temps; j'ai 1'intention de ja laisser dans la voiture automobile de mes me'caniciens pour le prix du Duily Mail.
"Je pr^fererais done (jue vous m 'en adressie/ une autre pour mettre sur mpn appareil ; ces trousses 'Tabloid ' sont en effet excessivement pratiques.
" Dans 1'espoir de vous lire je vous prie d'agre'er, Messieurs, mes salutations empressees."
294
Hrst-Aid. and
nlxirn in l'J()". He wa> tlic tir •1. part in the Aviat 1U. on which occnsii < li.i for ill.
ll\ 11114 in, in in HIII n \H. llr aUo flew I a Sanchiv H< >a 11
VoisinbiplaiH' s Air<'>. where I the Kheinis
re inoj l't;i|iiipfiiient Premier Secmm
V 'I* .
ill 0
, is-^ J: ^ .3 Pi
u: 2 — .'5.3
= w
A GOOD CATCH (From a negative by J. F. Moore
Kxposure r.J.ri second ; developed with ' Tabloid ' ' Rytol ' Universal Developer
MODERN METHODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY
Every age has had its special predilections and its own favourite vehicle of artistic expression — there has been an age of marble and an age of ivory, an era of huge mural paintings and a time when dainty miniatures were most in vogue. Epic poetry and the writing of voluminous letters delighted the eighteenth century and disappeared in the twentieth. On the other hand, the art of the camera with its brilliant realism and poignant actuality has appealed with irresistible force to the modern spirit and, without ousting any of the older methods of delineation. has become the helper and servant of all. So important is the position in the national life, taken by photography characteristic at the commencement of the present reign, that it may an of thence be regarded as the characteristic art of the age.
Moreover, its pursuit is no longer hedged about by the difficulties and inconveniences which at first beset it. The wet plate process is practically obsolete, and in its place plates and films of convenient size, and hand-cameras of excellent design, and in endless variety, are now offered to the amateur on every hand.
The method of making chemical solutions has also been reformed, and instead of bulky bottles of liquid for develop- ing, toning, intensifying, etc., it is sufficient to provide oneself with ' Tabloid ' Chemicals which occupy a minimum of space, and achieve a maximum of efficiency.
'Tabloid' Photographic Chemicals are pure chemicals compressed into small bulk, but yet more readily soluble difficult^-, than the same chemicals in crystallised form. These solvcd products each contain a precise weight, so that the trouble of weighing or measuring is entirely obviated.
The advantages which 'Tabloid' Chemicals possess in home use are intensified when development and similar operations have to be conducted under trying conditions, such as exist in the tropics. This wonderful compactness is well shown by the coloured illustration. A complete chemical outfit ot 'Tabloid' products is comfortably carried in the pocket or wallet without danger of trouble consequent on breakage.
MODKKN MKTHODS IN 1'HOTOGKAI'H Y
Not only do ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals rid development, toning and other processes of all the uncertainties which accompany the use of impure chemicals and stale solutions, but they also remarkably simplify these operations, and impart to them a scientific precision which cannot otherwise be obtained.
All developers and chemicals essential for the practice of photography at home and abroad are issued as ' Tabloid ' products, but to meet the special needs of travellers, tourists and amateur photographers who require the utmost condensation and the widest utility in the equipment they carry, Burroughs Wellcome & Co. have issued, as the result of special research and wide experience, a developer which is universal in utility and unique in compactness. This is ' Tabloid ' ' KVTOL ' Universal Developer. It is so compact that the materials developer ^or ^ ounces of solution occupy only the same space as
one ounce of fluid. It is so universal in application that it will develop plates, films, bromide and gaslight papers as well as lantern slides with equal facility and equal certainty. It makes a bright clear solution even with water which, with ordinary chemicals, becomes cloudy and discoloured. The importance of this to travellers who are forced to use whatever water is available will be readily appreciated.
CORRECT EXPOSURE IN ALL LANDS The photographer who desires to obtain pictures of places which he may never re-visit, of moving objects, or of dramatic scenes of special interest which he may observe in the course of his journeys, must be able to decide on the correct exposure quickly and under all circumstances. To
Certainty in t •«*» n o i_
exposure meet this need, Burroughs Wellcome <x Co. s photo-
graphic experts have condensed the results of their special study of the question of exposure into a pocket-book known as THE 'WELLCOME' PHOTOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RECORD AND DIARY, and have combined with their own experience that of travellers in all parts of the globe.
Many methods have been devised for ensuring correct
V
exposure some requiring complicated calculations, others the use of elaborate tables or special apparatus. The simplest and most certain method is provided by the ingenious mechanical Calculator contained in each copy of Tin: '\YKI.LCOMI-:' F.xrosrKic KKCOKD AND DIARY. Its essential feature is a disc, one turn ot which tells the correct exposure at a glance.
The illustration here shown makes its simplicity clear. The central white portion is the revolving disc which registers \\jth the two hxed scales, shown in tint. Facing
the Calcula- tor are tables giving light v a 1 n e s, so arranged that the table for each month comes to the front i n its proper season T he Calculator is set bv turning the disc until t h e subject to be photo u; r a p h e ii registers w i t h t h <• lit; ure repre
seining the li.uht value That <>iii- turn is all that is necessary In addition to thus providing an easy way <t calculating correct exposure. Tin • \\'KI i COMK ' KxrosfKi KK< IKI> is a pocket note book and encyclop.rdia of photo graphic information There are three Kditions 11) Southern Hemisphere and Tropics, ui Northern Hemisphere and Tropics, |jl I'nited States of America. 'These editions gi\e the information necessary for correct exposure in all parts
imple
the world
K U
Ml-.TIIODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY
THH RECORDS OF TRAVELLERS
Records of travel and exploration into distant and little known parts of the world constitute a most fascinating department of literature, and one which is especially attractive to British readers. The Empire upon which The charm of the sun never sets has been built up by men who have tr°^Te*0 possessed in a remarkable degree the genius of exploration, and a restless and insatiable love of travel runs in the blood of their descendants. Even those Britons who are compelled to stay at home, love to catch an occasional glimpse into some far-off untamed region of the earth's surface, " where foot of man has rarely, if ever, trod," even though it be only in imagination. Hooks of travel bring before us, vividly, the conditions of life among races widely removed from our own in the line of their development, or lagging behind the stream of human progress like remnants and reminders of primeval man ; their pages open up to us a whole world of adventure in which we can track wild beasts in their native haunts, scale lofty mountains and penetrate mysterious caverns and inaccessible deserts.
Nothing delights the home-keeping lover of travel more than thus to dive into the unknown in the company ol an author who has seen and heard what he describes. Such books as "Through Darkest Africa," "Trans-Himalaya." " Farthest South," etc.. etc , which palpitate with actuality and bring before us a new vision of the world as it is, are full of interest and ol immense educational value.
Workers in this strenuous field of literary effort have p,,,,.,,,^ lound in Photography a most serviceable- ally, and the i>y difficulties which at first enveloped the practice of this art ' on the march or in out-of-the-way places have, to a great extent, disappeared.
With a modern camera and a good supply of 'Tabloid' Photographic Chemicals, there is hardly any part of tin- process which cannot be carried out on the very spot where the negative has been exposed.
The Rev. R M. McOvven, famous for his vivid and picturesque treatment of Chinese domestic scenes, regularly uses 'Tabloid' • Rvtol ' Universal Developer.
MODKKN MKTHUDS IN PHOTOGRAPHY
A well-known New York journalist, Mr. Frank G. Carpenter, who in 1906 travelled through Northern,
Eastern and Southern Africa, commenting on the 'Tabloid' Photographic Outfit which he had taken with him, wrote: " The Photographic material sent was of the highest quality, and I am forwarding a few
of the photographs among the many we took from time to
time."
IS I'HOTOGRAI'HY
A characteristic Saharan picture of a string of camels from one of Mr. Carpenter's prints is reproduced on page 304.
Among those who have carried ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals as part of their travelling equipment for an
Sir Sven Hedu
exploring expedition may be mentioned Sir Sven Hedin, in Tibet the story of whose intrepid journeys in Tibet is related in " Trans- Himalaya" (see pnge 343)
Sir Ernest Shackleton took a complete outfit of ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals on his perilous journey into the Antarctic zone (when he got within 97 miles of the South Pole), and pronounced them quite satisfactory.
' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals were also taken by Capt. Scott on his famous Antarctic voyage in the Discovery : and on the Terra Nora, in which the same distinguished explorer has again sailed southward in search of the Pole, a very complete outfit of ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals has been taken, Mr H. (.*,. Pouting, the photographer who accompanies Capt. Scott on this latest British Antarctic Expedition, selected as his one developer for all plates, films, bromide prints and lantern slides, ' Tabloid ' ' Kytol,' and this developer is also to be used for the very large quantity of cinematograph film which it is intended to develop on the voyage.
Mr. K. L. Jefferson, F ,U.(i S., in his book " Through a Continent on Wheels," writes: " 1 should like to mention that this firm (H. \V. iS: Co.) prepares Photographic Tabloids in a compressed form, and those photographers who desire to develop their plates <•;/ runic cannot do better than adopt their portable and reliable outfits."
Mr. I,. N. C>. Ward, a traveller whose photographic work Tabloid' is of a high order, uses 'Tabloid' Chemicals. The roll P''ot°Krapinc
Chemicals
film of a striking picture of his. entitled, "The King of in China Bekwai," which is reproduced on piigt 304, was developed with 'Tabloid' Pyro-Metol.
The keeping qualities of ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals in hot climates have been amply proved by the experience of voyagers to various parts of the world. One
MODERN MF.THOnS IN PHOTOGRAPHV
well-known traveller, Lionel Decle, used them to develop no
less than 4000 plates during the course of his wanderings
across Africa, and, in recounting his experiences and
in referring particularly to a package of ' Tabloid ' Pyro, he
A?Hca°nal wrote: "This bottle has been to Madagascar through a
heavy rain season, to Africa also, and to Algeria. The
fact that none of the products are discoloured is for me
a conclusive proof that your ' Tabloid ' Photographic
Chemicals are absolutely perfect.''
A writer in the Pall Mall Gazette (November 5, 1909), in an article entitled " Chasing the Sun," thus describes the advantages of these products.
"A camerist myself, I have often come across — I had almost written ' always come across ' — brethren in the art who took bulky cases of developers, fixers and other chemicals, which took up much room in the kit-bag, and which they sometimes could not replace when they were used up. This is one of the drawbacks to Kodaking in out-of-the-way places. All this inconvenience and worry can be saved, since the time tested, excellent tabloids sold by Burroughs and Wellcome are sufficient for all needs. In a phial that may be carried in the waistcoat pocket, you Convenience have sufficient developer to last during an ordinary tour,
and in other phials of similar size, fixers and toners. In a small corner of the bag you can stock away sufficient materials to take you around the world, and you may keep on snapshotting all the way.
"Four phials of the firm's excellent pyro tabloids lasted me through the South African War, and, during a siege, I was well provided with chemicals when other men, not so far-seeing, were without them. The new, handsome, little case for home or touring use, packed with all tabloids necessary for negative and print, is one of the best things ever placed on the market."
The visit of H.R.H. the Duke of Connaught to South Africa, in 1910, was worthily recorded, photographically.
MOI1KKX MKIHolls IN I'lloTOI ,K.\ I'll Y
In spite of the difficulties presented by constant movement and changes of climate, Mr. Ernest Brooks, the official photographer on the tour, managed to secure an album of views replete with charming scenes and subjects of historic interest.
On his return he gave some interesting particulars as to the methods employed. Here is his report :
H.M.S. H.U.MOK.M. CASH i
,l;in. ii. I'M 1
Pl-.AK SlHS.
While acting as official photographer to U.K. 11. the Puke of Comiatuiht during his tour in South Africa. I used 'Tabloid' Photo, graphic Chemicals to the exclusion of anything else.
My whole outfit for the development of plates, tilnis and papers, and for toninii prints, was comprised in a metal case measuring 9 x 7 x (> inches.
The only developer I used was 'Tabloid' 'Kytol.' It is the best developer I know, and on this tour alone has yielded me over 5(K) half-plate negatives of first-class quality.
Although my developing was all done en i<<titt. 'Tabloid' 'l\>tol Developer enabled me to prepare a fresh active solution in a moment. wherever I mi^ht be.
It is wonderful what beautifully - graded negatives this developer yields. It «ives full details ill the shadows, and >et keeps the hi^h lights soft and well modulated even in most difficult subjects. I-'or retaiuiiift the full printing value in cloudy skies I know nothing t" ei|u.d it.
The convenience, portabiliu and keeping qualities of \ our rhnuu'.iU are further point- in their favour.
Your- faithfulU.
These, among other notes and comments from travellers and photographers in various parts of the British Empire and elsewhere, indicate the growing interest felt in modern methods of photography, and serve to emphasise the reliability of ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals under conditions which would render ordinary chemicals useless.
THE
Tabloid' '
AND
Soloid'
Invented
by B. W.& Co.
They mark the work of
Burroughs Wellcome & Co.
They mean " Issued by
Burroughs Wellcome & Co.'
They stand for
products
308
COLOUK
H V I- K C T S BY
S T A I N I N ( ,
P H O T ( ) ( , R A \> II S
Stuine i with 'Soloid' PhotoEraphic Stain i Green >
FIRELIGHT STUDY
COPYRIGHT
By
J. WESTON AND SON
Folkestone
Reproduced from a Bromide print developed with 'TABLOID' 'RYTOL' UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER and stained with ' Soloid ' Photographic Stain (Salmon)
COLOUR HKFHCTS
BY
STAINING PHOTOGRAPHS
Many striking and original colour effects may be obtained by immersing lantern slides, bromide, platinotype and similar prints in solutions of suitable dyes. For this purpose, a series of products has been introduced under the title of ' Soloid ' Photographic Stains. Portraits, fireside and forge studies may be stained with ' Soloid ' Photographic- Stain (Red or Salmon), moonlight views and seascapes with a blue ' Soloid ' product, street scenes and twilight views with yellow, landscapes with green. The firelight study on the opposite page is a reproduction of a print stained with 'Soloid' Photographic Stain (Salmon). The method of staining is quite simple : Dissolve one • Soloid ' Photographic product in four ounces of water, and having soaked the prints (which should not previously have been hardened) in water until flaccid, immerse them in the staining solution for a few minutes, then rinse and dry in the usual way. The most pleasing effects are produced in the majority of cases by employing solutions of this strength, thus obtaining a suggestion of colour rather than a pronounced tint. For lantern slides where a deeper colour is required, one ' Soloid ' Photographic Stain product may be used with one ounce of water.
THE WELLCOME MATKKIA MKD1CA KAKM
A FIELD OK BELLADONNA I A t r o p u o t / 1 a a u tin .•Itrofia belladonna is grown from genuine wild seed. The best crops of le obtained in the second, third or fourth jear of the plant's growth, and it i; period that the alkaloidal content is greatest.
L o A u i s <; BELLADONNA
The yield ranges from 1-1 2 to 5 tons per acre. The freshly-cut herb is weighed in bundles and carried sitaighl to the laboratories in a motor trolU-y. A portion ul the leaves is dried in a few hours in speciall) -ventilated chaii bers. The roots, which are
any undesirable change taking place.
THE 'WELLCOME' MATERIA MEDICA FAR.M
THE vital importance of standardisation of drugs has always been recognised by Burroughs Wellcome & Co. Constant attention has been devoted to the subject, and the principle
Standardisation
has been applied not merely to the chemical, but also to the vegetable and animal substances required for the preparation of the firm's products. The old method of picking samples of drugs by their colour and appearance has long been felt to be inadequate, and it has become necessary to view them in the more penetrating light of chemical analysis and of physiological tests.
liven the most experienced pharmacognosist may select drugs which, on the basis of form, colour and other physical characteristics, appear to possess a high standard of quality, yet on assay do not yield the requisite percentage of active principles.
In this connection, a paper by Carr and Reynolds, pub- lished in the Chemist and Druggist, shows in tabular form the very considerable range of variation in the proportion of active principles existing in samples of drugs bought on the market. Amongst the examples given are the following :
Drug
Belladonna
(dried herb) 023 I'O* Total alkaloids
Broom tops 0-07 1'0<> Sparteine Sulphate
Cinchona Succirubra rot; 4 f>-l Quinine and Cinchonidim
Hydrastis Root 2-;{ 5 * Berberine Sulphate Ipecacuanha Root
(Rio) (VIM 1 s:{ Kmetine
It is evident that the accuracy and care exercised by the pharmacist in weighing and measuring drugs for use in medicine are nullified if the active principles are variable to such an extent. The obvious remedy for this state of matters is standardisation.
Closely bound up with the question of standardisation is that of the possibility of exercising scientific control over
FR t s ii
BELLADONNA
LEAVES
About to be expressed for juice and for making the green extract. It is extremely important that this tx? done promptly to avoid fer- im-ntalion and conse- quent deterioration of the product. The fresh herb is gathered as soon as the sun is up. and expressed and treated before sunset.
' W E I. L C O M h ' C H K M I C A I. \V O R K S
HEMLOCK (C on iu m
in a c u I a t u >n >
A typical bush of Hrmlock (Conium maculatum). The frrsh leaves and branches are collected when the fruit begins
' W E L I. C o M K ' M A T K R I A
M E i) I c A FARM
\\ r I I < »MK
MI.PK \ hAKM
GATHKKING HVOSCYAMI s \Hyascyamus niger) ll\0icya»,us iiiffr, on,- of tlie most difficult pl.ints with which the hi-rb farmer lias to deal, is grown from see. I sown al»mt March or April. Tin- young plants show at>o\<- ground at the en<l of May or beginning of June. In the autumn they are separated if too close together. In the following May an a.-rial stem is devclo^d. wlucli rapidly trows until it reaches the height of thn-eor four feet. Tin- flowcrinu takes place in Jim.' or July, when the crop is harvested.
1") I (. 1 i A I. I s ( /) I £ i I it I i s /> ii i- /* ii r r n ) is 1- I. o \v K K
0^Y«/ifl»r/«rfaisohUinrd from carefully-selected wild seed, and any variations from
the wild type are struck out. (.real car.- is taken in collecting and drying the
leaves, otherwise the medicinal activity would I*- adversely affected Blighted, faded
or defective leaves are rejected, and only the finest preserved for use.
THE WELLCOME MATEKIA MEIIICA FARM
ACONITE ( A coititum na (>c 1 1 u tafellus, when raised from seed, takes
i best propagated by dividing th the power of fon
three years to flower:
.... . -ach root is biennial, but. as it has •ery year, the plant itself is perennial.
A FlEL
This handsome plant is intere contains Hyoscine, Hyoscyamin
OF DATURA M E T E i. ing, as recent investigation I and Atropine in proportions i other solanaceous plants.
Uttering fro
MATKKIA MKIIK A I \K M
the cultivation of medicinal herbs, more especially those which are found to present great variations in activity Ex rt when obtained in the wild state. Hence, with the intro- supervisi duction of the 'Wellcome' Brand standardised galenicals, of Krowl Burroughs Wellcome & Co. found it necessary, in order to obtain a constant supply of herbs of a sufficiently high standard of quality, to grow ttiem under their own immediate supervision. The benefits of conducting a materia medica farm in conjunction with the preparation (if pharmaceutical products are many. For instance :
(1) A drug may be treated or worked up immediately it has been collected.
(2) Herbs may be dried, if necessary, directly they are cut, before fermentation and other deteriorative changes have set in.
(3) Freedom from caprice on the part of collectors who, in gathering wild herbs, are very difficult to control in the matter of adulteration, both accidental and intentional.
(4) The ability to select and cultivate that particular strain of a plant which has been found by chemical and physiological tests to be the most active, and which gives the most satisfactory preparations. Notable instances of these are to be found in connection with Digitalis and Helladonna.
Fortunately, suitable land was available near the 'Wellcome' Chemical works at Dartford, and there the • wdicn ' Wellcome ' Materia Medica Farm has been established. Matclla The following extracts from a descriptive article which Farnj appeared in the Chemist and Druggist of January 2<). 1910, will give some idea of the nature and scope of this enterprise : —
" A suitable piece of land for 'a physicko garden' (had been chosen) on an undulating slope, with here and then- a Rcsearc, clump of trees and a strip of wild woodland, l>et\veen the and river and the North Downs, hard by the little village of rxPcnm< Darenth. No more ideal spot for a herb farm could have been chosen. It has shade, sunshine and moisture, anil a fine loamy soil, varied by sandier uplands. Here the firm have for the last six years been cultivating medicinal
1'HK WKM.COMK MATKKIA MKDK A I-AKM
G o L i> K s S K A i. (Hvdrastis c a n a d c n s i s )
GOLDEN S K A i. ( Hydrast i s c a n a il c n s i
: plant under a s|>cciallj--ilrsij;nwl lattice struct
MAIKUIA MKDICA 1AKM
plants under the immediate superintendence of pharma- ceutical and botanical experts. The farm was established, firstly, to provide opportunities and materials for researcli and experiment, and, secondly, to supply the manufacturing departments with medicinal herbs of proper quality.
" A visit to the farm shows that the greater part is devoted to the cultivation of staples ; but a number of plots are used for experimental crops. Among such are meadow saffron (Colchicmn (iiitiiinntilc), with its pale-purple flower. Lavender, peppermint and French roses grow side by side. Senega and the unpretentious taraxacum, with its bright yellow petals, occupy other spaces. Ginseng, the root that plays so important a part in Chinese medicine, is also grown. Poilopliylliun peltuttiin, Scopolia iitropoicics, Datum meteloides, sea poppy (Gtancum lutciun), and Cirindelia robusta, are other plants that one does not usually find growing on a scale greater than the experimental ; but the plots of Hydrastis canadensis are botanically and commercially the most interesting on the farm, in view of the fact that we are coming within measurable distance of the end of the natural supply from North America.
" It is grown at the ' Wellcome ' Materia Medica Farm in the open under perfectly natural conditions, in a little woodland dell shaded by tall elms and bramble bushes ; and, in another part of the farm, under a lattice-work structure, an effort to re-create the conditions of the native home of golden seal, which is in rich, moist woods from Canada to Carolina. The growtli under the latter conditions is more generous. In this case tin- plants an- protected from the noonday heat.
"The purpose which Burroughs Wellcome & Co. had immediately in view when they established this farm, i.e. supplying the products of the field direct to their Works, has been fulfilled, and the farm has in that respect passed the experimental stage, and reached one of great practical utility. On the research side. experiment goes on, especially in regard to selection and cultivation of strains which have been found by chemical and physiological tests to be the most active
317
THE MEDICINE CHEST OF QUEEN MENTU-HOTEP. WHO LIVED 2 200 B.C.
The massive outer case for the chest is shown on the left. It is composed of wood, decorated with hieroglyphics, amongst which are the royal cartouche and the figure of a crouching jackal.
The chest itself is depicted on the right. It is composed of plaited papyrus reeds, and is supported on a stand. The chest is divided into six compartments, each containing a beautifully-shaped medicine jar of oriental alabaster. Various medicinal roots, and a wooden spoon, the handle of which is ornamented with the head of Hathor, were discovered in the chest.
This unique Egyptian medical equipment was discovered at Thebes, and demonstrates the huge bulk and cumbersome fittings, combined with paucity of supplies which have been characteristic of medical outfits from the days of the Pharaohs until the introduction of ' Tabloid ' products. The modern medical man armed with a ' Tabloid ' brand Pocket- Case carries a scientific therapeutic equipment, the equivalent of which in the drugs of antient Egypt could be transported only by a regiment of slaves.
SIS
HISTORIC: A i,
M 1-: DIC A L H (,) U I P .\\ H N T S
I S K I) IN
MILITARY. <ii;cx.R A IMI ICAI.
A N 1)
J O U R N A L I ST I C H X I' H 1) I T I O N S
MILITARY MEDICINE CHKST— 1588
Fabricius, a noted Swiss physician of the XVI centurv. recommended that the military chest should be furnished with no less than 362 varieties of medicine, some of which contained as many as 64 ingredients. The complexity of arrangement, the huge bulk and great weight, the liability to breakage, and the complicated inconvenience of medicine chests persisted until the introduction of' Tabloid' Medical Equipments.
320
Ihh S M A I L K S T M b I) I < • I N H C H I S T IN 1 H I \V O k I 1 1
This tiny gold medicine chest is titteJ with twelve squ.ire medicine chest bottles Ccntainintr 300 Jcises <if 'Tabloid' Hrand Medicamems, equivalent to 1 5 pints of tluid medicine.
A T T II i: X 0 KT II I'OI. I.
' Tabloid' Equipments were carried 1> Rear-Admiral l'i :.\u\
l;.\ R i ii i:s ;• Sd i T i
'T.\ K l.o 1 !>' Mi: I) 1C A I. AM) l:lkSI-AlI) 1: (,) U I I'.W I M
HISTORICAL MHDICAL EOUIKV\HN rs
I < ) R M I I. I T A VM , <i I: I) <i K A I' H I <: A 1. AND .1 l > I k N A I I S I I i; f: \ I'll U I T I 0 N.s
Tnii Medical Equipments of the present day, differ notably from those of olden times in two distinct directions — diminished bulk, and in purity and efficacy of content. This improvement has only been effected in the last quarter century, and mainly by l'>. \V. \ Co. ; before that time, campaigning medicine chests had to be either of enormous Bujk ,.:id nnuieldy si/.e, or, if small, they could contain only the inadequate :n<>st meagre supplies. equipment.,
In the Middle Ages, owing to the great variety and bulky nature of the remedial agents used, the medicine chests employed in military campaigns assumed enormous pro- portions, and it was not until the middle of the nineteenth • eiitury that progress was made towards reducing the bulk • ! campaigning medical outfits
Karlv explorers, particularly in Africa, found the ditti- culti'-s o! procuring suitable portable medical supplies practically insuperable, and the horrors of disease and death associated \\ith their expeditions were almost beyond
df-M-i iption.
"\Vlntililnnk -.ml tin l;it. SIK II. M. Si \M i s. m tin r.miM'i.l A IH
.-in i.f his lii-tuiV!. ..fth< •li-i.i.lful mnrulnx ..!' I ;i|U. 'I"i < M\ - "•»'
I \in iltii.Mi in isli.. c,( ' ih, \I,,IK Ixpi 'ilHi-ui in ISII. nf tin- Milter ''•"'
MIL;-.' Ml utiiN .mil Si'i KI . anil nf in> nun lii-M two i-xi'i ilitiniis. I '*'"
.1:11 .nu.i/fil to t;iul lh.il murli . •)' th: innn.ilitv .in. I >ickni >s u.i- (,u"'
• hie n> thr criulf w:i\ in \vhii li 1111 ilirim-s wrn -m-i'li- -I in tv:m-lli r>. „„., I In v, i\ r. roll, , :,. nr.niM v :,„ ,,, >],,., 1.1. r.1
litim
HISIoKKAl. MKHK Al. I <_>< irsi] N 1 s
That a very marked change has taken place can be gathered from a more recent speech of this eminent explorer and journalist, in which he said : —
In my early expeditions into Africa, there was one secret wish which endured with me alsvass. and that was to ameliorate tin miseries of Aft ican explorers. How it was to he done I knew not: who was to do it. I did not know . Hut I made the acquaintance of Messrs. Hrnnot (ills Wi t t.( OMI \' Co. As soon as I came in si^ht of their preparations and their works. I found the consummation of m> secret wish. On my later expeditions I had all the medicines that were required for my black men. as well as my white men. beautifully prepared, and in most elegant fashion arranged in tin smallest medicine rhest it was ever mv lot to cart's into Africa."
B. W.& solved tin problem
In his books. 1'iiiintihig tlif C\></<,'o I-' re,- Slot, and In l),uk,-st At'ricn. the laic Sir II M. STAMIY wrote in the very highest terms of • Tabloid ' Medical Lquipments.
Amongst other cases used during STAM t \ '.s travels, is (In- famous " Kear-( iuard " 'Tabloid' Medicine Chest, which remained in the swampy lorest regions ol the Artiulnmi for nearly four years, and more than once was actually sub- merged in the river. When it was brought back to London, the remaining contents were tested by the official analyst ol '/'//(• l.diicft (London. I-'n^.) who reported that the 'Tabloid medicaments had perfectly preserved their etficacv
Slanlry s •• R.-.U (1: Chest
t.-strd l)y "Tlic La
The late Surgeon-Major PAKKK. Stanley's Medical Otlicer. in his (inide to Hcaltli in Afr'uu. writes :
" Tin medicinal preparations xvhieh I li;ivc throughout recom- mended arc those of BrKKon.iis \ViiuoMi \ Co.. as I have found, after a varied experience of the diftercnt forms in which drills are prepared for foreign use. that tliere an none wliich can compare will) them ('Tabloid' products' for convenience of portahilitx in transit, and for unlailinu relial>ilii\ in s:nni:th of doses after prolonged exposure."
At this point it is of interest to turn to the ' Tabloid' Medicine Chest, here illustrated, \\hich \vas discovered near Kenia. in the Aruuliimi Dwarf Country. It was the last chest supplied to 1C MIX PASHA, (lounox's Covernor of the l-'quatorial Sudan. This chest was taken by Arabs v hen F.MIX I'ASHA \\as massacred in iSiU. and
UnfailiiiK reliability portability
N\a^ recaptured by HAKOX I>HAM--. Coiiiniatulnnt of the C'on.uo 1 fee State troops, alter the battle "I Kasonpi. It uas subsftjiieiitly stolen by natives, and finally recovered by an ollicer of the Con;;o Free State, and returned to HcKKori.ii^ \YHMCI>MK \ Co.
"(-,, nth in, n. 1 found the iiuilicim cln>l \oti l«rw.inli<l me tiill\ st, ck(d. 1 need not tell \oiiih.n it> \ i i > compli t( 11( ss niadi l..nmd MIX heart. Annies like those could nol U made but ,.[ ;ln hand of the i;n an M ,n;i^:^ in tin ir o\\ n d< p.n ;nu n: . It an\ one relii veil from int< :;-c pain | out - out lu~ l>Ii --;u_~. :h< \ \\ ill come home lo x on.
Ml Illl Al. I'M II'MKVI -
I shoulil like to expatiate somewhat longer on the intrinsical valin l)iit sickness preventing me to do so. I wish you to In-lieve me."
Another case associated with Stanley is the raw- hide ' Tabloid ' Medicine Case used by Thomas Stevens, the well-known journalist who travelled round the globe on a bicycle, and was the hero of other pioneer exploits in .T'°£ different parts of the world. Stevens was the first to greet Medi the great explorer on his return to civilisation, and during his twelve months' journeyings in Masadand and German Mast Africa, was greatly impressed with the portability
ne Case
and compactness of Ins medical outfit, and utth tin- eHicacy of its contents In Ins book. .SYn////'/^ t'nr Stunl,-\- in East Africa, he wrote : " Statilev. in recommending thrsi- Medicines /Tabloid' products , lias earned the gratitude of every man who goes to a tropical country."
A history of all the • Tabloid ' equipments associated with African exploration would, of itself, make a large volume, and it is only possible to make bri«-f mention of a few other instances of their tist-
^Jifej^gr- F
That ' T .MIL oil) ' Eyi'ii'MENTS excel for military purposes has been abundantly demonstrated during various British and foreign military campaigns. The following is an extract from the Offtctaf (Bopcrnment (Report made expe^tf0119 by the Chief Medical Officer of the last BRITISH MILITARY Kxi'KnmoN to ASHANTI, on tin- 'Tabloid' Brand Medical Equipment supplied by BruKnn.ns \Yi.i. I.COMK \- CD. : —
i imvciiicnce lli.it cannot be expressed ill words. 'I'inic is saved
to .in extent that can hardK be realised, and MI is space, fur a
tilted dispciisan . or even a dispensary table, is unnecessary. The
quality of medicines was so ^eioil that no otlief should IK- taken
into the lield. Tile cases supplied are almost ideal ones for the |>; taken
< '.overmiient. They ale lij;lit. \ et strong, and the an anuement ot the lidil
the materials and niedicines is as iiearK pert'ecl as p<issible."
It is instructive to compare the experience ol this lixpedition with that of the \\'C>I.M-:I.K v ASIIANII Kxn-inmoN of 1873, fitted out according to old time methods.
The suttenng and loss ot life \\ere then terrible, lor \\ant of suitable medical equipments.
\Vitlioiite.xception, 'Tabloid' Medical Kquipments ha\e been used in all the campaigns of the last twenty-live year*,. and ha\<- played an important part in combating tin diseases \\hich seem inseparable from an army in the lield
During the war with Spam, in Cuba and the 1 'hilippines. • Tabloid ' Medical Equipments were specially ordered tor. and used by. the T.S. Army and Navy.
The Military Expedition which, under the command ot I. OHO Ki iviiKNKK, defeated the Khalifa and reconqueied the Stulan, was supplied with ' Tabloid Brand Medical Equipments.
An illustration of one ol the ' Tabloid ' Medical Ivjuip ments specially designed lor. and supplied to, the I'-iiiisli
Colonial Forces for use in the South African Campaign in- here shown. Similar cases were designed for, and supplied to, the CITY OK LONDON IMPI-.RIAI. Ym TNTKKKS and IMPKRIAL YKOMANRV.
-^^.
•w—
— Sir—
The equipment of tlie Anu-ricau Hospital Ship Miiin,-. and tlie valuable services it rendered in connection \\ith the campaigns in South Africa and in China, are so recent as to be within the memory ot all. The whole of the medical outfit was supplied 1>\ MfKKofi.ns \YiiiroMi: \- Co.
HISTOKH \l. MKIIICAI. Kl.iril'MKXTS
Referring to this equipment, the Lancet (London, Eng.) reported : —
The whole of the medical outfit has been supplied by Messrs. Burroughs Wellcome & Co. One of the medicine chests supplied by this firm is in tooled leather, designed by Mr. Henry S. Wellcome.
The following description of this chest may be of interest : —
The chest is made of oak covered with Carthaginian cow- hide, tooled by hand, with chaste designs successfully repre- senting in allegory the alliance of Great Britain and America in the succour of the wounded. On the top panel appear the Union Jack and the Stars and Stripes entwined, portraits of Queen Victoria, George Washington and President McKinlev ; also representations of the British Lion and American Eagle. The front panel bears portraits of Lady Randolph Churchill (Mrs. George Cornwallis- West), the hon. secretary and the hon. treasurer of the fund; a picture of the ship itself; a scene representing the British Lion, wounded by an arrow which lies at his side, being ministered to by Britannia and Columbia. A frie/e is formed by a representation of an American Indian wampum, upon which Brother Jonathan and John Bull are depicted hand-in-hand. The panel at each end of the chest represents Britannia and Columbia supporting a banner bearing the Red Cross, and on the panel at the back the British Regular and Colonial Lancers are shown charging a Boer force. Keble's line, "No distance breaks the tie of blood," and Bayard's phrase, " Our kin across the sea," are inscribed on the chest. This beautiful cabinet contains a number of smaller cases fitted with ' Tabloid ' and ' Soloid ' products and 'Tabloid' Hypodermic Outfits, and is in itself a compact and complete dispensary.
In addition to their adoption by military and naval authorities, ' Tabloid ' Medisal Equipments have been used by the War Correspondents who have accompanied all modern expeditions.
3S4
The conclusive proofs afforded by ;ill these campaigns and expeditions of tlie incomparable utility of the l'>. \V. \ Co. equipments, under circumstances ot the most trying nature, naturally led to their still more extensive employment in South Africa during the late war. The trying conditions ot transport and the climatic influences were just such a> • Tabloid ' Kquipments and 'Tabloid ' Equipments only, had been proved, by earlier experience, to be capable of resisting. Constant references were made to the adequacy and efficiency of the equipments supplied.
\ \V \ U C'.OKRI-SPON ni-NT'S I: Q I' I I'M I: N
***- -
/£*' -TL-j
u
\tr
An ei|uipment ot the s^reate^t personal interest i- the c!n'-: here illustrated. It was formerly the property <>f the late <i. \\'. Steevens. and used by him throughout the war ii: (ireei-e. the tuo Sudan campaigns, and his journey in Indi.i. In the Soutli African \\'ar the same chest did t;i>od service until this brilliant wnters lite was bn ri^ht to a premn: !:;••• end diirin» the siege of I.advsmith.
IN ARCTIC AND ANTARCTIC H X I> I.O R AT I O N
In the successive heroic endeavours to reach the Poles, during recent years, and in the exploration of Arctic and Antarctic lands, 'Tabloid ' Medicine Chests have taken a pioneer position, and continue to hold supremacy.
The 'Tabloid' Belts and other Medical Equipments supplied to NANSEN for his journey in the I-*ni»i, and those used by the JACKSON-HARMSWORTH ARCTIC EXPEDITION, have been added to the historic collection of HrRRorr.ns WELI.COMK cS: Co.
A famous
journalistic
enterprise
f the "I" A HI i in i ' HK AMI Mi mi IM Hi i I on liis Arc-tic Kx|>r<litioi).
The ITALIAN ARCTIC: Kxri:i>m<>N, commanded by the DI-KK OK mi: AHRI-//I. found that, despite the fact that the northern latitude of S<> </ 4,," was reached, the
Otii' of the "KAMI inn ' HK\M, CAM N. c-.irrii'<l In ihc DIM
AHKIV/I'S 1'olar Kxpc<liti
'Tabloid' Medicine Chests and Cases with which the Expedition was equipped were brought back with their remaining contents quite unaffected by the rigour of the climate.
HISTORICAL MEDICAL KUL'II'MKSTS
REAR-ADMIRAL PEARY, to whose record stands the achieve- ment of reaching the farthest northern latitude, writing from Etah, Greenland, reported :—
Burroughs Wellcome & Co. 'Tabloid' Medicine Cases and supplies have proven invaluable.
One of the ' TABLOID'
H K AND M K II I C I N K
CHESTS used by RKAR- ADMIRAI, R. E. PEARY
The entire medical outfit of the National Antarctic Expedition was furnished by Burroughs Wellcome & Co., and on the return of the Discovery, with the members of the Expedition on board, the medical officer made a highly satisfactory report on the ' Tabloid ' Medical Equipment.
~ -7 7
One of the 'TABLOID' BRAND MEDICINE CASKS carried by the National Antarctic Expedition.
In August, 1901, the Discovery left England, and, in the following January, crossed the limit of the Antarctic Circle.
338
HISTORICAL MKDICAI. Ki.if I I'M KSTS
Having passed the farthest eastward point attained by Ross sixty years before, the explorers discovered a new land, which they named King Edward VII. Land. One of the most noteworthy features of the Expedition was the
arduous sledge journey undertaken by the commander, Captain SCOTT, accompanied by Lieutenant SHACKI.ETON and Dr. WILSON. This journey over the ice occupied three months, and the latitude of <S2 17' South was reached.
On sledge journeys the question of weight is of great moment. The traveller on such occasions must carry but the barest necessaries, and of these the lightest procurable. The medicine chest is an important item, for upon the efficacy of its contents the lives of the explorers may depend. Every drug carried must be of the utmost reliability, in the most compact state, and capable of withstanding an extremely low temperature.
That ' Tabloid ' Medical Equipments fulfil all require- ments has been proved again and again. They enable the traveller to carry a comparatively large supply of medicines, and may be used under conditions which would render the carriage and administration of ordinary preparations impossible.
Reliability essential
HISTORICAL MKPICAL KyL'Il'MKNTS
To the enthusiasm of Sir CLEMENTS MARKHAM, K.C.B.. then President of the Royal Geographical Society, the successful organisation of the National Antarctic Expedition was largely due. Referring to the 'Tabloid' Medical Equipment of the Discovery, he reports : —
National Antarctic Expedition, I , Savile How,
Burlington Gardens, \V
The Medical Equipment of the Exploring Ship of the National Antarctic Expedition was entirely sapplied by Messrs Burroughs Wellcorae & Co. , and, proved in every way raost satisfactory.
The few othnr drags and preparations which v/cre ta!:en with the Expedition were only supplied for purposes of experiment, arid, can in no way be regarded as pert of the medical equipment.
iril'MKNTS
DK. KCETTI.ITZ, the Senior Medical Officer to the
Expedition, reports: —
Discovery ANTARCTIC KXI-KDIIION
The Medical Kquipment of the Discovery Exploring Ship, of the National Antarctic Kxpetlition. was entirely supplied by Messrs. Burroughs \\'ellconie \ Co., mostly in the form of 'Tabloid.' ' Soloid ' and Knule ' preparations.
The preparations proved in every way most satisfactory, and there was no deterioration of any of them, in spite of the conditions of climate and temperature to which they were exposed. The few other drills and preparations which were taken with the Kxpedition were only taken for the purpose of experiment.
The cases supplied by Burroughs \Vellcome \ Co. to us have also been found satisfactory : the small leather one was very useful upon sl< 'd«e journe\s. beiiui li^ht anil compact. The No. J51 ' Tabloid ' Case was used for some weeks at the camp eleven miles north of the ship, when the whole ship's company was i n;,. ii,t<l in sawing and blasting the ice, and it was found very convenient.
The otlu-r cases were useful in our cabins, etc. .for a hands supply.
BRITISH ANTARCTIC L X I' \. H I T I () N , 1907-9
SIK EKNKST H. SHACKI.K TON on his memorable voyage \\itli tin- Xinirotl. when he penetrated to within ninety- seven miles of the South I'ole. took with him .is his sole medical equipment 'Tabloid' Medicine Chests and Cases, and the subjoined reports show that under the trving and difficult conditions of Antarctic exploration ' Tabloid ' Medicines maintained their reputation for efficiency and stability,
British Antarctic Kxpedition. 1907 V Copy of Report dated Sept. 17, i<)o<) :
The British Antarctic Kxpedition. I'XIT "> was equipped with a very complete Medical Kiniipment contracted for solely bv Messrs. Burroughs Wellcome \ Co.. and consisting of 'Soloid' and 'Tabloid' Preparations, which are the only forms that c.m be conveniently carried and preserved under such condition-.
Ml
HISTORICAL MKDKAI. Kt>l:ll'MKXTS
The packets of compressed Dressings are in extremely convenient form. The Conno Cases (No. 251, 'Tabloid' Brand) were always used when at our base, and both the party of three who reached tht South Magnetic Pole, and the party under Lieut. Shackleton. who attained a point 97 miles from the geographical South Pole, carried a brown leather 'Tabloid ' Case and all the ' Tabloid' products that remain are now in as riood condition as when first handed over to my care two years ago.
The "Ximrod" was also supplied with 'Tabloid' Cases and equipment.
The 'Tabloid' Photographic Outfit supplied by Burroughs Wellcome & Co. proved entirely satisfactory.
Sinned,
British Antarctic Expedition. 1907-9,
KKM:M- H SHACKI.KTOX.
CoiiiHiaiitli'r.
KRIC P. MARSHALL. M.R.C.S.. I..K.C.P. Surgeon to the Expedition.
The ' Tabloid ' Medicine Case carried " Farthest South " by SIR ERNEST H. SHACKI.KTON.
The full record of this Case, as given in the report from the Surgeon to the Expedition, is printed bslow.
Copy of Report dated Sept. 17, 1909 : —
The B. W. & Co. Brown Leather 'Tabloid' Case herewith. wa* taken with party of six that made the ascent and reached the summit of Mount Krebus. U..>50 ft.. March 5-11. 1908.
I'sed on Southern Journey under Lieut. Shackleton. "OctolxT _'v 1908— March 4. 1909. Latitude 8SC J.5' S. Longitude U._" K.
HISTORIC. M. Ml Dlr.U. KM I II'MKN I S
I >istance covered in this journe\ . I .TJS statute miles.
I'sed mi S. Depot I.a\ ini; Party, from September JO lo ( )ctobcr 15. 1<W.S. Distance covered. ,il 1 miles.
Taken on Depot journeys to Hut Point. A^nre^atin^ 150 statute miles.
Medicines quite satisfactory.
SigaeJ, 1C. P. M\NSHU i . M.K.C.S.. I. .RAM'..
Surgeon to British Antarctic Kxpedition. I'll;-') * Reached " Farthest South " Jan. ». l<KCi
KHCOkDS 01 .101 'R N A LISTS. T \t A V Ii 1. 1. }• K S AND S PORTS. Mfc N
Mr. JfLirs I'KICI-:, tlie special artist and correspondent of the Illustrated London AYir.s, reported that lie carried his 'Tabloid Medicine Case over 50,000 miles through Arctic regions, across Siberia, throti},'!) ('hinp, Japan and America. Despite the severe \\var and tear of this «reat journey, the case suffered little damage, and the remaining contents were quite unaffected by exposure to every variety of climate.
Another interesting ' Tabloid ' Medicine Chest is that which belonged to Dr. Charles Hurland, \\lio reported that it was used during a year's journey through Cashmere. Tibet, the high ranges of the Himalayas, and encountered a vast amount of rough usage by transport on the barks of coolies, elephants, camels, bullocks, etc-. Intense cold in high latitudes on the Himalayas, as \\ell as the heat and moisture of Indian monsoon weather in the lowlands, equally failed to allect its contents adversely
Sir Sven Hedm \\hose remarkable achievement in the exploration ol Central Asia, when he set loot in one ot the sacred forbidden cities ot Tibet, i-- well known, took with him on Ins journey across the Himalayas, a ' Tabloid ' Medicine Chest, and, in his fascinating book • • Trans-Himalava," he speaks in the highest terms of the utility and completeness ol the equipment.
To this enterprising explorer his ' Tabloid ' Medicine Chest was of great use. not only in providing medical treat- ment tor his followers and himself on their long and
HISTORICAL \IKDKAI. Kyl'Il'MKXTS
perilous march, but also in his diplomatic relations with the great Tashi-Lama.
We are indebted to the courtesy of his publishers, Messrs. Macmillan, for permission to quote the following description by Sir Sven Hedin of the presentation of his ' Tabloid ' Medicine Chest as an offering of friendship, in accordance with Oriental custom, to the venerated chief of the Buddhist religious community at Tashi-Lunpo: —
Rombo Chimbo ' [the name by which Dr. Sven Hud in was known], we know that you are a friend of the Tashi-Lama, and we are at your service."
"When we had conversed for two hours I made a move to leave him, but the Tashi-Lama pushed me back on to a chair and said ' Xo. stay a little longer.' Now was the time to present my ofterinu. The elenant English Medicine Case was taken out of its silk cloth, opened and exhibited, and excited his tfreat admiration and lively interest : everything must be explained to him. The hypodermic syringe in its tasteful case, with all its belongings, especially delighted him. Two monks of the medical faculty were sent for several days running to write down in Tibetan the contents of the various ' Tabloid ' boxes and the use of the medicines."
Sir Sven Hedin also carried a ' Tabloid ' Medicine Chest in his journey through the Persian deserts, an account of which he has published in his new book " Overland to India" (Macmillan and Co., 1910).
Mrs. Bishop, better known as Miss Isabel Bird, whose record as a traveller embraced wanderings over a considerable portion of the uncivilised surface of the globe, in her book describing her journey through the wildest parts of Eastern Persia and Kurdistan, said : —
"The remaining portion of the outfit, but not the least important, consists of a beautiful medicine chest of the most compact and portable make, from Messrs. Burroughs Wellcome and Co.. containing fifty small bottles of their invaluable 'Tabloids.' The fame of Burroughs Wellcome and Go's chest has spread far and wide, and the natives think its possessor must be a Hakim."
•TABLOID' MEDICAL EQUIPMENT FOR A SPORTING TOUR
MR. ROOSEVELT IN AFRICA
Mr. Roosevelt on the occasion of his famous shooting expedition into Africa, took with him, in accordance with the precedent set by so many travellers in the Dark
HISTORICAL MI-.DICAI. Kofi I'MKXTS
Continent, a " Congo " No. 251 'Tabloid ' Medicine Chest. His Medical Officer, Colonel E. A. Mearns, upon the return of the party, pronounced the outfit " very satisfactory and useful."
From almost all parts of the globe similar testimony to the durability and utility of ' Tabloid ' equipments conies to hand, two typical reports are appended :—
Extract from the report of H. F. RAND, Esq., M.D., F.K.C.S., Principal Medical Officer, British South Africa Company : —
We have had Burroughs Wellcome >Sc Co.'s "Congo" Chests, fitted with 'Tabloid' medicines, in daily use during the occupation of this country. They have proved of inestimable service.
Extract from the report of the late W. H. CKOSSE, M.D., M.K.C.S., Principal Sledical Officer, British Royal Niger Company : —
All these ' Tabloid ' drills are so Hood it is impossible for me to s|>eak more highly of one than another. They are all of the very l«:st quality, each drug is accurately described, and reliable. To the traveller these preparations are simply invaluable, and I would strongly advise everyone coming out to the Tropics to net a full supply of ' Tabloid ' medicines.
BURROUGHS WELLCOMK & Co. have for many years made a special study of the requirements of travellers and * expeditions, not only in respect of compactness, portability climate and permanence, but also in the selection of remedies necessary to combat the maladies prevalent in every clime, from the Arctic to the Antarctic. In the course of their long experience in the medical equipment of exploring, military and sporting expeditions they have acquired a large fund of special information on this subject, which is always at the service of medical practitioners who may be called upon to act as expeditionary medical officers, or to give advice as to the supplies necessary for any climate.
' Tabloid ' Brand Medicine Cases contain, in a small space, a complete outfit of pure drugs in doses of extreme EmerK<-m-y accuracy. They can be carried in the pocket, in the for pocket, carriage or motor-car, or on the cycle, their contents cycle, motor being always ready for use in emergencies. They are c*rn*«r specially valuable to the country practitioner, who is often called upon to cover long distances, and who would experience great difficulty in carrying or obtaining supplies of such medicines as he may desire to administer promptly, were it not for the convenience and portability of ' Tabloid ' Brand Medicine Cases.
;",'?«' ' TABLOID ' » .< A s i>
PLEATED COMPRESSED
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS
Pleated Compressed Bandages and Dressings were originated and introduced by Burroughs Wellcome & Co.
' TABLOID ' BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS provide the means of applying strictly scientific treatment, and, in cases of accident, enable those on the spot to render first-aid treat- ment should medical assistance be unavailable or delayed. Their use in such emergencies may prevent serious complications which frequently arise in minor accidents, and from the neglect of wounds, abrasions, etc.
Graphic representation showing relative bulk of an ordinary
and a 'Tabloid' Bandage, each 6yds. x 2-\/2 in.
(One-half actual sixe)
Ideal lor general
' TAHLOID ' Bandages and Dressings are made of materials of the finest quality, very highly compressed. Each is enclosed in an efficient protective covering, thus securing freedom from all risk of contamination. For all purposes, whether at home or when travelling, they are superior to the ordinary varieties and their advantages are obvious.
NOTE. — A further important advance, original with B. W. & Co., is the issue of these 'Tabloid' Bandages and Dressings— sterilised.
TYPICAL AWARDS
AT I N T H R N A T I O N A L EXHIBITIONS
COSKKKRKI) I TON B r K K O C i; II S W H I. 11/OMK .V Co
FOR T H I: S c : 1 1; N i 1 1 I < ; I: x ( : i; 1. 1 i; N < : i; oi T H i- I-'ikM's PRODI <;T.S
ST. I. o u i s 1904
T H RH K dRA N U PR I /. liS
THKEI-: (,()!. D \\L-DAI.S
L I E O K
1 905
M MAN
1 906
SIX (J RAND 1'RI / HS THRHb DIPLOMAS OF HONOUR THRFF (i()l. I) MEDALS
I H R HH (, R A NI) PRIX I: S THREE DIPLOMAS O !: H O N O I' R ONI: CiOLD MHDAI.
LONDON
(Train <> British 1908
S I! V h N (i R A ND PR I 7. H S
O N L- DIPLOMA O I: H ( ) N O I U
TWO (,OLD MEDALS
I. O MX > N
(.I.ijMn-Britisli) 1910
ri v i: (i R A N i) PR i 7. i:s
ONI: (,<)!.!> Ml:. DAL
B
1910
h Hi H T d R A M) P R I /. l: S THRLH DIPLOMAS Ol HONOl'R ONL <,OI D MI DM.
BUENOS
A I » t- s
1910
ONI (i R AND P R I / !•:
A I I A H -K II A 1)
191011
M A K I N i i IN All
H THAN 240 HKiHHST A \\ \ Kl ) S
"The strong thing is the just thing"
Carlylc
' Tabloid ' marks the work of Burroughs Wellcome and Company.
The use of the word is to enable the prescriber, dispenser and patient to get the right thing with one short word, instead of the firm's long name.
If another maker apply the word to his product, the act is unlawful. ' Tabloid ' is our trade mark.
If a vendor disregard it, in dispens- ing or selling, the act is unlawful— for the same reason.
We prosecute both offenders rigor- ously, in the interest of prescribers, dispensers, patients and ourselves.
Please inform us of any instance of either offence.
BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co.
>/
I? I R I> ' S - E V E VlKW OK VV K L L C O M E C I. V B A N I> INSTITUTE B U I I. 11 I N C S A N P G R O I) N I> S
THE WELLCOMH CLUB AND INSTITUTE
And all this house was peopled fair With sweet attendance, so that in each part With lovely sights were gentle faces found. Soft speech and willing service : each one glad To gladden, pleased at pleasure, proud to obey."
Sir Edwin A mold
" The true veins of wealth are purple not in rock, but in flesh -and the final out- come and consummation of all wealth is in producing as many as possible full- breathed, bright eyed and happy-hearted
creatures."
Ruskin
OHM; crs 01 TM»; WKI. I.CO.MI; Ci.ru AND I NST IT i TI;
From the first. Welfare Work has been a special feature with the firm. This Club and Institute is a part of the general scheme, and was founded for the benefit of the employees of DCKKOCC-HS WKI.LCOME it Co.. amongst whom are included a large number of professional scientific workers. The premises consist of the old manor house formerly known as Acacia Hall. together witli other buildings which provide libraries, reading rooms, assembly rooms and a gymnasium. These are surrounded bv an extensive park through which the river Darent runs.
I he objects of the club are- to promote harmony and happy social intercourse amongst the employees and to supply them with a pleasant resort out of business hour.*.
to encourage mental and physical recreation by means of music, literary and other entertainments, technical and other instruction classes with occasional lectures, and athletics, field sports and games
Tin- l;.\ecuti\e Committee ol the club regulates the conduct of the club and control*, the Use of the ri\et for boating, swimming, fishing, etc., a-* \\ell 'is the gymnasium, library, museum, baths, sport*, fields games and various other feature*.. All suitable technical journals and a large selt ction of newspaper*-, maga/mes, etc.. are available in the reading rooms
All employees willing ti > attend the 1 > A \< 1 1 •< >i i • TM-HMC. \i Ix>riTfTi: have their fees paid, and the linn gives pri/es through the Institute for profit ienc\ MI the technical subjects in which it :s interested.
• empl /ellous
• \\ork
INAUGURATION OF T H b WELLCO.MH CLUB AND INSTITUTE. JUNE 24. i**>
(Rt print t'roin Pr, ss Rtport)
NE of the most interesting events which have taken place in the town of Hartford for many years past was the opening of the Wellcome Club and Institute When it is remembered that the prosperity of the town is so closely identified with that of its greatest industry, it is not surprising that Saturday's event evoked so much enthusiasm throughout the district. Messrs Burroughs Wellcome \- Co. have always been recognised as model employers, and of the »lay bore eloquent testimony not us kindly consideration ot the welfare ol >yees, but also to the precision, exactness and organisation which have alwavs characterised
The club has been tounded by Mr \\ellromi-, the head ol the firm, to provide the employee-^ with opportunities for recreation, and tor promoting technical education With these ends m view, he acquired the Manor Hou.se. commonly known as Acacia Hall, together uith its beautiful and extensive grounds, through which tlou^ the river Darent The manor hou^e itself .r:d the adjoining buildings have been elaboratelv fitted arid furnished to "ieet the new requirements. A large gvinnnsium and extensive baths and lavatories with the ni:>->t perfect modern fittings have been built, and the ground- beautifully laid out for the purposes of enjovmer.: and recreation
. - srv*-5gr '£
No pains or expense have been spared in any direction, and it is doubtful if there is any body of employees in the world which can boast of so magnificent a club and pleasure park.
THK DAY'S I 'KOCI-:KI>IN<,S
The proceedings on Saturday were favoured with perfect weather, and great credit is due to those responsible for the arrangements, which were admirably carried out At ii a.m., immediately alter the special train conveying the London visitors steamed into Dartford station, the day's programme commenced with a tire drill at the firm's works and laboratories. From the station plat- form an excellent view was obtained. Sir Hiram Maxim, the distinguished engineer, who was present, timed the display and stated that the streams of water from four principal points were in full play within two minutes of the sounding of the alarm which called out the firemen
SERVICK AT THK PARISH Ciirucii
The company then proceeded to the historic old Parish Church, which was quickly filled bv the visitor-. and the firm's employees The service, conducted by the Rev. !•".. P. Smith, Vicar of l>arttord, was. although simple and undenominational in character, a beautiful and impressive ceremony, in which \\ere appropriately included the following texts :
The service over. the partv. headed bv \i->itnr-. and the principal members of the stall, accompanied Mr. Wellcome from the church to the gates ,»t the dub. where Mr. Sudlow. the general manager, presented hi- chiel with a golden key.
WKI.I.COMK CI.l'H AND INSTITCTK.
Mr. Sudlow said: "Mr. Wellcome, the members of the management in London and at Dartford beg your acceptance of this key as a memento of this very interesting occasion."
Mr. Wellcome unlocked and swung open the gates, saying : " I declare this Club and Institute now open, and may God bless and prosper it." The visitors were then conducted over the club buildings and through the grounds, which were much admired.
THK LrNCHKON
At 12.30 an adjournment was made for luncheon. About eleven hundred sat down to an excellent repast in an enormous marquee erected in the club grounds, all the company, except a few visitors, being employees and wives of employees. Mr. Wellcome acted as chairman and Mr. Sudlow as vice-chairman After the loval toasts
THK TOA>T OF rm: I).\Y
"TiiK KMI-LOS KES SI'CCKSS TO Tin \Yi- 1 I.COMK Ct.ru AMI INSIIITTI. "
'I'm: CHAIRMAN said: "Most ol those assembled here to-day are employees of the firm, i'eople often speak to me with wondermen at the good relations which exist between the firm anil its employees, and the explanation which I have always been able to give in reply to sue!) comments is that there is mutual consideration. It is and always has been the policy of the firm to consider the welfare of everyone associated with it. and In our bearing, our warmth of feeling, and our interest in the welfare of our employees we have won consideration from them and we have a corps of employees, which. I am procd to say. 1 believe surpasses any similar body of people employed by anv other firm in the world
" Hv our care in selecting those who possess not alone the required talents and qualifications, hut \vho are also in hearty sympathy with us in our unique work, and by fostering mutual regard. \ve secure not only the hand work, but the heart work, of those who are associated with us \Ye have not only efficiency and devoted x.eal amongst our great chiefs who form our Managerial Staff, and in the distinguished Directors of my Chemical Research Labora- tories and of the Physiological Research Laboratories, but also expert workers as Heads of Departments, and again in the personnel of their staffs, and yet again amongst the rank and tile. I must pay a special tribute to the efficiency of the Ladies' Departments, so ably presided over by the talented Lady Superintendent, ably supported by a highly-qualified staff of lady assistants, some of whom are efficient scientific workers
"It is peculiarly gratifying to me to-day, in inaugurating this club, to feel that I meet with those associated with me heart to heart. A strong spontaneous expression has come to me from the employees, which accords perfectly with my own ideas and sentiments, that this club should not be regarded as a charitable institution, but should be self- supporting 1 want it to l>e a resort and meeting-place lor the promotion of harmonv and happiness amongst the employees an institution for mental and physical recreation and development, where all shall be knitted closer together in personal friendship. 1 am certain that a charitable institution, or what is usually so-called, is not what we want. None of the employees of Burroughs Wellcome & Co . I am thankful to say. are in need of charitv. They are self-respecting, self-reliant and self-supporting, and I want them always to continue so I am doing, and shall do. all 1 can practically to facilitate the work of organisation and equipment. The premises, suitably furnished and maintained. I am \ ery gratified to oiler tor the purpo-.es of the club and institute
" 1 rely upon the members working hand in hand and heart to heart to make a success of this institution on a sell-
BKI'XIK tl\'KK THE I) A K K \ T
Connecting tin: lawn with tin- orclianl. garden and playing ficlil-
3(i2
supporting basis. It is my strong desire that every employee will become a member of the club and institute. We shall have an administrative committee, but also every member of the club should regard himself or herself as a member of a grand committee with duties to perform. It is essential to the success of this club that the members should all strive to bury every selfish desire in order to promote the happiness of their associates. We had some beautiful texts this morning during the inaugural service at the church. I want to recall one — ' Bear ye one another's burdens.' We know that those who seek their own selfish gratification in this world are the least happy, and those who try to bear each other's burdens and to assist each other, get the greatest happiness to be found in this life. Following such a course requires self-sacrifice, and I hope everyone will keep this text in view, and that it will be the first and constant thought and endeavour of members of this club and institute to make others happy
" I cannot sufficiently express to the members of the Management at London and Dartford, who have presented me with a golden key with which to unlock the gates of this club and institute, how deeply touched 1 am by this expression of their kindness. I am always receiving kind consideration and support from these, my valued associates. I shall always treasure this jewel. Those beautiful giant storks, in antique bron/e, which grace the fountain immediately \\ithin the entrance to the grounds, were presented to us by Mr. Lloyd Williams, of the Works Management \Ve all deeply appreciate his generous gift of these superb works of art Let us drink heartily tin- toast ' The Employees, and Success to tin- Wellcome Club and Institute,' and I associate with the toast the name of Mr. 1\ ("lay Sudlow, our esteemed (General Manager, the oldest member of our staff, and my invaluable right-hand support in the direction of this business.
MK. K. CI.AV Sriu.ou replied: " Before 1 refer to the toast that has been so very kindly proposed from the
-
• •' '' " •'''''''* Q'fa$ ti ••'-
THE G A u i) E N C i< i K K Is a tributary of the Darem. dividing tin- orchard from the kitchen
i hair. I believe I shall be expressing the feelings not only <>l the employees, whom I am very proud to represent, but also of the visitors who have honoure;! us with their presence, \vheu I say ho\v glad \ve are to have Mr. Wellcome with us to-day in renewed health. He is the hardest worked and the hardest working meml>er ot our large community, and it is a matter tor very sincere rejoicing that, after another twelve, months of incessant thought and labour in the conduct of this business, he is able to preside over us on this unique occasion. this red-letter day in the annals of the firm, with his accustomed force and vigour.
" 1 cannot but think that the knowledge gained by us here this morning as regards the extent of the provision made lor our comfort and happiness, of the advantages and privileges secured to us by this club and institute, is a perfect revelation The idea ol this club, as we all know, originated with Mr. Wellcome It is absolutely his creation, and we owe him a very deep and lasting debt ol gratitude lor the initiation of the scheme, and lor the immense amount of thought and study that he has so ungrudgiuglv given, in order to make this club perlect and complete in everv detail
It I mistake not. our visitor-, have alreadv come to the conclusion that to be an emplovee ot the firm ot Burroughs Wellcome \ Co. i-- to occupv a verv happy and a verv privileged position As the oldest member ol that body next year I shall attain mv majority in Mr. Wellcome s service I am glad to assure our visitors that their conclusion is an absolutely just one Mr Wcllcome lias proved himselt a master whom it is at once a pride, a pleasure, and an honour to serve, and there are many of us here present to-day who. having given him our best, feel that we tall verv -.hort ot the service that we would desire to render him.
Mr. Wellcome, you have told us that von do not want. and that von do not look for thanks, but I do hope, that
T II K Si' OR IS I" I H L 1)
The first of the pla\inu fieUU
von will allow us to express our very deep appreciation of your generous kindness in placing this club at our disposal, of the personal feeling you have thrown into the under- taking by loaning to the club many of those treasures that you have been at such pains during many years to collect, and of your friendly goodwill in allowing us, in accordance with our unanimous wish, to call this club by your own name. \Ve sincerely hope that«you will be spared tor many years to witness, and to rejoice in. the complete fulfilment of the high ideal that you have formed with regard to your employees and may that realisation be brought about in a great measure by means of the Wellcome Club and Institute, so happilv and so successfully inaugurated to-day "
TOAST : " Tin: FIRM."
I'KOKKSSOK JOHN ATTFIKU>, F.R S , said : "1 have the great honour of asking you to drink to the continued prosperity ol the firm of Messrs Burroughs Wellcome iv: Co 1 assume that everyone present is interested in the leading work of this firm, which is the association of scientific and commercial pharmacy.
"The firm is distinguished in many ways. It is dis- tinguished for its progressive spirit. 1 look at the various journals of pharmacy and medicine thai are published in our Colonies and India, as well as those published in the I'nited Kingdom, and I never take up one but I find the mention, and sometimes a very long mention too. of this linn A second great characteristic of the (inn is the entire reliability of all the articles it sends out 1 am sure no one could have followed its development without noticing the wonderful originality that lias alwavs characterised it ; and 1 may add that all this is chiefly due to the present head of the firm. Mr Wellcome, and his wonderful skill in organisation in every department
"Talking of organisation, we who are here to-day as visitors, must. I am sure, have been charmed by tin- evidence of organisation which we have seen from the time
Tt,
\\KI.I.COMK (I.I I! AND INSTITt'TK
we left Charing Cross till the present moment. The great comfort of the arrangements of that special train that was provided for us ; and, when we had arrived at Dartford station, the very interesting fire alarm drill, with its wonderful evidence of promptitude and precision ; the extremely beautiful and, I may add, poetic inauguration service at the church, and the interesting, though it has been termed formal, opening of the Club and Institute, by Mr. Wellcome. I was very proud indeed, seeing that I have known the principals of the firm for so many years, and have watched their progress, to be the first one welcomed on this occasion by Mr. Wellcome when he opened the gates with that beautiful golden key, which has been presented to him by his managers.
" I feel sure you will respond to this toast for, perhaps, a deeper reason than I have offered you up to the present time, and this is the spirit which characterises this firm from beginning to end, and which I take to be, first, the promotion of scientific and commercial research, and secondlv, tin- promotion of good-fellowship amongst all the employees. Now, here I venture to speak, as Mr. Wellcome said, from the heart to the heart, because of my extreme interest in all that relates to research in pharmacy and the promotion of friendly intercourse amongst those who follow that calling. It is now jfi years since a few of us assembled in a very small room at Newcastle, and ventured to start an association (The British Pharmaceutical Conference) having objects which I find reflected here to-day -that is, the promotion of research in connection with pharmacy, and the promotion of good fellowship amongst the followers of that calling. 1 allude to it as I want to remind you oner more that the objects of that society, which we ventured to set forth as objects that could be followed bv the principals and by the employees of every pharmacy in this country, are the principles which are so successfully prosecuted by the firm of Burroughs Wellcome A Co
" I cannot but rejoice and congratulate Mr \\ellcome on the fact that, in addition to his organisation ot M'lentilic
MK Cl.ru AND INSTITt TK
and commercial research coupled with good fellowship, as indicated by this club, financial success, which has been abundantly deserved, has been realised.
"I must allude, before I sit down, to one other great pleasure that has forced itself upon me, though I must not say much about it, because a compliment to myself is in it, and that is that in every department of this great firm I find myself here to-day welcomed by my old pupils. Their merits have been realised by this firm, and I can assure them, though I am perfectly certain they need no such assurance, that the men they have obtained from the Bloomsbury Square Laboratories and Lecture Rooms were some of our brightest ornaments during the whole time I was connected with that Institution, viz., from 1X63 to 1896. I come here and I find Mr. Lloyd Williams, Dr. Jowett, Mr. Carr, and many others — but really they are too numerous to mention- all old students who distinguished themselves at Bloomsbury Square, now occupying prominent and responsible positions in this firm
"On all these grounds —and you will set- I have given you a wealth of reasons — 1 heartily offer the toast of Messrs. Burroughs Wellcome A: Co., and I will associate with the toast the name of the chief ornament ol the firm, Mr Henry S. Wellcome."
Mr. WKLLCOMK replied : " No one could tail to be deeply gratified by the honour Professor Attlicld has done to our firm and to me. I, as a youth, took mv first lemons in chemistry from Professor Attfield's text-book Tins great master led my first steps in gaining a knowledge ot chemistry, and I feel it a peculiar honour that he should have paid such a tribute to the results of the cttorts to which 1 have devoted my life.
" Professor Attfield touched upon one feature ot our work which is especially dear to me, that is mv two Scientific Research Laboratories We are sometimes asked
\VKI.I.C OMK I l.l H AND INSTITITK
to say more about what is being done there. Our products constantly indicate to the profession important results. But you are not likely to learn the details of all our doings in the outside world. There is much extremely important work going on in these research laboratories of the highest scientific and practical importance — work that is satisfactory to us as marking progress and which promises us still greater advancement. The greatest work is sometimes done silently."
TOAST: "Tun PRKSS AND VISITORS."
THE CHAIRMAN said : " We are honoured by the presence of distinguished visitors from the four quarters of the globe, and some of these are old and intimate personal friends of mine, who have strengthened me in my work by their counsel and their friendship. There are those of the Press here who have not failed when we have done anything that merited it to chronicle it, and this has been greatly to our advantage. We have only asked to be treated on our merits, and we have been treated justly by the I'ress. I will ask you to drink very heartily to the toast of The Press and the Visitors, connecting with the toast the name of Dr. Creasy, of the British Medical Journal"
I)R CRKASY replied : " It is a very great privilege to be the guest of a firm like this. It is a privilege, moreover, because this firm is one that has gained, and gained rightly, the highest repute in the world for good scientific work of every description. What the I'ress says is only what is due to the splendid work that is done bv the firm.'
ENTERTAINMENTS
Shortly after luncheon an adjournment \\as made in tin- sports field for a pretty floral mavpole dance by a group ot lady employees This was followed by athletic sports, most of the events of which were very keenly contested and watched with intense interest Tea was then ^e: •,••<! in the great marquee
In the evening there were well-contested aquatic sports, and a graceful and artistic musical bicycle ride by lady employees, the cycles being elaborately decorated with flowers. The presentation of the prizes followed, and the day's entertainment culminated in a magnificent display of fireworks and an illumination of the grounds. The twinkling of hundreds of fairy lights effectively arranged throughout the grounds, the glow of Chinese lanterns everywhere among the trees, and the flood of coloured light from the fireworks, combined to form an entrancing spectacle, which was further enhanced by the quivering reflections in the river and lake. It formed a delightful setting to the final events of a day which was as enjoyable as it was unique in the history of chemical industry.
The absolute precision with which every item in the programme, from early morning until nearly midnight, was carried out, was evidence of a most complete and painstaking organisation, and was commented upon bv scientific visitors as typical of the firm's remarkable scientific exactness in other directions.
The Wellcome Club and Institute thus happilv in- augurated in iSjij has continued to thrive during the last twelve years, and has formed an attractive centre for social recreation and intellectual intercourse for the emplovees i>f the firm. Associated with it are now several subsidiary societies and sports clubs, all conducted by committees appointed by their respective members, and atlordmg a congenial sphere of activity for vvidelv differing taMe-.. These include the Philharmonic, Photographic and Horticul- tural Societies, the Hockey Club, the Ladies' Hockey Club. Croquet, Tennis and Cricket Clubs. There is also a v erv successful Hook Club and Entertainment Coinnr.ttee which periodically concerns itself with fetes, garden parties, con- certs and other social events
rrmrfV
WHOLESALE CHEMISTS AND DRUGGISTS' CRICKET CHAMPIONSHIP. LONDON
Won by the WEI.U'OME CRI-'KET CLUB five years in succession.
During these five years the Club's record in the championship
matches was — Won 31 Drawn 1 Lost 3
At the end of the five years the Club withdrew from competition
c •;
THE GREEK TEMPLE
WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE
I N D H X
|
r \.,i |
I'AI.I |
|
Al.ais 70 |
Aquiilic Sports... ... ... 389 |
|
Aim 1 l;a/l 90 |
Ar.myakas 53 |
|
Aconite in flower 314 |
Arctic ami Antarctic Kxplora |
|
Adapa MS |
tion. Medical K(|iiii>nients iii 337 |
|
Adulteration. Manner of '27K |
Aryan I-'iimily, The ... 45 |
|
C.raliaiiH- White 2S7 |
Ashami 331 |
|
(od\> 291 |
Asoka ti.5 |
|
U'oimcan)... 2S5 |
Assam IM. 1«7 |
|
(Krith-Daviesi 29K |
Auran^/eli 91. 101 |
|
1 Latham) — M |
Mos.ine of ... 19 |
|
il'aulhanl 2S11 |
Aviators. l-'irst-Aid for 283 |
|
I'rieri 294 |
Awards 17(5. 191. 347 |
|
ll'cc.iiicO ... 295 |
|
|
iTalmteaiii ... 2*12 |
HaLiir S9 |
|
< Vcdrines* 2X8 |
Hi.cterial Vaccines ... 20* |
|
. Watkms) 2S9 |
Hactericid.il Sera 204 |
|
\\e\in.mni 290 |
Hahawalpur ... HvS |
|
,\Kiisl\.i. or Tamir-mnni 73 |
Haker. Sir }•'.. V. K.I'. S.I. 136 |
|
\Hi\i 51.53 |
Kall.au 83 |
|
Aura and Oiidli. The I'niled |
Karodii 153 |
|
Provinces of 141. Ki7 |
Mahiiraja of 154 |
|
.Ura. Mausoleum of Aklur 1« |
Karlier-Snr^ron's Shop ••• -44 |
|
.. Moti M.isji.l 17 |
Ha>le>. Sir ( . S.. K.t'.S.I. 138 |
|
\Uiicultme 97 |
Kelladonna 310. 312 |
|
\irslnp. ••(leme.it |
" Heaiiinonl 285 |
|
H.ix.n.l II." 2S3 |
Helical . ... 137 |
|
Tin- " Willows " 283 |
Hhailpur . 159 |
|
" Amen.-.." V97 |
Hli, inn. it;. n .. .. 1KI |
|
\jmeri-. The Sieile ol S2 |
Hhop.d ... 159 |
|
\k.i- 70 |
Kik.tni i 159 |
|
Akli.il the ('.real ... iH) |
M.ili.uaj.t of 1K6 |
|
\la U.I dm ... S9 |
HI. ...d I're-sme Tracing- 220. 'Hi |
|
\lw.n ... 159 \lw ii The M ill n ij i ol lt>'l |
Koml..i\ ... 135. 161 I -l\ e- . if 111. »l .1 44 |
|
Mil, d the ( '.real !H) |
(,..v, nior of 134 |
|
\menc.i \n-hip 2*17 |
I'.i .linn. mi Kingdom. The S9 |
|
\nti lei. inn- Si rum . ... '202 |
Hi.ihin.im-ni . 4-1. 59 |
|
\iitito\m I 'nil 193 |
Hi.ihman- 51 |
|
\nti\inene '-111 |
Hi.m-w.ir.. and Ku-hal^aih 159 |
|
\ppar.itii- foi |ii-nll.iii..n |
Hiook-. Krne-t. 1'hoto |
|
\\ ,-entuiA 249 |
^rapli.-i ... 30-2. 307 |
|
PACK |
I'Ai.l |
|
Buddha, The Story of ...61-63 |
Colour Kffects by Staining |
|
Buddhism 61-67 |
Photographs 3(!9 |
|
Buddhist Councils 65 |
Compressed Drills. History |
|
Burma ... 145 |
of 26S |
|
Buddhism in... ... 67 |
Connaiifiht. H.R.H. the Duke |
|
Lieut. -Governor of... 144 |
of. at the Grave of Cecil |
|
Burroughs Wellcome & Co.. |
Rhodes . 302 |
|
Foreign and Colonial |
Coronation Retialia . ... 41 |
|
Houses of ... 258, 260, 262. 264 |
Cotton Weaving ... ... 109 |
|
Burroughs Wellcome & Co.. |
Crea«h, Sir O1 Moore 100 |
|
London Offices of 256 |
Crewt. Marquis of 130 |
|
Burroughs \Vellcoine \ Co.. |
Cur/on. Karl, of K.-dU stone 124 |
|
The Work of 255-269 |
Cutch IK1.I63 |
|
Canning. Karl 120 |
Dalhousie. Maniuis of ... 1 19 |
|
Caste, Definition of ... 78 |
Datia .. 159 |
|
Caste, The system of ... 55 |
Datura Metel ... .. 314 |
|
Caves of Kllora. Bombay 44 |
Delhi. Mausoleum of Km- |
|
Central Africa. Medical |
l>eror Humayun ... 88. 89 |
|
Kquipments in 324 |
Delhi Colonnade of Hindu |
|
Central India Agency ... 159 |
Pillars 48 |
|
Central Government, neces- |
Delhi Jama Masjid 14.90 |
|
sity for 99 |
Kutab Minar 13 |
|
Central Provinces and |
DiivaiH-Khas ... '- |
|
Berar 146 |
Dhar ... 159 |
|
Certainty in Photographic |
Dholpur 159 |
|
Kxposure ... ... 300 |
DhranMhadia 161. 163 |
|
C'evlon 149 |
Dhul Lake. Srina.uar ... 92 |
|
Governor of .. 148 |
Digitalis... ... 313 |
|
Chamba 165 |
Diphtheria Statistics ... 196 |
|
Chandra Gupta . 74 |
Diploma, a XVI centui\ ... 243 |
|
Charles I 30 |
Diwan-i-Khas 91 |
|
Charles II 31 |
Dravidians ... ... ... 72 |
|
Cherrapunje. Rainfall at 9S |
Dumb-bell Kxercises .. 378 |
|
China. Medical Equipments |
|
|
in .. .. 332 |
l-"'i<tMrn H 'M '• 1 -in 1 \--ii IS1) |
|
Chinese Barber at Work ... 304 |
Lieut. -Governor of 13S |
|
"Clement-Bayard 11. " ... 2S3 |
Kconomic importance <>l |
|
Climate of India ... 98 |
Quinint1 275 |
|
Clive. Lord ... 114 |
I'.dward 1 25 |
|
Portrait of 115 |
111. 26 |
|
Club House 358 |
VII 38 |
|
Cochin . 161 |
Ktfypl. Medical Kiriipment-- |
|
Codv. Mr. S. !•'. 'ind his |
in 32S |
|
Aeroplane 291 |
1-^yptian Medical I-:.piip- |
|
Cold Storage Chamber ... 230 |
mi-iit. Anlient 318 |
|
Colonnade of Hindu Pillar* 48 |
Kluin. I-larl "t ... ... 123 |
Lli/abeth . (jnei n '#*
Kllora. The Rock ('axes of .. 44
Lmin Pasha 327
' Lpinine ' 265. 2t*
K<|iii|>llieiils. Lirst Aid 2ti9
Medical 268. 269
Kryol. Active Principles of... 219
Lamine. The Problem of ... l»«
Latehpur Sikri 89
l-'in-li^ht Snidx ,<»/>/>i>.s//i'/><fA.v W9
Liru/ Shah I uvlil.iK ... ... 87
Muhts bx Airship and
Aeroplane 28;)
l-oresls. The Conservation of 108
( .aiden (.leek. The 'Ml
l.eot-e I. ... -M
..II. :u
ill n
\\'. :«'
V.. Ill- Majeslx the
C,il»nn C.uimrli... 1.
Sir "I". !>.. H.nt (.iiMt l.in.inili.u.i .mil M.ix.plr. I.uckll.iw
<;..l.lrn Trinplc. \nirns.n ( ,nvrin..r ol HoinlM\ . 'I'll,
.. (Y>lon. Hi.
( ,o\crn,.i s .ind VKTMH s ,,\ In.li.i II:
C,o..,| I'.m-li. \ ( .i.e. M |i.,, in. ,n l'nivinri-> (, i. ill. ,111, \\hiii-. Mr. Cl.iu.l: .
.111.1 Ills \rropl.me
-125
•_t)8
Heml.xk
Henrx I. ...
VIII. ... 27 Herbs. The C.rowlh of. mider
ICxperl Si'pervision MI5
Herbs. Variation in ... "I I
Hill Tipperah ... ... 167
Himalayas ... ... 4(i
Himalaxan Kaiw '"4
Hindu Pillars. Delhi 4S
Historical I-'liKlils In Airship
and Aeroplane ... 'J8H
IIlstoiH-al Medical L,|uip
Historical Medical Lxhibi
lion 2:<9-252
Hockey Match ... ... :*S4
Himiaxun. Mausoleum of tin-
l-jnperor 88. 89
llxdcrabad 15:t
The Ni/am of IS2
llxoscxamus ... ^13
Hippoc-rale- 241
Ibrahim Khan ... S4
Incubating ('hainlx-r ... 2^1 Indo Liiropean LanunaLie-.
( nioii Orium of )9
Indian Pro-pernx . Sources,,) 9H
In. lore ... ... I.Vl
M.ili.uaia ol Hi2
India 5I..V*
l-lam. a Pi..-< Ixlisinu I-.nili !"l
lineal, ..n \\oik- and ( anal- HIT
llandu lalls. Local Hardline. I ord Hasimi;-. \\arr. n lle.lin. Sir Sven
I he Phoio
graphic L,|iiipmeiit ..I I leim-me
lack-on ll.iiin-
I xp.dilion .la^amialll I'emph Jaipur lah.m^il ... lam, - I
.lam leinpl, . Mount \l lam. i M.i-nd. I >, Un |. mm md Ka-hnui
Mahal Jal-
la/i. tli I'h. \U.h:i..n II,, lain
|
I'AGK 1'AI.I. |
|||
|
jind |
165 ] M ah H ruin, 1 !i k;u it • i |
168 |
|
|
Jodhpur • |
159 .. Kuch Behar |
170 |
|
|
Juanfi. or Leaf- wearing Race |
70 .. Gwalior |
160 |
|
|
Junatiarh (Jnnagadh) |
163 |
Indore |
162 |
|
Kashmir & Jamil |
158 |
||
|
87 |
ii |
iii |
|
|
K'indhs |
71 |
Kolhapur -•• |
156 |
|
Kanishka |
65. |
Mysore Patiala |
168 |
|
Karma, The Law of |
61 |
Malaria in India |
272 |
|
Karauli |
159 |
Method of Infection |
272 |
|
Kashmir and Jainu |
155 |
M-illein |
211 |
|
Invasion of |
81 |
\f-jn, 1. |
165 |
|
Keith- Davies. Mr., and his |
Manipur ••• |
167 |
|
|
Aeroplane |
-';Hl Mandrakes. X\" century |
'_'S l |
|
|
k'Vi 'm r |
163 ^i^t — . , — 7j |
, 75 |
|
|
Khilji Dynasty. The |
85 |
March of Science |
173 |
|
Kistvaen Builtlers. The |
69 |
Marwar |
159 |
|
Kshattriyas 51 |
• s2 Mary, Her Majesty Queen ... |
10 |
|
|
Kolarians |
72 " Maine" Hospital Ship |
333 |
|
|
Kolhai)iir |
163 |
Maypole Dance |
376 |
|
Maharaja of |
"** Medicine Chest. Smallest in |
||
|
Kumara-Sambhava |
57 the World ... |
321 |
|
|
Kuch Behar |
"•5 Mentu-Hotep. Queen... |
318 |
|
|
Maharaja of |
'70 Mewar or Udaipur |
158 |
|
|
Kutab Minar |
13 |
Military Medicine Chest of |
|
|
Kutab-utl-din |
83 |
1588 |
:< M |
|
70 |
|||
|
I.ansdowne. The Martinis of |
122 |
Modern India, its extent |
93 |
|
1 atham ... ••• |
293 |
||
|
Library and Club House for |
Modern Methods in Photo- graphy |
299 |
|
|
Lady Employees ... Lieut. -Governor of Bengal .. |
356 136 |
Monflolo-Dravidian Group Monsoons, The |
77 94 |
|
Lieut. -Governor of Burma ... |
144 |
Mongoloid Type |
77 |
|
Lieut. -Governor of Kastern |
Morocco. Medical Ki|iiip- |
||
|
Bengal ami Assam |
13S inents in |
326 |
|
|
Lieut. - Governor t:f the |
Mosquitoes |
273 |
|
|
Pimi'ib |
142 |
• |
1 M ' |
|
Lieut. -Governor of I'nited |
MOtl MaSJKl Mount Abu |
66 |
|
|
Provinces of Aura and Outlh |
MuKhals. The Dynasty of the |
87 |
|
|
Lucknow. Great Kmambara |
Mundapum. Facade at |
54 |
|
|
and Mos<iue ... |
Mysore |
155 |
|
|
Lytton. Karl of |
m .. The Maharaja of ... |
156 |
|
|
Madras 133. |
161 |
||
|
M'dinbh'irat'i The |
55 Vilihi |
165 |
|
|
Mahumil Gha/ni |
Nadir. The Persian |
101 |
|
|
Maharaja of Alwar |
169 Nansen |
337 |
|
|
Baroda |
154 Narbatla |
45 |
r \,.i r \,.i
Nalixi- Art-. In, In-liii •-. anil " I'hx -irk,- Cianlt n " "15
Manufarturi - •• "*' I'ln -iolo^ii-al Stan<lar<li-a
N.itiM- St. in-- an, I I'liui-f- 151 lion. N'rc;---ii\ for 'AM
nixli r tin I'la^iif. an, I it- KriiinU HI
(iovt mm, -in of BoinK,\ l«l l',.l(--. Xorili ami South ... Mi
N.itiM Stall - nntl, i < '.oM-in I'onini^. !!.<,.. Tin I'hoi..
in, ill of Ma.lia- . I'll ^raplnr I ..impm, ill of. for
Nativ, Si. H,-- nii,lri -<;,.\t in tht- \i-t-tif i:\|,i-tliti,,ii ... :<i>5
in, in of B, -uu.il "^ 1'opiilalion of Imlia ... KM. HIS
Natixr Slatr- unili r C.oxi in I'n ,laloi \ Ti il,, - ... 101
IMIII: of i;. i-i, m B.-nual I'rifi . Mr. .1 iilni- :U:f
,in,l A— am H;" I'rit r -*.H
N.IIIM Stall - ,m, I, I (.OMIII I'iKlukoll.ii ... ll'l
in, in of tin I'miial- ll;:( I'liiijali ... I C<
N HIM Stair- un, 1,-r ( ioM-rn .. 1 .1. in. ( KIM i n.n ol I4_'
in, -nl of tin I'liilt.! I'm I'nri. Jauannath Ti -nipli- . 5t'
\inri- ... ... IK"
N'iviu.il>lilanal- 1H7 (ji,i-(-ii l-lh/aln-lh JS
Nt-\\ali of K.uniiur. Tin- l"l (,inininr. lufliit-nir of on
Nirvana ... W ( ,ii,inin, . B,-iu lifial Ai-tion of '-'71
Ni/ain of ||M|. rali.i.l. Th I5'2
N""" A i sa n Till.-- an, I K.nlwav-. th- C.r.nvih an. I
I'fi'l'l"- Wl TtiliH of I(H,
Orrlilia I.Vi K-'ll'i'tana \m m-v
Kaii'iil- ... /.-•
l-alanimi ";3 R.mia 55
I'anrli.ix at . or \' i I 1 a i, , Kainax ana. Tin 57
loumii m:< K.iinpui- n;7
I'., mln. Th, Son- ,.| 55 Kaina-r, an.,. lii: Iliu,
I'aniin. Tin- < .lannnai i.in .V> I ..111^11.11.1 ... .. IH.S
P.unpat. Tin Batth of S!' K.m-oon. I'.^o.la- at HI
I'arkf. Siin,,on M.DOI- :<?7 K, -.,!,.,. II,, Km,- ... ll
l'.,,-x.,natl. an,l Mahaxna «7 K, „ ., I.VI
I'aliala I«S Klt. Vt,|., S'.'
Mah.naiaot IW< U,-ln-. I I,, 5(1 .>;)
I', a,, . Tli, Bo,.,,,,! HIl R,v,-rs ,,f In.l,., 95
I'l-at-x. K, at- \,lmii.,i :»:w
IVr.pirl '-•* S.ikun:.,!., 57
rii.iiiii.it-x \a-, -. \\ I aii.l San, .n, an, I S"
\\'ll i-i-iiturx '.MS San-kin I'lama
I'hilo-ophx. Bialim.ini, a! Saut.il- 7ll
School- of ... 57 Sun,- from In.liai- Ill-Ion
l'h,.to>;iapln.Ui, miral Sol, i a- 1 1, ,,,.:..! l-x N.iiix,
non> for ... -NJ» \n,-t- SO. SJ. si. ss . s.x
I'hoto^raplix . M,. ,1,111 Siifiilitii-KiM.in-h.R, >ult-nl 'J55
M,tl,o.|-in 'J.*l S.-on. l apiain :W
|
1'AliK ' I'.M.I |
||
|
Scott. Captain. The Photo- |
Tuberculin ... 211 |
|
|
graphic Equipment of |
305 |
|
|
Scytho-Dravidian Group |
77 |
I'nited Provinces of Ajjra and |
|
Scythians. The |
74 |
Oudh 140. 141. 167 |
|
Shackleton. Sir Ernest H. ... |
341 |
L'panishads S3 |
|
The |
||
|
Photographic Equipment of |
305 |
Vasishtha . 51 |
|
Shah Jehan Ships of the Desert Sikkiui |
90 304 165 |
Yaisyas SI. 52 Vedas SO Vedrines 28s |
|
Sindh Pottery Sirmiir (Xahanl |
110 165 |
Vendidad 49 \'ictoria the Good 37 |
|
Sita |
57 |
Viscount Morley ... ... 129 |
|
Siva |
55 |
|
|
Slave Kin«s. The |
83 |
Visitsof the Kin^-Kmperoi ... 112 |
|
Sleeman. Sir W. H.. K.C.I?. Soma Sacrifice... Sports Field, The Standardisation, Methods of Standard, Raising the Stanley. Sir H. M. Steevens. G. W. Stevens, Thomas Strophanthus .. |
104 53 366 223 267 325 335 329 259 |
Wales. H.K.H. The Prince of 11 Warren Hastings ... 116, 117 \\'atkins. Lieutenant 289 Welfare Work 349 ' Wellcome ' Hrand Quinine 280 Wellcome Chemical Research Laboratories ... 174 1 87 WellcoineChemical Research I .aboratories. Scientific |
|
Sudras ... ••• 51 |
, 52 |
Papers published by 184 |
|
Surgical Instruments of the |
' Wellcome ' Chemical Works 25 1 |
|
|
XV century ... |
245 |
Wellcome Club and In- |
|
stitute 351 386 |
||
|
'Tabloid ' First-Aid 281.283, |
284 |
Wellcome Club and In- |
|
.. Inset be- |
stitute, Opening of 355 |
|
|
tween /></«f.s •- 280 281 |
Wellcome ' Exposure Re- |
|
|
' Ta bloid ' Photographic |
cord and Diary. The ... 301 |
|
|
^-i-i |
*>l)4) |
•tirii •. \ i • \ i i |
|
' Tabloid ' Quinine Products |
\\ellcome Alatena .Medica Farm ... 311 |
|
|
276-279 |
WeMcome Plu siolotiical |
|
|
Tabuteau and his Aeroplane |
292 |
Research Laboratories 188 235 |
|
Taj Mahal |
15 |
Wellcome Physiological |
|
Tamerlane |
75 |
Research 1 .aboratories. |
|
Thujjtfee and Dacoity |
103 |
Bird's-eye View of I'X> |
|
Tibet, Medical Eciuipments in |
330 |
Wellesley, The Marquis . 118 |
|
Tibeto-Burman Tribes. The |
72 |
Weymann and his Aeroplane 290 |
|
Tirupati. The PaUoda at |
96 |
William I. ... 23 |
|
Tehri (Garhwall |
167 |
., III. 32 |
|
Toiik |
159 |
Willows' Airship 2K3 |
|
Tra<le Marks of li. W. \ Co. |
308 |
Wolverhanipton. Viscount ... 128 |
|
Travancore |
161 |
|
|
Tree & Serpent Worshippers |
73 |
Xend A vesta -*9 |
m
,*f
A 001 096 537 4
J
>
*•
r^P ~^^>
fcr
"^^C -'~^^T "^^" ~^^^[ "^^n
^^^ '^^W ^^^^^ '~^^^f ^^ ~^^n "^^^^ "'^^^r "^^^
Wk*._ nfc
^T^^\ '"^^^^ ^^^^ '^^^^L '^^^^
^^rt ^^i ^^^^ ^~^^^R\ 'T^BI
"^^^ "^^w "^^^ ^^^" "^^^
*„*.**•
KM, * # *
TWflft
!*w
mjiji £"*
J&JOf
mji